MX Controller

TECHNICIAN’S HANDBOOK
Release 3.1
 SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

NOTICE
The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all
respects but is not warranted by Mitel Networks™ Corporation (MITEL®).
The information is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed in any way as a commitment by Mitel or any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries. Mitel and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no
responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of
this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such
changes.
No part of this document can be reproduced or transmitted in any form or
by any means - electronic or mechanical - for any purpose without written
permission from Mitel Networks Corporation.

MITEL, SX-200, SUPERSET, SUPERCONSOLE 1000, MiTAI, MiLINK,

and LIGHTWARE are trademarks of Mitel Networks Corporation.

Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

SpectraLink NetLink e340, h340, 640 Wireless Telephones are
trademarks of Spectralink Corporation.
HYPERTERMINAL is a trademark of Hilgraeve Inc.
VT100 is a trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.

All other product names specified in this document are trademarks of

their corresponding owners.

SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

51009229, Revision B
Release 3.1
February 2006

® ™ Trademark of Mitel Networks Corporation

©Copyright 2006, Mitel Networks Corporation
All rights reserved

ii
 Table of Contents

Chapter 1 : Introduction
About this Handbook ............................................................................................3
Purpose of this handbook ................................................................................3
Who this handbook is written for ......................................................................3
Where you can find more information ..............................................................4
Contacting Mitel® .............................................................................................6
Symbols used in this handbook .......................................................................7
Important safety instructions ............................................................................7
About the SX-200® ICP MX ..................................................................................8
SX-200 ICP System Packages ........................................................................8
System configurations......................................................................................9
DSP Configuration Options ............................................................................12
Cabinet Configuration Rules ..........................................................................14
Supported Peripherals ........................................................................................15
Default Database Configuration ..........................................................................16
Telephone related ..........................................................................................16
Voice mail related...........................................................................................17
Trunk related ..................................................................................................17
System related ...............................................................................................17

Chapter 2 : Basic Installation

Before you begin .................................................................................................21
Quick Installation ................................................................................................22
SX-200 ICP MX Hardware ..................................................................................24
Hardware ports and connectors .....................................................................24
Controller components ...................................................................................25
Identify the required components...................................................................26
Installation checklist .......................................................................................27
Installation overview ............................................................................................30
Installing the SX-200 ICP MX Controller .............................................................31
Install an Ethernet Switch ...................................................................................32
Small installations (under 20 phones) ............................................................32
Larger installations (over 20 phones).............................................................33
Feeding Power to IP Phones ..............................................................................34
Installing Software Using an External CompactFlash Card
(Optional Initial Install) ........................................................................................35
Installing Optional Controller Hardware ..............................................................37
Precautions ....................................................................................................37
Removing the cover .......................................................................................38

iii
 SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Install the Analog Option Board (AOB) .......................................................... 39

Installing Optional DSP Module(s)................................................................. 41
Installing the Optional Dual FIM Module........................................................ 43
Installing the Optional Quad CIM Module(s).................................................. 44
Installing the Optional Dual T1/E1 Framer Module(s).................................... 45
Installing a hard drive .................................................................................... 46
Installing the Stratum Clock ........................................................................... 48
Wall or Rack Mounting ....................................................................................... 49
Wall mounting the controller .......................................................................... 49
Rack mounting the controller or NSU ............................................................ 53
Installing an NSU ................................................................................................ 54
Installing SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets ................................................................ 57
FIM Connectivity ............................................................................................ 57
CIM Connectivity............................................................................................ 57
Cabinet installation and programming ........................................................... 58
Peripheral Cabinet Interface Cards and Modules.......................................... 59
Peripheral Cabinet Control and Digital Services Cards and Modules ........... 61
Peripheral Cabinet Configuration Rules ........................................................ 62
Installing an ASU ................................................................................................ 64
Connecting the Phones and Trunks ................................................................... 66
ONS/CLASS, DNIC and LS/CLASS ports ..................................................... 66
IP Phones ...................................................................................................... 67
Adding a PKM .................................................................................................... 68
Requirements ................................................................................................ 68
CDE programming ......................................................................................... 69
Installation ..................................................................................................... 69
PKM to an Attendant Console ....................................................................... 71
Connecting Music on Hold, Paging and Door Phone/Door Opener ................... 72
Music-on-Hold (MOH) interface ..................................................................... 72
Paging ........................................................................................................... 72
Door Phone/Door Opener.............................................................................. 73
Connecting a Night Bell and Alarm Device ........................................................ 74
CDE programming for a Night Bell ................................................................ 74
CDE programming for an Alarm Device ........................................................ 74
Setting up an FTP Server on a Maintenance PC ............................................... 75
CDE Programming......................................................................................... 75
System Health Check ......................................................................................... 77

iv
 Table of Contents

Chapter 3 : Basic Programming

Programming Overview ......................................................................................81
Preparing to Enter Customer Data ......................................................................82
PC requirements ............................................................................................82
Serial Connection to the Controller ................................................................82
Secure Telnet Connection to the controller....................................................83
Web Interface Connection to the Controller ...................................................84
Port Usage .....................................................................................................85
Enabling MOSS Options .....................................................................................86
System Options to Avoid .....................................................................................87
Programming the Customer Data Entry (CDE) Forms ........................................87
Programming Features for each Phone ..............................................................88
Before you begin ............................................................................................88
Programming Embedded Voice Mail ..................................................................93
CDE Programming for Embedded Voice Mail................................................93
Voice mail forms.............................................................................................94
Setting up RADs.............................................................................................96
Setting up Record a Call ................................................................................97
Using the Administrator’s Mailbox..................................................................99
Testing voice mail operation ........................................................................102
Programming Phonebook .................................................................................103
Programming an Attendant Console .................................................................104
Programming a Subattendant Set .....................................................................104
Programming a Printer Port ..............................................................................105
System Printer Port ......................................................................................105
Dataset Printer Port......................................................................................105
IP Printer Port...............................................................................................106
Programming Stations/Sets Automatically ........................................................107
Deleting a Device and All Dependent Resources .............................................109
Deleting a range of devices and dependent resources................................109
Programming a Single Line Voice Station ........................................................110
Programming a Multi-Line Set ..........................................................................111
Programming an Analog Device to a SIM2 (DNIC Phones Only) .....................112
Programming an NSU or a PRI Card in a Peripheral Cabinet ..........................112
CDE programming .......................................................................................112
IMAT Programming ......................................................................................117
Programming an Embedded PRI Trunk ............................................................125
Programming an Embedded T1 Trunk ..............................................................130

v
 SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Programming Analog Trunks ............................................................................ 131

Non Dial-In trunks ........................................................................................ 131
Dial-in trunks................................................................................................ 133
DISA trunks ................................................................................................. 134
Programming T1 and PRI trunks as DISA trunks ........................................ 135
Programming ANI/DNIS on an Incoming trunk ............................................ 135
CLASS trunks .............................................................................................. 139
Running the Line Quality Test for LS Trunks............................................... 140
Programming Symbol MiNET Wireless Phones (Optional) .............................. 141
Install Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone Administrator Tool ........................ 141
Twinning the Symbol phone with a wireline (desk) phone........................... 142
Programming IP Sockets for Hotel/ Motel terminals and ACD Monitor ............ 143
Programming Voice mail and PMS Integration ................................................ 145
Requirements .............................................................................................. 145
SX-200 ICP programming............................................................................ 146
Setting up the Ether232 ............................................................................... 146
Programming the PMS Interface on the SX-200 ICP ....................................... 147
Requirements .............................................................................................. 147
SX-200 ICP programming............................................................................ 147
Programming for the 6010 Teleworker Solution ............................................... 151
Requirements .............................................................................................. 151
Installation and programming ...................................................................... 151
Testing IP Phone connectivity and voice quality.......................................... 152
Programming SpectraLink Wireless Telephones ............................................. 153
Requirements .............................................................................................. 153
Programming ............................................................................................... 153
Programming with MyAdministrator ................................................................. 158
Requirements .............................................................................................. 158
Programming Call Forwarding - External ......................................................... 159
Feature Limitations ........................................................................................... 160
CDE Cross Reference ...................................................................................... 164

Chapter 4 : Advanced Installation and Programming

Overview .......................................................................................................... 169
Planning your Installation ................................................................................. 170
Basic PC Networking ........................................................................................ 171
Enabling the (2nd) Port on IP Phones ......................................................... 171
Virtual LANs (VLANs) ....................................................................................... 172
Configuration 1: One DHCP server per VLAN............................................. 172

vi
 Table of Contents

Configuration 2: One external DHCP server for two VLANs ........................175

Configuration 3: Router on a Stick ...............................................................177
Programming the controller IP address and DHCP settings ........................178
Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server .................................................178
Networking Mitel IP-PBXs .................................................................................181
SX-200 ICP Programming............................................................................182
Uniform Numbering Plan..............................................................................184
Programming Unified Messaging .....................................................................185
Requirements...............................................................................................185
Programming SMTP.....................................................................................185
Programming IMAP (Standard Unified Messaging) .....................................188

Chapter 5 : Routine Maintenance

Is the System Healthy? .....................................................................................193
System health checklist................................................................................193
Checking the System ........................................................................................194
Installing FRUs ..................................................................................................195
Precautions ..................................................................................................195
Power Down System....................................................................................196
Power Up System ........................................................................................196
System Reset...............................................................................................197
System Shutdown ........................................................................................197
Re-initializing the Controller .........................................................................198
Replacing the Hard Drive or CompactFlash .....................................................199
Replacing the Analog Main Board................................................................200
Other FRUs ..................................................................................................202
Performing Backups ..........................................................................................203
Backing Up a Database ...............................................................................203
Restoring a Database ..................................................................................204
Installing an Alternate Database ..................................................................205
Upgrading the System Software .......................................................................206
Upgrading from Release 1.x to Release 2.0 or later ....................................206
Upgrading from the External CompactFlash Card (Release 2.0 or later) ....207
Upgrading by FTP ........................................................................................209
Upgrading the NSU or PRI Card Software ........................................................210
Migrating an SX-200 EL/ML to an SX-200 ICP MX ..........................................211
Parts Required .............................................................................................212
Preparations.................................................................................................212
Migration Procedure.....................................................................................212

vii
 SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Replacing IP Phones ........................................................................................ 215

Restarting IP Phones ....................................................................................... 216
Upgrading Set Firmware .................................................................................. 216
Boot Codes .................................................................................................. 217
Firmware Revision Levels............................................................................ 217
Firmware Commands .................................................................................. 217
Measuring LS Trunks ....................................................................................... 218
Running the Line Quality Test ..................................................................... 219
Running the Distortion Test ......................................................................... 220
Running the Echo Test ................................................................................ 220
Maintenance Commands ................................................................................. 221
Maintenance Port Characteristics................................................................ 221
Telnet Requirements ................................................................................... 221
Entering Command Sequences................................................................... 221
Logging In .................................................................................................... 222
Logging Out ................................................................................................. 222
Switching between Maintenance and CDE.................................................. 223
Displaying the Card Configuration ............................................................... 223
Showing the System Identity ....................................................................... 223
System Commands ..................................................................................... 223
Report Commands....................................................................................... 227
Traffic Measurement Commands ................................................................ 229
Log Commands ........................................................................................... 230
Diagnostic Function Commands.................................................................. 231
Backing up Log and Trap Files using Kermit .................................................... 232
Sending Logs and other System Files to an E-mail Address or FTP Server..... 233
Retrieving Logs and other System Files using Kermit ...................................... 234
Maintenance Tips ............................................................................................. 234

Chapter 6 : Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

About this Chapter ............................................................................................ 237
Troubleshooting Tools ...................................................................................... 238
Before you Contact Technical Support ............................................................. 239
General Troubleshooting Steps ........................................................................ 240
Using the Phone Debug Option ................................................................... 240
Checking the System LEDs .............................................................................. 241
Controller LEDs ........................................................................................... 241
NSU LEDs ................................................................................................... 243
ASU LEDs ................................................................................................... 245
Troubleshooting Phones and Peripherals Problems ........................................ 246
NSU/PRI Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 249

viii
 Table of Contents

PRI Debug Commands ................................................................................250

Troubleshooting Analog Trunks ........................................................................251
Basic Troubleshooting..................................................................................251
Troubleshooting Signaling Problems ...........................................................252
Troubleshooting T1 Trunks (D4 DS-1) ..............................................................263
Synchronization............................................................................................263
Signaling Types............................................................................................264
Test/Verify (T1) ............................................................................................264
Troubleshooting Voice Mail ...............................................................................268
SX-200 ICP Property Management System Interface ......................................270
Property Management System Messages ...................................................270
SX-200 ICP and PMS Cannot Communicate...............................................273
Testing the PMS Interface of the PBX .........................................................273

Chapter 7 : Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

About this Chapter ............................................................................................277
General Network Troubleshooting ....................................................................278
Check List ....................................................................................................278
Troubleshooting IP Phone Connectivity ............................................................280
Using a network analyzer to debug..............................................................280
Connectivity problems..................................................................................280
Troubleshooting IP Phone Registration .......................................................281
IP Phone Analyzer .......................................................................................289
Troubleshooting Phone Audio Quality ..............................................................291
Troubleshooting IP Trunks ................................................................................294
CDE Check List............................................................................................294
IP Check List ................................................................................................296
Appendix A : Default Database Values
Default Database ..............................................................................................299
Default Database Values .............................................................................301
Appendix B : Part Numbers ......................................................................351
Appendix C : System Cabling ..................................................................365
Appendix D : Phones and Features.........................................................377
Appendix E : Handling Fiber Optic Cables
Guidelines for Handling Fiber Optic Cable ........................................................395
Specifications ...............................................................................................395
Operation .....................................................................................................396

ix
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Appendix F : Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips

About Folio Views ....................................................................................... 399

Index

x
 Chapter 1
Introduction
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

2
 Introduction

About this Handbook

Purpose of this handbook

This handbook provides
• an overview of the system capabilities
• installation steps
• programming procedures
• maintenance procedures
• troubleshooting information

Who this handbook is written for

This handbook is for a qualified technician who has successfully
completed the SX-200® ICP Installation and Maintenance Course. The
course has two parts: basic and advanced.

SX-200 ICP Basic Installation and Maintenance Course

You need to take the Basic I & M course if you are installing the
SX-200 ICP as a voice system only.
This means that you are using the default settings for IP and you are not
planning on implementing Virtual LANs (VLANs).
The basic course is available in self-study format and you must have
completed your LIGHTWARE™ 19 RELEASE 3.2 certification.

SX-200 ICP Advanced Installation and Maintenance Course

You MUST complete the Advanced I & M course if you are planning to
• connect a PC to the PC port on the IP Phones (enable System Option 131)
• connect the SX-200 ICP in an existing LAN (Local Area Network)
• use an external DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
• implement VLANs (Virtual LANs)
• implement IP (Internet Protocol) Trunking
• network to a 3300 ICP via IP trunk or QSIG
The advanced course is available in a leader-led format. You must
complete the Basic I & M course before attending the advanced course.

3
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Where you can find more information

The SX-200 ICP documentation set includes the following components:
• Printed documents
- Technician’s Handbook
- Safety Instructions
• Documents supplied on the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM
- SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation in Folio (NFO) format.
- Technician’s Handbook
- Safety Instructions
- IMAT Online Help (installs with IMAT application)
- MyAdministrator Online Help (installs with MyAdministrator
application)
- Symbol® Netvision® MiNET Phone Installation Instructions (located
in the Documentation folder on the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM)
- Telephone, Attendant, Subattendant, Voice Mail, Hotel/Motel Front
Desk, and MyAdministrator User Guides
- Technical Bulletins (TBs) and Release Notes (RNs).

Accessing Documentation on the software CD-ROM

1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Documentation folder.
3. Double-click Setup.exe to install the Technical Documentation and
Folio Viewer, the application used to view the documentation.
4. To access user guides and other documentation, go to the appropriate
Language subdirectory. Use the index.html file to locate the required
guides.

Technical Training Materials

- SX-200 ICP Basic I & M Course Release 3.0
- SX-200 ICP Advanced I & M Course

4
 Introduction

Release Notes
Every software release is accompanied by Release Notes, which describe
software changes, bug fixes, outstanding issues, and hardware
compatibility considerations for the new software release. Read the
Release Notes before you begin a software upgrade.

Technical Bulletins
Technical Bulletins (TBs) are issued by Mitel® Technical Support to
address frequently asked questions regarding software and hardware
problems. Obtain the latest TBs from Mitel OnLine.

Mitel Knowledge Base

The Mitel Knowledge Base is a searchable database of problem-solving
information on the SX-200 ICP and other Mitel products. The database is
accessed through Mitel Online.

Accessing Mitel Online

You can access Mitel Online from the www.mitel.com Web site.

Tip: You must be a registered user to access Mitel Online.

Access Product and Technical Documentation

1. Login to Mitel OnLine.
2. Navigate to Product Documentation (Technical Documents, User
Guides, and Installation Guides) OR Knowledge Base (Release Notes
and Technical Bulletins).

View or Download a Document

To view a document:
• Click on the name of the document.
To download a document:
• Right-click on the name of the document and select Save Target As
OR
• When viewing a PDF document, click the disk icon.

5
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Create Telephone User Guides with Manual Maker

1. Login to Mitel OnLine.
2. Navigate to Product Documentation.
3. Click Manual Maker.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to register and use Manual
Maker.

Accessing Your Mitel Options Password

You must obtain your Mitel Options Password through Mitel Online
(www.mitel.com). This password is required during the upgrade
procedure, so you MUST keep a proper record of it. A new password is
issued to you if you are purchasing new options. Before attempting the
software upgrade, to confirm a current password or to purchase new
options and receive a new password, call Mitel Customer Service during
normal business hours.

Helpful websites
For definitions of technical terms
• http://www.techweb.com/encyclopedia
• http://www.whatis.com
For networking information
• http://www.practicallynetworked.com
• http://www.networktroubleshooting.com

Contacting Mitel
Sending Feedback
If you have suggestions on how to improve this documentation, please
contact us at [email protected].

Order Desk
You can reach the Order Desk at 1-800-796-4835.

Repair Department
You must get a Return of Merchandise Authorization (RMA) form from the
Repairs Department before sending equipment back to Mitel Network
Corp.
You can reach the Repairs Department at 1-888-222-6483.

6
 Introduction

Technical Support - Mitel Dealers

Please contact Mitel Technical Support if you require technical assistance.
If you cannot resolve the problem by using the Troubleshooting chapter,
please collect the required information listed in “Before You Contact
Technical Support” on page 91 before calling Mitel Technical Support.
You can reach Technical Support at 1-800-561-0860 or 1-613-592-2122.

Symbols used in this handbook

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

in injury or death.

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in damage

to the equipment.

Identifies an important note or a useful tip.

Important safety instructions

Failure to follow all instructions may result in improper equipment

operation and/or risk of electrical shock.

See the system Safety Instructions that are shipped with the system for
complete safety information.

7
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

About the SX-200 ICP MX

The Mitel SX-200 Integrated Communications Platform (ICP) provides the
reliability and comprehensive features of a PBX, the ease of use and cost
effectiveness of a key system, and the productivity-enhancing applications
and networking efficiency of IP.
Tailored for small enterprises, the SX-200 ICP MX supports up to 248 IP
phones, 12 LS/CLASS circuits, and 24 IP trunks for private networking.

SX-200 ICP System Packages

The SX-200 ICP MX controller is sold alone or as a package that includes
the components shown in the table below. None of the packages include
power supplies for the phones; they must be ordered separately. For part
numbers, see Appendix B.
Table 1: SX-200 ICP MX System Packages
Basic Business - Premier Business Basic
Voice Only - Voice & Data Controller

LS/CLASS circuits 6

ONS circuits 2
DNIC circuits 2

Voice mail ports 4

DSPs 1 Dual DSP Module

IP Phones Seven 5207s Four 5220s

One 5220

PKMs One 12-Button PKM

Licenses
IP Phone 16 8
Voice Mailbox 16 8
TDM 44 32 None
ACD Agent None 5
IP Channel None 2

Software Options 1 Digital Link 1 Digital Link

Voice Mail Softkey Voice Mail Softkey
2nd Port on IP Phones
Record a Call

8
 Introduction

System configurations
The controller is configured at the factory as a square key telephone
system (KTS). It can be reconfigured as a PBX or hybrid PBX/KTS by
reprogramming the default database or by installing one of the alternate
databases supplied on the software CD-ROM. For more information about
alternate databases, see page 205. Both configurations are expandable
through the purchase of additional components, including DSP resources
(see “DSP Configuration Options” on page 12 for more information).
Table 2: SX-200 ICP System MX Configuration
Basic Expanded
How Expanded
Configuration Configuration
6 LS/CLASS circuits 12 (Controller) Add Analog Options Card
(Controller) More than 12 Add Peripheral Bays (6
max)
2 ONS/CLASS circuits 4 (Controller) Add Analog Options Card
(Controller) More than 4 Add ASU (2 max)
Add Peripheral Bays (6
max)
2 DNIC circuits More than 2 Add Peripheral Bays (6
(Controller) max)
0, 8, or 20 IP Phone 248 IP Phone licenses Purchase additional
licenses depending on and 24 IP trunks licenses
system package Expand Ethernet Switch
0, 4, or 8 IP Phones Maximum 248 IP Purchase additional
depending on system licenses and phones
package
0, 4, or 20 ports of voice 24 ports Purchase Options and
mail depending on DSP resources
system package More than 24 (incremental)
Add standalone voice mail
system or Peripheral Bays
with Mitel Express
Messenger card(s)
0 or 4 voice mail user 748 Purchase additional
licenses depending on licenses (incremental)
system package
(Page 1 of 2)

9
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 2: SX-200 ICP System MX Configuration (continued)

Basic Expanded
How Expanded
Configuration Configuration
Approximately 5 hours of Depends on capacity of Install hard drive
voice mail message upgraded media
storage
Three 3-party 21 3-party Conferences Purchase DSP resources.
conferences (total 21 conferees –
can have up to 5
parties per conference)
256 MB of Larger capacity media Install hard drive
CompactFlash memory
for database storage
(inside controller)
Dual DSP MMC 2 dual DSP MMC or 1 Purchase modules
dual and 1 quad DSP
MMC or 2 quad DSP
MMC
0 Links PRI-T1 4 Links PRI-T1 Purchase 2 NSUs or 2
Peripheral Bays with PRI
cards
(Page 2 of 2)

10
 Introduction

SX-200 ICP MX

WIRELESS
PHONES

Figure 1: Basic System

Figure 2: Expanded System

11
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

DSP Configuration Options

The SX-200 ICP MX has six DSP configurations selectable in CDE Form 04:
• Business Option 1
• Business Option 2
• Hospitality Option
• Analog Option 1, 2, and 3
The table below lists the DSP requirements for each of the DSP
configuration options. The requirements are guidelines only; the actual
number of DSPs required depends on the intended use of the system.
Table 3: DSP Configuration Options
2 Dual DSP or Add Quad DSP
Base Dual DSP (6 total) 2 Quad DSP
Option Type 1 Quad DSP
(2 total) (8 total)
(4 total)
Business 3 conf x 3 8 conf x 3 12 conf x 3 12 conf x 3
Option 1 parties parties parties parties
IP 4 voice mail 12 voice mail 18 voice mail 24 voice mail
(see Note) 8 G.729 8 G.729 16 G.729 24 G.729
48 IP 96 IP 96 IP 192 IP
6 DNIC/ONS 6 DNIC/ONS 96 DNIC/ONS 192 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/Class 12 LS/Class 12 LS/Class 12 LS/CLASS
24 T1 or 23 PRI 48 T1 or 46 PRI 96 T1 or 92 PRI
Business 8 conf x 3 12 conf x 3 18 conf x 3 21 conf x 3
Option 2 parties parties parties parties
IP 8 voice mail 18 voice mail 24 voice mail 24 voice mail
0 G.729 0 G.729 8 G.729 16 G.729
48 IP 96 IP 96 IP 192 IP
6 DNIC/ONS 6 DNIC/ONS 96 DNIC/ONS 288 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS
24 T1 or 23 PRI 48 T1 or 46 PRI 96 T1 or 92 PRI
Hospitality 8 conf x 3 8 conf x 3 12 conf x 3 12 conf x 3
Option parties parties parties parties
IP+TDM 8 voice mail 12 voice mail 18 voice mail 24 voice mail
0 G.729 8 G.729 16 G.729 16 G.729
96 DNIC/ONS 48 IP 96 IP 248 IP
12 LS/CLASS 96 DNIC/ONS 192 DNIC/ONS 384 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 46 PRI 48 T1 or 46 PRI 96 T1 or 92 PRI
Analog 2 conf x 3 8 conf x 3 12 conf x 3 21 conf x 3
Option 1 parties parties parties parties
6 voice mail 18 voice mail 24 voice mail 24 voice mail
0 G.729 0 G.729 0 G.729 0 G.729
24 IP 48 IP 96 IP 192 IP
288 DNIC/ONS 288 DNIC/ONS 288 DNIC/ONS 384 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 76 PRI 72 T1 or 69 PRI 72 T1 or 69 PRI 96 T1 or 92 PRI
(Page 1 of 2)

12
 Introduction

Table 3: DSP Configuration Options (continued)

2 Dual DSP or Add Quad DSP
Base Dual DSP 2 Quad DSP
Option Type 1 Quad DSP (6 total)
(2 total) (8 total)
(4 total)
Analog 2 conf x 3 10 conf x 3 12 conf x 3 21 conf x 3
Option 2 parties parties parties parties
4 voice mail 12 voice mail 16 voice mail 24 voice mail
0 G.729 0 G.729 0 G.729 0 G.729
24 IP 48 IP 48 IP 96 IP
384 DNIC/ONS 384 DNIC/ONS 480 DNIC/ONS 480 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS 12 LS/CLASS
48 T1 or 46 PRI 48 T1 or 46 PRI 48 T1 or 46 PRI 48 T1 or 46 PRI
Analog 8 conf x 3
Option 3 parties
(Requires 12 voice mail
Quad DSP) 0 G.729
96 IP
576 DNIC/ONS
12 LS/CLASS
96 T1 or 92 PRI
(Page 2 of 2)

Notes:
1. The number of conference, voice mail, and compression
resources is fixed by the purchased option and the number of
DSP devices available; the other values are adjustable.
2. The SX-200 ICP supports the G.711 and G.729a codecs.
- The G.711 PCM audio codec for 56/64 kbps generally
provides the best voice quality and is comparable to TDM-
type connections.
- The G.729a audio codec for 8/13 kbps provides a good
reduction in bandwidth with only minor loss in voice quality.
- A purchasable MOSS option controls the number of G.729a
codecs available to IP devices in the system. Compression
enables more devices to share available bandwidth.
- The option is purchasable in multiples of 8 to a maximum of
24. The default value is 0. The quantity entered must exactly
match the quantity on the MOSS sheet.

13
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

3. Installation of a hard drive is strongly advised for systems that

have more than eight voice mail ports or when Record a Call is
frequently used.
4. The MX controller can support 12 LS/CLASS, 2 DNIC, and 4 ONS
on the internal analog boards in all option configurations.
5. All T1 trunk quantities include any combination of T1/D4 or
T1/PRI.
6. The maximum system capacity is 672 TDM (ONS/DNIC) ports. In
any option configuration, trunks may be added up to a maximum
of 8 digital links (192 trunks) but only by reducing the number of
digital bays (ONS and DNIC ports) connected, so that the total
number of TDM ports does not exceed that shown in the table.
7. If System Option 82 is enabled (DSP Echo Cancellers), then one
DSP device is removed from the available pool. The number of
TDM resources (voice mail and conference) will be reduced. This
option cannot be used in a base system with compression
enabled (Business Option 1) or with a large number of TDM
devices (Analog Options 1 and 2).

Cabinet Configuration Rules

The MX controller can be expanded to include:
• up to seven SX-200 Peripheral cabinets which provide 672 TDM ports
for ONS, OPS, DID, T1, PRI/T1
• up to four Universal NSUs which provide eight PRI Links (192 PRI/T1
trunks)
• up to two offboard ASUs which provide 48 ONS/CLASS circuits

14
 Introduction

Supported Peripherals

Note: The SX-200 ICP (R2.1 or later) also supports the Dual Mode (or DPLite)
5215 and 5220 IP phones. The Dual Mode phones look the same as the original
5215 and 5220 phones. Check the label on the underside of the phone to
determine which type it is. The originals are identified as 5215 or 5220 “Dual
Port.”

15
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Default Database Configuration

The CDE Forms are factory-set with default values that make it easier and
faster to program the system. The defaults allow you to install the
SX-200 ICP in a square KTS (key telephone system) configuration with up
to 20 IP phones and two analog terminals (phone, fax, or modem) and
make extension-to-extension calls without doing any programming. You
will also be able to receive fax and modem calls, but will have to program
ARS to make external calls from ONS devices.
Two alternate databases are provided on the SX-200 ICP software CD: a
blank database that has no programming and a Premier database for the
SX-200 ICP Premier system. A database programmed with 4-digit extension
numbers is also available on Mitel Online. See page 205 for more
information about the alternate databases and how to install them.
The default database includes the following:

Telephone related
• 3 digit extension numbers that start at extension 100
• IP phone extensions that start at extension 102
• Ports on the Controller
- 6 LS CLASS
- 2 ONS (extensions 201 and 202)
- 2 DNIC (extension 198 is the SUPERCONSOLE 1000® and 199 is
the sub attendant.)
• 7 default classes of service (COS 1 – 7). They are for IP Phones, ONS,
Subattendant, Attendant Console, LS/CLASS, Voice Mail, and IP trunks.
• default key programming on the sets for a 6-line square system
• default ring cadences
• all phones assigned to paging group 1
• the handsfree microphone is not automatically turned on when
receiving a page (auto-latched).

16
 Introduction

Voice mail related

• 4 Voice mail ports (Business 1 Option with Dual DSP); 8 ports
(Business 2 and Hospitality Options with Dual DSP)
• 20 Voice mail mailboxes are assigned with the same extension
numbers as the
- first 20 IP phones (extension 100 to 119)
- Attendant Console (SUPERCONSOLE 1000; extension 198)
- Subattendant (extension 199)
- 2 ONS ports (extensions 200 and 201)
• Hunt Group for Voice mail ports with pilot number 300
- COS 6 and
- reserve extension 301 to 304 for voice mail port extensions
• system-wide Call Forward No Answer to voice mail for all calls.

Trunk related
• trunks in form 14 are non-dial-in to the CO line keys
• LS trunk circuit descriptor defaulted as CLASS
• one LS trunk programmed to Key 1 on IP Phones
• no ARS, no dial 9 for trunk access

System related
• default system options
• default feature access codes
• the default music port (located on the analog mainboard) is ON
• the default paging port (located on the analog mainboard) is ON
• the night bell extension is 340
• SMDR/CDE Print default to ON
• default DHCP settings and a SX-200 ICP Controller default IP address
(192.168.1.2) to match (factory-set).

Note: See Appendix A for a list of default values in the programming forms.

17
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

18
 Chapter 2
Basic Installation
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

20
 Basic Installation

Before you begin

A successful installation of the SX-200 ICP MX depends on careful
planning, especially when integrating the system into an existing data
network.For detailed planning information, see the Engineering Guidelines
in the Documentation folder on the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM.
Appendix B of the Handbook provides a summary of the Guidelines.

CAUTION:Only experienced network administrators should

integrate the SX-200 ICP MX into a customer's LAN.

21
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Quick Installation
You can quickly install a system configured with Business Option 1 if your
installation does not require any purchasable MOSS Options or optional
controller hardware.
If you are adding MOSS Options, complete the installation by enabling the
options in CDE Form 04, System Options/System Timers. For more
information, see, “Enabling MOSS Options” on page 86.
If you have optional controller hardware to install, follow the procedure on
page 31.
Note: Premier Business systems use the Premier database which must be
installed before enabling the MOSS Options. For more information, see
“Installing an Alternate Database” on page 205.

To install a basic system:

1. Mount the controller.
2. Connect the ground lug at the back of the controller to a ground
connection.
3. Connect the hardware:
- Connect an Ethernet Switch to the Controller’s Ethernet port with a
Cat 5 cable.
Note: The Ethernet port on the controller is auto-sensing, allowing you to
use either a crossover or a straight-through cable.

- Connect the IP phones to the Ethernet Switch ports using Cat 5 cable.
- Connect a breakout box to the amphenol connector at the back of
the controller. For amphenol connector Onboard Analog/DNIC Tip
and Ring Assignments, see page 367.
- Connect the LS CLASS lines and any ONS and DNIC phones to
the breakout box.
- Connect a Music on Hold source, Pager, Night Bells, and any other
optional devices to the back of the controller; see pages 72-74 for
details.
4. Power up the controller.
• The Alarms LEDs on the controller flash and the IP Phones display
IP addresses.

22
 Basic Installation

5. Wait while the controller boots up.

• The boot sequence is finished when the Major Alarm LED is the
only flashing LED and the IP phones display “Use SuperKey to
send PIN.”
• All phones connected to the controller are now functional.
6. Enter the IP Set Registration PIN numbers on the IP phones (default
*** + extension number).
7. Verify that the system is working; see “System Health Check” on
page 77.

23
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

SX-200 ICP MX Hardware

Hardware ports and connectors

Figure 3: Controller front panel

Figure 4: Controller rear panel

24
 Basic Installation

Controller components

Figure 5: Controller Components

25
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Identify the required components

The range of possible system configurations is determined by the type and
number of controller components and external units (NSUs and Peripheral
Cabinets) included.
Table 4: System Components
System components Capabilities
Basic Controller • 6 LS/CLASS, 2 ONS/CLASS and 2 DNIC
circuits
• 2 PFT (Power Fail Transfer) circuits
• MOH (Music On Hold) port to connect an
external audio source
• Loudspeaker port to connect to an external
paging system
• Dry contacts for Alarm, Door Opener Relay and
Auxiliary Ringer
• RS232 ports for Printer and Maintenance
• Onboard Real-Time Clock
• 2 CIM ports to support up to 2 TDM/Digital Bays
• Internal 256 MB CompactFlash card or hard
drive for system software and database storage
Optional components:
Analog Option Board Provides 6 additional LS/CLASS and 2
ONS/CLASS circuits.
Dual or Quad DSP MMC Provides more resources for conferencing, voice
mail and other applications.
Stratum 3 clock module For digital trunks.
Quad CIM Module Four ports that provide connectivity to Peripheral
Cabinets or NSUs.
Dual FIM Module Two ports that provide connectivity to Peripheral
Cabinets or NSUs.
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module Two ports that provide connectivity to T1/D4 or PRI
(Rev. 3) trunks.
(Page 1 of 2)

26
 Basic Installation

Table 4: System Components (continued)

System components Capabilities
Hard Drive Replaces the internal CompactFlash card to
provide more database storage. (Note: System is
available with factory-installed hard drive.)
Network Services Unit Supports digital trunk protocols for ISDN PRI
(NI2_STANDARD, NI2_5ESS, NI2_GTD5), and
QSIG (QSIG_ISO), DMS 100/250, 4ESS
Analog Services Unit Provides 24 ONS/CLASS circuits.
SX-200 EL Peripheral Up to seven Peripheral Cabinets can be connected
Cabinets to provide 672 TDM ports.
CompactFlash card 256 MB; for on-site software installation upgrades.
(Page 2 of 2)

Installation checklist
Tools
ˆ Static strap
ˆ Phillips screwdriver (#1 and #2)

Use proper fitting screwdrivers to prevent damaging components

and fasteners.

System Hardware and Software

ˆ An SX-200 ICP MX Controller
ˆ Optional hardware (see the previous table)
ˆ Release 3.0 software
ˆ A Layer 2 Ethernet switch
ˆ IP phones
ˆ CompactFlash memory card: 256M minimum (not required if using
FTP to upgrade software on Release 1.0 systems.)

27
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Cables and connectors

ˆ Category 5 (CAT5) cable for all LAN devices (IP phones and computers)
ˆ CAT3 cable for any analog phones connected to the system
ˆ RJ45 cable and connectors
ˆ RJ45 crossover cable
ˆ Up to ten CIM cables to connect the SX-200 ICP Controller to
Peripheral Cabinet(s), NSUs and ASUs.
ˆ FIM or CIM cables if connecting Peripheral Cabinets or NSUs or ASUs
ˆ A power cable for the SX-200 ICP Controller (supplied)
Cable plugs must meet FCC Rules part 68 subpart F for
dimensions and registration. Use of non-conforming plugs can
cause intermittent connections.

PC requirements
ˆ Windows NT/98/2000/ME/XP PC or laptop
ˆ Internet Explorer version 5.5 with service pack 2, or version 6
(recommended) for client-side rendering and 128 bit encryption
(required for access to Mitel Online).
ˆ Network Interface Card: Full Duplex 10/100M (100M recommended)
ˆ a serial cable to connect a PC to the SX-200 ICP Controller
ˆ FTP Server—used for software upgrades, database backups, and
uploading maintenance logs
ˆ CompactFlash Reader with Read/Write capability
ˆ (Optional) secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet
client recommended)

Line requirements
ˆ LS/CLASS lines
ˆ ONS/CLASS lines
ˆ PRI-T1 lines (requires a Dual T1/E1 Framer Module, a Dual FIM
Module connected to a Network Services Unit, or a Dual FIM or Quad
CIM Module connected to a Peripheral Cabinet and PRI card)

28
 Basic Installation

LAN requirements
ˆ Pre-installation questionnaire complete
ˆ A subnet
ˆ (Advanced) SMTP server IP address for forwarding voice mail to
e-mail and for e-mail notification of 911 calls and system alarms
ˆ (Advanced) IMAP Server IP address for forwarding voice mail to e-mail
ˆ (Advanced) Customer data network information (for example, DNS
server information)
ˆ (Advanced) Router if using IP trunking or connecting to the Internet or
other network

IP Address Requirements
You need IP addresses for
• The SX-200 ICP Controller
• Each IP phone (a range of IP addresses assigned by the DHCP Server
or statically assigned)
• A router or gateway (if using)
Important: The SX-200 ICP Controller uses the following reserved
IP addresses:
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.11.1 - 192.168.11.255
192.168.12.1 - 192.168.12.255
192.168.13.1 - 192.168.13.255
Ensure no other devices on the network use IP addresses within
these ranges.

Other
ˆ Feature codes and extension number plans
ˆ A list of customer-purchased options
ˆ An uninterruptible power supply (recommended)
ˆ Power source with surge protection for IP Phones; see page 32 for
powering options.
ˆ (Optional) Music on Hold source (radio, tape player etc.)

29
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

ˆ (Optional) External paging amplifiers and speakers

ˆ (Optional) Auxiliary ringer (Night Bells)
ˆ (Optional) Door Phone/Opener
ˆ (Optional) Alarm device to signal system alarms
ˆ (Optional) SMDR printer

Installation overview
ˆ Install SX-200 ICP Controller
ˆ Install optional controller hardware
ˆ Install an Ethernet switch
ˆ Feed power to the IP Phones
ˆ Initialize the System
ˆ (Optional) Load software on an External CompactFlash Card
ˆ (Optional) Install NSU
ˆ (Optional) Install ASU
ˆ (Optional) Install SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets
ˆ (Optional) Install Music on Hold, Paging, Auxiliary Ringer, Door
Phone/Opener, and Alarm Device
ˆ Connect the Phones and Lines
ˆ (Optional) Install Programmable Key Modules
ˆ Install an FTP Server
ˆ Verify the system

30
 Basic Installation

Installing the SX-200 ICP MX Controller

The SX-200 ICP system is shipped with the system software and a default
database installed. The optional components (DSP modules, Analog
Option Module, etc.) are field-installed.
Note: Premier Business systems use the Premier database which must be
installed before enabling the MOSS Options. For more information, see
“Installing an Alternate Database” on page 205.

1. Install optional controller hardware or peripheral units according to the

instructions on the pages indicated.
Analog Option Board: page 39
DSP Modules: page 41
Dual FIM Module: page 43
Quad CIM Module: page 44
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module: page 45
Upgraded Internal CompactFlash or Hard Drive: page 46
Stratum Clock Module: see page 48
Network Services Unit, page 54
SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets, age 57.
2. Wall mount the units, rack mount them, or place them on a desk or
shelf; see page 32 for instructions.

Note: The NSU is NOT wall-mountable.

3. Connect the ground stud on the rear panel of the controller to a hard-
wired ground using 18 AWG (0.75mm 2/) gauge wire. The wire must
have green or yellow insulation. Crimp the wire to the ground source.
4. Connect a PC to the Maintenance port on the controller; see page 82.
5. Connect the trunks and phones. See “Connecting the Phones and
Trunks” on page 66.
6. If you are NOT installing software or optional hardware in the controller,
power up the system.

31
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Install an Ethernet Switch

You must connect all IP devices to a Layer 2 Ethernet Switch. Hubs should
not be used. The type of Ethernet Switch required depends on the number
of IP Phones you need to install.
Important: Careful planning is essential when installing the
SX-200 ICP for voice and data. For planning information, including
a pre- installation questionnaire, see Chapter 4, Advanced
Installation and Programming.

Small installations (under 20 phones)

• Connect the Ethernet Switch to the SX-200 ICP Controller Ethernet
Port with an Ethernet cable.
The Ethernet port on the Controller is auto-sensing, allowing you to
use a crossover or straight-through cable.
• Connect the Ethernet Switch power cord to a power source.

32
 Basic Installation

Larger installations (over 20 phones)

If you are connecting several switches together, connect them in a
tree-type structure. Daisy-chaining switches is not recommended because
all switches become involved in connections from one end of the chain to
another. Layering reduces this unnecessary traffic.

33
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Feeding Power to IP Phones

The IP Phones require power that can be provided by
• an external supply such as a 24-volt adapter (required by the 5010 and
5020 IP Phone; connects to back of phone) or 48-volt power brick
(required by 5200 series IP Phones; see Figure 6 for connections).
• a multi-port Ethernet Inline Power Module (such as the PowerDsine
24PT Inline Power Unit)
• Layer 2 switches with integral power feed
None of the above are included with the system or phones. All except the
powered Layer 2 switch can be ordered from Mitel. See Appendix B for
part numbers.

Note: Power backup to the IP Phones, the SX-200 ICP, and the Ethernet
switches is required to maintain service during a power failure.

CAUTION:Ensure that the powered cable from the inline power

adapter is installed in the proper connector on the IP Phone. DO
NOT plug it in to the connector (if available) designed for a PC
or other Ethernet devices (Layer 2 port).

Figure 6: Power Brick Connections for 5200 Series IP Phones

34
 Basic Installation

Installing Software Using an External

CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial Install)
The SX-200 ICP is shipped from the factory with the system software and
a default database installed. Perform this procedure only if you,
• are upgrading the system software on site
• are upgrading Release 2.0 or later software
Note: Systems with Release 1.x software can only be upgraded on site using
a CompactFlash card. For more information, see “Upgrading the System
Software” on page 206.

• require a language other than the default English for voice mail prompts
or a second language for bilingual voice mail operation
• are replacing the internal CompactFlash or installing a hard drive. For
replacement instructions, see page 199
• are re-initializing the controller by re-installing the system software

Note: The “Initial” power-up and the reset in this procedure will each take 5
to 10 minutes.

To install software using an external CompactFlash card:

Important: Use only Mitel-supplied CompactFlash cards. DO NOT
partition the card and DO NOT copy files to it before proceeding
with the software installation.

1. Launch the SX-200 ICP Installation program on the supplied

CD-ROM.
2. Select “Initial [CompactFlash Card] Installation”, and then click Next.
3. Select the voice mail language(s) that you want to install, and then
click Next The default is English and is not selectable.
Note: The additional languages enable the embedded voice mail system to
operate with bilingual prompts. Bilingual prompts is a purchasable MOSS
option.

4. Specify the drive letter of the CompactFlash Writer/Reader.

35
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

5. Select Format to format the CompactFlash card.

Note: When formatting the CompactFlash card, specify FAT as the file
system.

6. Select a database, then click Next.

7. Click Next to begin installing the software on the CompactFlash card.
8. Click Finish to complete the installation.
Note: Wait until the computer completes writing to the CompactFlash
card before removing it. To ensure completion, DO NOT click STOP before
EJECT.

Note: Certain PC CompactFlash readers have problems with cards larger

than 128M. They report that copying is complete when in fact not all the files
have been copied. If in doubt, eject the card, re-insert it, and then use
Windows Explorer to confirm that all 37 files (64 if a second language for
voice mail was installed) are present.

9. Insert the CompactFlash card into the controller.

10. Press the RESET button on the controller or power it down then back up.
The system boots from the CompactFlash card, and then runs the
install utility. When installation is complete, the system automatically
reboots.
Do not remove the CompactFlash card while the system is
rebooting as indicated by the LED adjacent to the card slot.
Wait for the LED to turn green before removing the card.

IMPORTANT: Re-initializing a working system with a database

that has different IP addressing information than the database it is
replacing will force the IP Phones to reboot. The phones take 10 to
15 minutes to return to service once the system is re-initialized.
11. Remove the CompactFlash card from the controller when the LED
adjacent to the card slot turns green.
IMPORTANT: If the card was removed and reinserted (or replaced
by another card), the system will detect it and attempt an upgrade
or installation when it reboots. Both processes take the system out
of service. To prevent unnecessary loss of service, always remove
the external card once the system is up and running.
12. Log in to CDE and enable MOSS sheet options (if any) in Form 04.

36
 Basic Installation

Installing Optional Controller Hardware

• Hard drive or larger internal CompactFlash
• Analog Option Board
• Dual FIM Option Module
• Quad CIM Module
• Dual T1/EI Frame Module
• Stratum Clock Module
• Dual or Quad DSP Option Modules

Precautions
WARNING:INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED EXPLICITLY
WHEN THEY INVOLVE WORK WITH AND CHANGES TO THE
PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY OF THE UNIT.

Observe the following precautions when working on the system, particularly

when handling PCB cards or using test equipment to measure voltages.
• When installing or replacing PCB cards turn power off, but maintain
the ground connections to the equipment (see Note below). Power
must be OFF when inserting or removing cards. These cards are
identified with appropriate warnings on their faceplates.
• Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed circuit
cards. Handle PCB cards only by the edges and avoid contact with any
exposed electrical connections. When removing a new card from its
package, touch the package to the cabinet frame first to release any
static voltage buildup, prior to removing the card and inserting it into
the equipment.
• Conductive packages (antistatic packaging) should be grounded prior
to opening them to remove the contents, and similarly grounded prior
to placing a card in the package. Place suspected faulty cards in
conductive packages to prevent further possible damage to the cards.
Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic packaging when
returned will not be covered by any warranty.

Use proper fitting Phillips screwdrivers (#1 or #2) to prevent

damaging components and fasteners.

37
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Removing the cover

To remove the SX-200 ICP Controller cover:
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller and disconnect all cables.
2. Remove the controller from the rack or wall and place it on a suitable
work area (if applicable).
3. Remove the four screws from the top of the controller.

4. Slide the cover forward until it catches, then tilt the cover upward to
remove it.
5. Remove the front faceplate by clipping it off from the bottom of the unit.
Note: It may be easier to pry the end off first, and then slide your fingers along
the bottom edge of the faceplate to the other end.
.

38
 Basic Installation

To replace the cover:

1. Turn the controller until the back panel is facing forward.
2. Lift the lock for the AC power cord and place the cover at an angle to
hook onto the back of the unit.
3. Straighten and slide the cover forward as far as it will go.
4. Secure the cover by inserting and snugly securing the two screws on
the back panel.
5. Rotate the controller until the front panel is facing forward.
6. Secure the screws on the top of the unit.
7. Clip on the front face-plate taking care not to damage the protruding
FIM connectors.
8. Reinstall the controller on the wall or in the rack (if applicable).
9. Reconnect all cables.

Install the Analog Option Board (AOB)

1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the cover and the front panel.
3. Remove the Stratum Clock Module (if installed).
4. Attach the standoffs as shown in the following figure.

39
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

5. Lower the AOB onto the standoffs. Ensure it is well-seated.

6. Attach the screws.
7. Re-install the Stratum Clock Module (if it was removed).
8. Replace the cover and the front panel.
9. Connect lines or devices to the AOB ports and complete the required
programming; see the following sections for more information:
ONS telephones: “Connecting the Phones and Trunks” on page 66
and “Programming a Single Line Voice Station” on page 110
LS trunks: “Connecting the Phones and Trunks” on page 66 and
“Programming Analog Trunks” on page 131
Relays: “Connecting Music on Hold, Paging and Door Phone/Door
Opener” on page 72 and “Connecting a Night Bell and Alarm Device”
on page 74
Paging: “Connecting Music on Hold, Paging and Door Phone/Door
Opener” on page 72.

40
 Basic Installation

Installing Optional DSP Module(s)

The basic SX-200 ICP MX has one Dual DSP module installed in Module
Slot 3. Additional DSPs can be added by installing Dual or Quad DSPs
modules in the Module Slots 2 and 3 as shown in the following figure. For
information on determining DSP requirements, see “DSP Configuration
Options” on page 12.

41
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

To install the optional DSP Modules:

1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover.
3. Repeat the steps below for each DSP module you install:
- Remove the DSP module from its packaging.
- Remove the blanking panel covering the Module Slot into which
you are installing the DSP Module.
- Remove the small PCB ( ).
- Install the module cover on DSP module ( ).

- Insert the DSP module in the appropriate slot.

- Secure the DSP module to the controller using the screws provided.
4. Replace the cover.

42
 Basic Installation

Installing the Optional Dual FIM Module

The Dual FIM Module provides connectivity to a Peripheral Cabinet and/or
to an NSU. The MX can support up to two Dual FIMs installed in MMC slots
1 and 2.
There are three fiber length variants of the FIM Module: 1, 5, or 14 km.
Both ends must use the same variant.

Notes:
1. The NSU supports the 1 km variant only.
2. The SX-200 ICP does not support single FIM modules.

To install a Dual FIM Module:

1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover and the front panel.
3. Insert the new FIM II Module into Module slot 1 or 2 on the Main Board
connector.

4. Attach the screws.

5. Replace the front panel and the top cover.

43
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Installing the Optional Quad CIM Module(s)

The optional Quad CIM module has four ports that provide connectivity to
Peripheral Cabinets, NSUs, and ASUs using Category 5 UTP copper cabling.
The system can support up to two Quad CIM Modules installed in Module
slots 1 and 2.
To install a Quad CIM Module:
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover and the front panel.
3. Insert the Quad CIM into Module slot 1 or 2 on the Main Board
connector.

4. Attach the screws.

5. Replace the front panel and the top cover.

44
 Basic Installation

Installing the Optional Dual T1/E1 Framer Module(s)

The Dual T1/E1 Framer module has two digital trunk ports, each of which
can be programmed to support either T1/D4 or PRI. Up to two modules can
be installed in MMC slots 1 and 2 of the MX controller.
The system can support up to two Dual T1/E1 Framer Modules installed in
Module slots 1 and 2.
To install a Dual T1/E1 Framer Module:
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover and the front panel
3. Insert the Dual T1/E1 Framer into Module slot 1 or 2 on the Main Board
connector.

4. Attach the screws.

5. Replace the front panel and the top cover.
6. Program the module in CDE:
- Assign the module a bay number in Form 53, Bay Location.
- Program the T1 link; see page 130.

45
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Installing a hard drive

The SX-200 ICP is shipped with an internal CompactFlash card which
provides 256 MB of memory for system software and database storage. If
you need increased storage capacity for voice mail messages and
recorded calls, you can replace the card with a MItel-supplied hard drive.
(see Appendix C on page 351 for the part number).

Notes:
1. A hard drive is strongly recommended for systems that have
more than eight voice mail ports or when Record a Call is
frequently used.
2. Use Mitel-supplied hard drives only; those obtained elsewhere
are not supported.

Use this procedure to upgrade systems only. To replace faulty cards or drives,
use the media replacement procedure on page 199.
To install an optional hard drive:
1. Establish a serial connection to the Maintenance port on the controller.
For instructions, see “Serial Connection to the Controller” on page 82.
2. As a precaution, perform a full database backup; for instructions, see
page 203. Skip this step if the system is new and has no database
changes to preserve.
3. If an external CompactFlash card is inserted in the controller, remove it.
4. Use the System > Restart > Shutdown command in Maintenance to
stop the system.
5. When prompted on the PC, power down the controller.
6. Remove the cover.
7. Remove the internal CompactFlash card. Keep it on hand.
8. Install the hard drive as follows,
a. Remove the drive from its packaging and set the jumpers on the
drive to the Master setting.

46
 Basic Installation

b. Insert the hard drive as shown in the above figure.

c. Connect the power and IDE cables to the corresponding connectors
on the hard drive and main board. The cables are keyed for proper
connection.
d. Secure the hard drive to the controller using the screws provided.
9. Replace the cover.
10. Insert the internal CompactFlash card previously removed into the
external card slot.
11. Restore power to the controller.
12. Re-establish a serial connection to the controller and wait while the
new media is formatted and the contents of the CompactFlash card
copied to it.
13. When prompted, press return four times to log in to CDE/Maintenance.
14. Verify that the phones are working and that calls can be made.
15. Remove the CompactFlash card from the external slot.

47
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Installing the Stratum Clock

1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover and front panel.
3. Gently seat the Clock Module onto the Main Board.

4. Attach the screws.

5. Replace the top cover and front panel.
6. To check whether the system recognizes the Stratum clock card, log
into Maintenance and use the System > Show > Identity command. It
should show the clock as ST3.

48
 Basic Installation

Wall or Rack Mounting

The SX-200 ICP controller is wall and rack mountable. The NSU is
rack-mountable only.

Wall mounting the controller

When mounting the controller on a wall, use the supplied long bracket and
small bracket and the supplied screws (#10).
.

CAUTION:Make sure the wall material is capable of supporting

the weight of the unit. Mitel is not responsible for units
damaged as a result of improper wall mounting.

1. Turn the controller upside down.

2. Locate the two holes on the bottom of the Controller as shown in the
following figure.

3. Remove the two feet as shown below.

49
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

4. Assemble the two supplied screws and two nuts as shown below.

5. Screw the assembled nuts and screws into the holes as shown below.

50
 Basic Installation

6. Screw the supplied small bracket onto the bottom of the controller as
shown.

7. Mount the bracket onto the wall.

a. Pre-drill two pilot holes into two wall studs with 16" centers.
b. Orient the bracket over the two holes as shown below.

c. Insert a screw into the hole on the left side of the bracket.
d. Insert a screw into the hole on the slot on the right side of the
bracket.
8. Hang the controller onto the mounted bracket as shown below.
Position it with the front panel facing to one side so that the ports and
connectors are accessible.

51
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

9. Insert a screw into the bottom bracket to stabilize the controller as

shown below.

52
 Basic Installation

Rack mounting the controller or NSU

Use the Rack Mount Kit (Part Number: 50004150) to rack mount the
Controller. The NSU requires a different kit that is supplied with the unit.

CAUTION:When installing the system in an enclosed rack, you

MUST provide adequate ventilation to ensure that the
maximum ambient temperature inside the rack does not
exceed 40°C/104°F.

CAUTION:Ensure that a hazardous condition does not result

from any uneven mechanical loading.

CAUTION:When using the system in a rack, you should

consider the connection of the equipment to the power supply
circuit and the effect that overloading of circuits might have on
overcurrent protection and supply wiring. When addressing
this concern, refer to the system’s ratings label.

1. Attach the brackets to the rack.

2. Slide the unit into the brackets.
3. Secure the unit to the brackets using the supplied thumbscrews. The
screws fasten to the underside of the unit and fit into the notch on the
bracket.

53
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Installing an NSU

Figure 7: NSU Front View

Figure 8: NSU Rear View

The NSU connects to the Controller via a CIM or FIM cable.

Note: The FIM Module in the controller must be the 1K variant, which
is the only variant that the NSU supports.

1. Mount and secure the NSU in the desired location.

2. Set the L0/L1 port DIP switches to the appropriate termination mode
and impedance; see Figure 9, “NSU DIP Switch Location,” on
page 55. The default is network termination mode (switch 6).
3. Set the two Message Link DIP switches to the down position. The left
switch is partially hidden by the NSU rear panel.
4. Connect a fiber optic cable between the NSU FIM and the controller FIM.
Or, connect a Cat 5 crossover cable between one of the CIM ports on the
NSU and one of the CIM ports on the SX-200 ICP controller.
5. Connect the NSU L0 and/or L1 port to the remote system (the PSTN
or another system). See the table below for the pinout.
6. Install IMAT from the SX-200 ICP software CD.
7. Connect power to the NSU.

54
 Basic Installation

8. Program the NSU using CDE and IMAT; see page 112 for
programming instructions.
9. After programming the NSU, plug the T1 cable from the demarcation
point for the T1 provided by the Carrier to either L0 or L1 on the back
of the NSU. Each connector (L0 or L1) has LED indicators beside the
connector to indicate sync or not. For example:
- Red LED indicates no sync (check connection or switch 6 is in
wrong position).
- Flashing green LED indicates synch but D-channel is not
synchronized (check programming (see table below) on IMATs to
ensure correct protocol).
- Solid green LED indicates that D-channels and B-channels are all
in sync and PRI trunks on NSU are ready to process calls.
.

Table 5: Pinouts for T1 Line/Network Termination

Line Network
Pin
Termination Mode Termination Mode
1 Tx Ring Rx Ring
2 Tx Tip Rx Tip
3 Unused Unused
4 Rx Ring Tx Ring
5 Rx Tip Tx Tip
6 Unused Unused
7 Unused Unused
8 Unused Unused

Figure 9: NSU DIP Switch Location

55
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 6: NSU DIP Switch Setting

DIP Switch Function Settings Notes
TX Ground Down: Ground Set to Up
1
Up: Floating

RX Ground Down: Ground Set to Up

2
Up: Floating

E1 Twisted Pair Down: Enabled Set to Up

3 cable selector Up: Disabled 120 ohm impedance
(RJ45, PRI) (Europe)

TI Cable Selector Down: Enabled 100 ohm impedance

4
(T1/D4) Up: Disabled Default - Down

EI, coaxial cable Down: Enabled Set to Up

5 selector (R2) Up: Disabled 75 ohm impedance
(Europe)

Line/Network Down: Line If connecting to Telco, set

6 Termination Up: Network switch to Up
Selector

56
 Basic Installation

Installing SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets

You can connect up to seven Peripheral Cabinets to the MX controller via
CIM or FIM cables. The cabinets can be SX-200 ELx peripheral cabinets,
SX-200 LIGHT peripheral cabinets, or a mix of both.

FIM Connectivity
There are three variants of the FIM II modules.The same variant of fiber
interface module (1, 5, or 14 km) must be at both ends.

Note: The SX-200 ICP does not support single FIM modules.

CIM Connectivity
There is only one variant of the CIM. In the peripheral cabinets, a CIM sits
on a Bay Control Card III (BCC III), on a Peripheral Interface Module
Carrier card, or on a PRI card.
• The CIM (Copper Interface Module) supports a distance of up to 30
meters or 100 feet.
• The CIM requires Category 5 UTP crossover cable (TX and RX pairs
reversed) with RJ45 connectors.

57
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Cabinet installation and programming

The following procedure applies to the installation of new peripheral
cabinets. Cabinets migrating from an existing SX-200 EL/ML installation
install in a different manner; see “Migrating an SX-200 EL/ML to an
SX-200 ICP” in the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation for more
information
1. Install the peripheral cabinet (including Bay Power Supply, Bay Control
Card, interface cards and required Fiber or Copper Interface Module).
2. Complete the peripheral interface cabling.
See Tip and Ring Assignment tables in Appendix C (page 365) for
cabling and cross connecting the peripheral cabinets.
3. Connect one end of the fiber or copper cable to the interface module
in the control cabinet and the other end to the CIM or FIM connector in
the controller.
4. Power up the cabinet.
5. Enter CDE mode on the maintenance terminal.
6. In Form 04 (System Options/System Timers)
- Enable the required number of TDM Bays (Option 133)
- Make sure there are enough TDM devices available (Options 103).
7. In Form 53 (Bay Location Assignment)
- Assign a bay number to the CIM or FIM ports used to connect the
peripheral cabinets.
8. In Form 01 (System Configuration)
- Configure the cards (select node type as required).
9. Complete the remaining CDE programming for the cards.
For detailed programming information, refer to the SX-200 ICP Technical
Documentation.

58
 Basic Installation

Peripheral Cabinet Interface Cards and Modules

The following table lists the peripheral cabinet interface cards and modules
supported by the SX-200 ICP.
Table 7: Peripheral Cabinet Interface Cards and Modules
Interface Card Devices supported Circuits Maximum loop resistance
/loop lengths

DID Trunk card Direct Inward Dial (DID) 6 Loop resistance: 2450 W
(high power) trunks from CO (includes set resistance)
Loop length:
26 AWG - 7986 m (25955 ft.)
22 AWG - 19995 m (64984 ft.)

LS/GS Trunk Ground start and Loop 6 not applicable

card start CO trunks
(low power)

LS/CLASS Loop Start CO trunks 8 not applicable

Trunk card
(low power)

ONS/CLASS DTMF telephone sets 12 External loop resistance:

Line card Rotary telephone sets 600 W (includes set resistance)
(low power) External wire resistance:
400 W
External loop length:
22 AWG - 3560 m (11700 ft.)
24 AWG - 2250m (7400 ft.)

OPS Line card DTMF telephone sets 6 External loop resistance: 1800 W
(low power) Rotary telephone sets (includes set resistance)
External wire resistance:
1600 W
External loop length:
26 AWG - 7225 m (23700 ft.)
22 AWG - 18290 m (60000 ft.)

(Page 1 of 2)

59
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 7: Peripheral Cabinet Interface Cards and Modules (continued)

Interface Card Devices supported Circuits Maximum loop resistance
/loop lengths

Digital Line card SUPERSET™ 4001 12 24 AWG (25 IWG) - 1000 m

(DNIC) SUPERSET 4015 (3300 ft.) including up to 50 m
(low power; SUPERSET 4025 (162.5 ft.) 22 AWG (22 IWG)
high power if a SUPERSET 4090 quad wire and up to 3 m
console is SUPERSET 4125 modular line cord without bridge
connected to a SUPERSET 4150 taps
SX-200 LIGHT) SUPERSET 401+
SUPERSET 410
SUPERSET 420
SUPERSET 430
SUPERSET 3DN
SUPERSET 4DN
DATASET 1100
DATASET 2100
SUPERCONSOLE 1000
SUPERSET 7000
DSS/BLF Interface Unit
MOH/Pager Unit

Mitel Express 2, 4, 6, and 8 voice mail NA NA

Messenger ports
Card
(DNIC, low
power)

Universal card Four modules: Total power rating of modules on

(high power) MOH/Paging Universal card cannot exceed 10
DTMF Receiver,
E&M Trunk, Console

Music-on 1 each power rating = 1

Hold/Paging loop length - not applicable
module

DTMF receiver DTMF telephone 4 power rating = 2

module keypads and end-to-end loop length - not applicable
signaling equipment.

E&M trunk E&M tie trunk 1 power rating = 3

module 26 AWG - 1068 m (3500 ft.)
24 AWG - 1708 m (5600 ft.)
22 AWG - 2715m (8900 ft.)

LS/CLASS 4 LS/CLASS trunks plus 4 External loop resistance: 1600 W

Trunk SFT for circuit 1 (SPINE
module Bay only)

(Page 2 of 2)

60
 Basic Installation

Peripheral Cabinet Control and Digital Services

Cards and Modules
The following table lists the peripheral cabinet control and digital services
cards and modules supported by the SX-200 ICP
Table 8: Digital Control and Digital Services Cards and Modules

Card or Module Important Details

Bay Control Card II One for each bay

Bay Control Card III Requires the SX-200 ELx cabinet

T1 Trunk Card A 24 circuit, high power card to CO or to another PBX,

maximum distance is 655 feet of shielded cable to the
Channel Service Unit

PRI Card For the SX-200 ELx cabinet Rev 4.4 or greater
(PN 9109-600-002-NA)
Supports the T1/E1 module and the FIM II or CIM. The PRI
card is not included in the high power card count. The PRI
card is a separate bay.

T1/E1 module Provides up to 2 T1 links of ISDN connectivity (24 or 48

channels) on the PRI card. Provides up to 2 T1 links of T1/D4
connectivity on the BCC III.

FIM II Installs on the BCC III or the PRI card.

Copper Interface Installs on the BCC III or the PRI card.

Module (CIM)

DSP Module (Single) Installs on the BCC III. Provides CLASS functionality for 8
ONS/CLASS Line cards, 16 DTMF receivers and 16
conference bridges for Record a Call.

61
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Peripheral Cabinet Configuration Rules

FIM Carrier Assignments
• The SX-200 RM peripheral cabinet supports the Peripheral Interface
Module Carrier (FIM II or CIM)
• The SX-200 RM peripheral cabinet supports the Peripheral FIM
Carrier II
• The SX-200 LIGHT peripheral cabinet supports the Peripheral FIM
Carrier
T1 Trunk Card Configuration Rules
• The system software supports up to two T1 links (includes T1 links
from T1/E1 modules and T1 cards) in any bay with a maximum of eight
T1 links in the system.
• The MOSS System Option 96, Number of Links (0-8) monitors how
many T1 links (from T1/E1 modules) that the system will support. This
count includes T1 links from the T1/E1 modules on the PRI cards and
BCC III cards. The count does not include T1 links from the T1 cards.
• PIC slot 5 must be left vacant when a T1 card is installed in slot 10 or
when Link 1 from a T1/E1 module on a BCC III is programmed.
• PIC slot 6 must be left vacant when a T1 card is installed in slot 11 or
when Link 2 from a T1/E1 module on a BCC III is programmed.

Note: Do not insert T1 trunk cards into slots 5 or 6 of a peripheral cabinet.

Digital Line Card Configuration Rules for SX-200 RM Cabinets

Systems with BCC II cards have performance limits:
• In high traffic configurations, keep the Digital Line Card (DLC) count to
a maximum of 7 per bay when using BCC II cards. If you have 8 DLCs
per bay, keep the device count to 84 or less. This will avoid slow
softkey response during peak traffic periods.
• With 2 T1 cards in a bay, do not add more than 5 DLCs or 60 devices.
This avoids dial tone delays during peak traffic periods.
• With 1 T1 card in a bay, do not add more than 6 DLCs or 72 devices.
This avoids dial tone delays during peak traffic periods.
Tip: A BCC III supports 8 DLCs per bay and is therefore ideal for high traffic
conditions.

62
 Basic Installation

PRI Card Configuration Rules for SX-200 RM Cabinets

• The PRI card requires a Stratum 3 clock MMC installed in the SX-200
ICP controller.
• The peripheral cabinet supports one or two PRI cards in Slot 10 or 11.

Inserting the PRI card in any other slot besides 10 or 11 will cause
the power supply to fail.

• The PRI card will appear as a peripheral bay on the SX-200 ICP
controller, and the two links of the T1/E1 module installed on the PRI
card will appear as slots 5 and 6 on that bay (not on the peripheral
cabinet).
• The PRI card bay number is designated in Form 53.
• The PRI card requires a FIM II or CIM to connect to the SX-200 ICP
controller.
• The S1 switch settings on the PRI Card inform the T1 module of the
location of the clock source. Both switches must be set to closed as
indicated in the following illustration (to designate the interface module
as the clock source).

63
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Installing an ASU
Up to two ASUs can be connected to the controller via CIM ports. There is
no need to power down the controller to make the connection.

Figure 10: ASU Front View

Figure 11: ASU Rear View

To install an ASU:
1. Mount the ASU.

Note: The ASU can be located up to 30 meters (100 feet) away from the
SX-200 ICP.

2. Connect a cross-over Category 5 cable with RJ-45 connector to the

CIM port on the ASU and a free CIM port on the controller.
3. Complete telephony cabling for the ASU. See Appendix C for Tip and
Ring assignments.
4. Connect power to the ASU.
5. Wait for the CIM LEDs to turn on indicating that the CIM link is
synchronized.
6. Program the ASU in CDE.

64
 Basic Installation

CDE Programming
1. In Form 53 (Bay Location Assignment)
- Ensure that the CIM(s) are NOT assigned bay numbers.
2. In Form 01 (System Configuration)
- Assign the ASU(s) to slots 14 and 15 of the IP bay.
- Configure the card(s)
3. Complete the remaining CDE programming for the cards. See
“Programming a Single Line Voice Station” on page 110.

65
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Connecting the Phones and Trunks

ONS/CLASS, DNIC and LS/CLASS ports

Cross connect the ONS, DNIC and LS/CLASS ports to lines at the
breakout box according to the Amphenol connector pin assignments in
table below.
After connecting the LS trunks, use the Line Quality Test to program the
audio configuration settings. For more information, see “Running the Line
Quality Test for LS Trunks” on page 140.
Table 9: Amphenol Connector Pin Assignments
Pair(s) Circuit Type Bay/Slot/Circuit Default DN
1/26 and 2/27 ONS/CLASS 1/13/3, 1/13/4 200 and 201

3/28 and 4/29 ONS/CLASS 1/13/5, 1/13/6 Unassigned

5/30 Not Used

6/31 and 7/32 DNIC 1/13/1, 1/13/2 198 - SC 1000

199 - Subattendant

8/33 to 10/35 Not Used

11/36 to 16/41 LS/CLASS 1/13/7 - 1/13/12

17/42 to 22/47 LS/CLASS 1/13/13 - 1/13/18

23/48 to 25/50 Not Used

Notes:
1. ONS/CLASS ports do not support high-voltage message-
waiting lamps.
2. Circuits 1/13/5 and 1/13/6 are on the Analog Option Board.
3. Trunks circuits 1/13/7 and 1/13/8 are System Fail Transfer
trunks. In the event of a system or power failure, the trunks
connect to ONS circuits 1/13/3 and 1/13/3 respectively.
4. ONS ports are not designed with the necessary safety protection
for off premise connections. ONS ports must not be used to
connect to off premise phones.

66
 Basic Installation

IP Phones

1. Ensure that the controller is connected to the Layer 2 switch.

2. Plug the cables from the IP phones into the Layer 2 switch ports.
3. Connect the IP Phone to a power source; see page 34 for powering
options.
4. Wait while the IP phone boots. After booting, the display on the phone
shows “USE Superkey TO SEND PIN.” On 5201 IP phones, the MW
lamp is lit.
5. Using the IP phone's dial pad, enter the IP Set Registration PIN access
code (default, ***) followed by the IP Phone extension number.
Note: You MUST use a default IP Phone extension number (102 - 117) or
a number previously programmed in CDE. You cannot use extension
numbers 198 and 199; they are reserved for the Console and Subattendant
station in the default database.

6. Press Superkey (or Hold for 5201 and 5207 IP phones).

The phone is now ready for use. (The type of phone and its MAC
address is automatically registered with the controller in Form 09).
Note: 5215 and 5010 IP phones will fail to register on a system that has a
Default or Premier database because of the line appearances programmed
on keys 8 and 10—keys that exist on the 5207 but not on the 5215 or the
5010. To register these phones, first delete the line appearances in Form
09, or follow the phone replacement procedure on the next page to delete
all key programming.

67
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Adding a PKM
A Mitel Programmable Key Module (PKM) provides the user with
additional personal keys for their telephone set.
Table 10: PKM Models
Number of Number of PKMs that
Model Connects to
Keys can be attached

SUPERSET 4025
SUPERSET 4125
PKM 48 48 2
SUPERSET 4150
SUPERCONSOLE 1000

SUPERSET 4025
PKM 12 12 SUPERSET 4125 1
SUPERSET 4150

5415 PKM 48 2
5020 IP
5410 PKM 12 1
5448 PKM 48 5220 IP 2

5412 PKM 12 5224 IP 1

Note: The 5448 PKM, and 5412 PKM are the only programmable key
modules qualified by Mitel for connection to Mitel telephones.

Requirements
Interface Modules/Units
• The PKM 48 and PKM 12 require a SUPERSET Interface Module
(SIM1 or SIM2) in the attached phone.
• A DSS/BLF Interface Unit is required to attach a PKM 48 to an older
model SUPERCONSOLE 1000 (part numbers 9189-000-001 and
9189-000-003).
• THE PKM 5415 and 5410 require a Mitel 5421 Interface Module in the
attached phone.
• The 5448 PKM and 5412 PKM require a Programmable Key Module
Interface Module (5422 PKM IM) in the attached phone.

68
 Basic Installation

Power
All PKMs are powered by an AC adapter that attaches either to the
Interface Module or to the host phone.
Adapter Adapter
Host Voltage Part Number
Connects to... Included?

SS 4025 SIM 1/SIM 2 No

12V
SS 4125
Phone (see Warning) Yes
SS 4150

5020 IP 50000690
24V 50002790*
5220 IP Phone No

5224 IP

Console Console (Backlit version - PN No

9189-000-300/1only)
12V 700063021
or
DSS/BLF Interface Unit Yes
* Universal model

WARNING: Never plug a power supply into a SIM1or a SIM2

installed in a SUPERSET 4150 or SUPERSET 4125 telephone. If
you do, you will lose the full duplex functionality of the speaker
phone.

CDE programming
Associate the PKM with the attached phone in Form 09, Desktop Device
Assignments.

Installation
Any connection of this set to an off-premise application, an out of
plant application, or to any other exposed plant application may
result in a safety hazard, and/or defective operation, and/or
equipment damage.

69
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Notes:
1. Ensure that the SUPERSET 4025, SUPERSET 4125, or 4150
telephone has the latest firmware upgrade available on the
firmware status command in maintenance; see page 216.
2. The PKM 12, PKM 48, 5415 PKM, 5410 PKM, 5448 PKM, and
5412 PKM are the only programmable key modules qualified by
Mitel for connection to Mitel telephones.

Figure 12: PKM Connections to a SUPERSET 4025

.

Figure 13: PKM Connections to a SUPERSET 4125/ 4150

70
 Basic Installation

Figure 14: PKM Connections to a 5020 IP, 5220 IP & 5224 IP Phone

PKM to an Attendant Console

The PKM 48 provides an attendant console user with 48 DSS/BLF keys.
Up to two PKM 48 devices can be attached.
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 part numbers 9189-000-300 and 9189-000-301
can directly connect up to two PKM 48 devices. Direct connection requires
the purchasable MOSS System Option 102.
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 part numbers 9189-000-001 and 9189-000-003
require a DSS/BLF Interface unit to associate the PKM 48 devices. The
DSS/BLF Interface unit requires a power adapter and needs to be
programmed in Form 09 to associate with the PKM.
Note: The SUPERCONSOLE 1000 supports the connection of PKM 48
devices or a printer, both are not supported.

71
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Connecting Music on Hold, Paging

and Door Phone/Door Opener

Music-on-Hold (MOH) interface

The mini (1/8" - 3.5 mm) phono jack on the back panel of the SX-200 ICP
controller provides an interface to an external music source (radio, CD
player, etc.) for Music on Hold.
Input signals must be in the range of 10 to 100 mVrms. Any DC voltage
applied to the input must be less than 50 VDC.
Note: Powering down the SX-200 ICP redirects the MOH source to the paging
output. To stop the music from being heard over the pager, power down both
the MOH source and paging amplifier before powering down the controller.

CDE Programming
MOH requires no CDE programming in the default database. If a different
database is used, assign Music-on-Hold to PLID n/13/29/0 where “n” is the
IP Bay number (default 1) in Form 18.

Paging
The controller provides a single dedicated paging circuits for the
connection of customer-provided paging equipment. The equipment
connects to the DB-9 on the front of the controller. See Appendix C for
connector pinouts and relay states.

CDE Programming
The default database has programming for single zone paging to Zone 1,
which any station can access by dialing *12. No additional programming is
required.
If using a different database, complete the following programming:
1. In Form 18 (Miscellaneous System Ports), program a paging device.
2. Enable COS Option 303 (Paging Zone 1 Access) in the Class of Service
of each extension that requires access to the paging equipment.

72
 Basic Installation

Door Phone/Door Opener

Customer-provided door phone units (up to four) can be connected to ONS
circuits to provide two-way communication between an entryway and
designated extensions. Door entry is controlled by the general-use relays
in the controller—one at the front panel DB-9 connector and three at the
rear panel RJ-45 connector. Each relay connects to an electric lock that is
operated by key presses at the designated extension(s). See Appendix C
for connector pinouts and relay states.
The relay contacts are rated at 90mA @60 Vac or Vdc peak and are
normally open.

CDE Programming
1. In Form 18, assign an extension number to a Door Relay.
2. In Form 09, enter the Door Relay extension number from Form 18 into
the ASSOC field of the ONS door phone. Assign the door phone a
Name (e.g., Door Phone) to identify it on the door answerer’s display.
3. In Form 19, assign the door phone to its own tenant group and
program Station Dial 0 Routing to direct calls from the door phone to
an answering position.
4. (Optional) Program an Open Door feature key to the door answering
phones.
5. Set COS Option 115 in the door phone’s COS to ring the door
answerer the required length of time (default - 30 seconds).
Note: If you have a Subattendant phone or a console, you can set call
forwarding on the Door Phone to ring a destination instead of programming
it as described above.

73
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Connecting a Night Bell and Alarm Device

Night bells and devices such a lamps used to signal Critical alarms
connect to the general-use relays via the DB-9 and RJ-45 connectors. See
Appendix C for connector pinouts and relay states.
The night bell and alarm device each require an independent power supply.
The contacts are rated at 90mA @60 Vac or Vdc peak. Connection of the
bell or alarm device must be through an auxiliary relay if the total current
requirement exceeds the relay contact ratings.
All equipment (bell, power supply, etc.) are customer-supplied.

CDE programming for a Night Bell

The default database contains the required CDE programming for Night
Bell operation If using a different database, complete the following
programming:
1. In Form 18 (Miscellaneous System Ports), assign an extension
number to the night bell extension (default 340) at bay/slot/circuit/
subcircuit n/13/29/01, where “n” is the IP bay number (default 1).
2. In Form 14 (Non-Dial in Trunks), assign the night bell extension as
night answer point.

CDE programming for an Alarm Device

• In Form 18 (Miscellaneous System Ports), assign Major Alarm to
bay/slot/circuit/subcircuit n/13/29/2, where “n” is the IP bay number
(default 1).

74
 Basic Installation

Setting up an FTP Server on a Maintenance PC

An FTP server is required to back up all configuration data and voice mail
messages in the controller. The server is also used to download new
software to the controller through its built-in FTP client and to upload
Maintenance logs.
Any FTP server application designed for the Windows environment will
work. Windows 2000 and XP have one built into them. Others can be
downloaded for free from the Internet.
Server setup varies by vendor; the basic steps are provided below. For
specific instructions, see the vendor’s documentation.
The PC hosting the FTP server must connect to the controller through a
TCP/IP (LAN) connection. Connecting through the serial Maintenance port
on the controller will not work.

CDE Programming
• In Form 04, System Options/System Timers
- Enable Option 109, Remote Software Download.
• In Form 47, System IP, Subform 01
- Enter the IP address of the FTP server and the user name and
password from Step 2 of the FTP server setup procedure.
For information on upgrading the controller software via FTP, see page 206.
For information on backing up and restoring the controller database via
FTP, see page 203.
Note: If future attempts to connect to the FTP server fail, check the IP address
of the PC to see if it has changed. Follow the steps above to reprogram the
system with the new address.

FTP Server Setup

1. Create a directory (or directories) on the PC to hold the files you will
transfer to and from the controller—example,
C:\FTPdir\backups
C:\FTPdir\software
C:\FTPdir\logs

Note: Ensure that the folders are writable.

75
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

2. In the server application,

- Create a User for password-protected logins or allow Anonymous
(no password required) logins.
The default database is programmed to allow Anonymous logins.
The default user name is FTP.
- Set up the paths to the directories you created in step 1.
- Enable read/write access to directories.
3. Restart the server.
Note: To verify that the FTP Server works, log into it from the PC. Go to the
CMD prompt (DOS) and enter ftp < IP Address of the FTP Server >. Look for
the message “Anonymous user logged in” or a prompt to enter a user name.

76
 Basic Installation

System Health Check

Complete the following procedure to verify that the system is working
properly.
1. Press Superkey followed by the prime line/intercom key (bottom key,
or bottom-right key when the phone has two rows of personal keys).
The extension number appears in the phone display. Record the
extension numbers.
2. Verify that you can make calls between the IP phones.
3. If an analog phone is connected to an ONS port (extensions 201 to
203) on the controller, verify that you can call it from an IP phone.
4. Place a call into the system and verify that the call rings all IP and
DNIC phones as they should with the default key system configuration.
5. Verify that you can place an external call from the IP phones.
Note: If you are not using the default database, you must program ARS to
access an outside line.

6. If you cannot perform all of the above tasks, check your cable
connections. If the problem persists, see Basic Troubleshooting and
Repair (p. 235).
7. Proceed to Chapter 3, Basic Programming.

77
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

78
 Chapter 3
Basic Programming
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

80
 Basic Programming

Programming Overview
This chapter provides the key procedures to follow when programming the
system. Refer to the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation for
comprehensive and detailed programming information.
The key steps to programming the system are
ˆ Prepare to enter customer data
ˆ Enable your purchased MOSS options
ˆ Program the features for each phone
ˆ Program Embedded Voice Mail
ˆ Program Phonebook
ˆ Program Analog Trunks
ˆ Run the Line Quality test

Optional programming:
ˆ Program the Attendant Console
ˆ Program a Subattendant Set
ˆ Program a Printer Port
ˆ Program Single Line / Multi-Line Sets
ˆ Program an Analog Device to a SIM2
ˆ Program Symbol MiNET Wireless Phones
ˆ Programming an NSU or a PRI Card in a Peripheral Cabinet
ˆ Programming a T1 Trunk
ˆ Program Datasets for Hotel/Motel or ACD
ˆ Program the PMS Interface
ˆ Program Call Forwarding - External
ˆ Program 6010 Teleworker Phones

81
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Preparing to Enter Customer Data

You can use a desktop or laptop computer to program the controller on-site
or from a remote location.

PC requirements
• Windows 98, NT, 2000 Professional, ME or XP
(Windows 98 does not support secure Telnet)
• for serial connections, a VT100™ emulator such as HyperTerminal
• for remote or LAN-based connections, a secure Telnet client that
supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client version 1.0.0.1 or later
recommended), or a web browser (Internet Explorer 6 or Mozilla
Firefox) to access the SX-200 ICP Web Interface
• a Network Interface Card (NIC)
The PC can connect to the controller via a serial connection to the
Maintenance port or via a secure Telnet connection to port 2000.

Serial Connection to the Controller

1. Connect an RS-232 straight DTE serial cable between the controller's
Maintenance port and the PC's serial port.
2. Program the PC's serial port (from the communication program) with
the following settings:
Baud Rate: 9600 or 19200
Stop Bits: 1
Data Bits: 8
Flow Control: None
Parity: None
3. Verify the connection as follows:
- In the VT100 emulator or other communications program, press
RETURN several times.
While the maintenance session is active, do not disconnect the serial cable
or attempt to open another maintenance session with a Telnet connection.
Doing so will cause an error message stating that CDE is currently in use.

82
 Basic Programming

Secure Telnet Connection to the controller

Telnet is a terminal emulation program for TCP/IP networks such as the
Internet. To enable a Telnet connection between a PC and the controller,
the PC must be equipped with a secure Telnet client that supports
SSL/TLS. The Mitel Telnet client is recommended.
With the controller connected to the LAN and the PC connected to the LAN
or Internet:
1. Install and then launch the secure Telnet client.
2. Enter the hostname or IP address of the controller, and port 2000.
For example, to open a connection with the Mitel Telnet client, enter:
open 192.168.1.2 2000
The IP address in the example is the default; use Form 47 to check or
change it
3. Log in to SSL/TLS with login name ‘installer’ and default password
‘1000.’
4. Select a Terminal Type.
5. Select an Application.
6. Log in to the application with username ‘installer; maint1; maint2;
supervisor; or attendant’ and default password ‘1000.’
While the maintenance session is active, do not disconnect the Ethernet
cable or attempt to open another maintenance session with a serial
connection. Doing so will cause an error message stating that CDE is
currently in use.

83
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Web Interface Connection to the Controller

A web browser can be used to connect to the SX-200 ICP from the LAN
and manage the system using the embedded SX-200 ICP Web Interface.
Before using the SX-200 ICP Web Interface, configure the management
PC as follows:
• disable your web browser's pop-up blocker software
• install Sun Java plugin version 1.5 or later
With the controller connected to the LAN and the PC connected to the LAN
or Internet:
1. Launch the web browser (IE 6.x or Mozilla Firefox).
2. Enter http://<controller IP or hostname>
For example, http://192.168.1.2
The IP address in the example is the default; use Form 47 to check or
change it.
3. Log in to the SX-200 ICP Web Interface with login name ‘installer’ and
default password ‘1000.’
A CDE session will open.
While the maintenance session is active, do not disconnect the Ethernet
cable or attempt to open another maintenance session with a serial
connection. Doing so will cause an error message stating that CDE is
currently in use.

84
 Basic Programming

Port Usage
If the SX-200 ICP is operating behind a firewall, you may need to open the
following ports.
Table 11: Port Usage for IP Trunks
Function Transport Port
AMC Communications TCP 22
DNS UDP 53
DHCP Server UDP 67
DHCP Client UDP 68
TFTP UDP 69
HTTP TCP 80
HTTPS TCP 443
IP trunk signalling TCP 1066
Secure IP trunk signalling TCP 1067
Telnet to CDE/MTCE TCP 2000
Telnet to 6000 MAS TCP 2005
IMAT TCP 6543
MiNet Server TCP 6800
VM CMPS Server TCP 6830
MiNet Client TCP 6900
MyAdmin GUI TCP 7012
MiTAI™ TCP 8000
MiTAI (SSL) TCP 8001
Phone Rx B1 UDP 9000
Phone Rx B2 UDP 9002
E2T IP UDP 50000 to 50127
User Defined (Hotel PMS/Call Log) TCP 61320 to 61328

85
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Enabling MOSS Options

MOSS options provide additional functionality or capacity to the system. If
this is a new system and you have purchased options, such as additional
voice mailboxes or additional IP set licenses, you must enable them.
Note: Before enabling MOSS Options in a Premier Business system, replace
the factory-installed default database with the Premier database provided on
the software CD-ROM. Replacing the database prevents conflicts with Option
114 (Maximum IP Sets). The conflict is caused by the different number of IP
phones programmed in the two databases. For information on replacing
databases, see “Installing an Alternate Database” on page 205.
To enable MOSS options:
1. Select CDE Form 04.
2. Press ENTER MOC and enter the Mitel Options Code printed on the
MOSS Sheet that is included with the system software package.
3. Enter the Mitel Options password to activate the purchased options. The
password must be the password that is printed on the MOSS sheet.
4. Program any other required options.
5. Select Confirm if prompted to reset the controller.
6. After the system resets, go into Maintenance and revise Alarm
Thresholds to prevent unnecessary alarms.
Notes:
1. Attempts to enable unpurchased options causes the system to
respond with PASSWORD/OPTIONS CONFLICT -- "QUIT" TO
EXIT -- "ENTER" TO RE-EDIT. Conflicts are resolved by
entering the correct password; a system reset is not required.
2. The system warns if changing an option requires a reset. The
reset is automatic and occurs when the change is confirmed.
3. If a database from another system is installed in the controller, the
System ID and Password will no longer match. Phone service will
be lost (some phones may appear to be in service, but will display
SYSTEM BUSY when they go offhook) and a MOSS alarm
message will display in the CDE forms header. Enabling the
options using the above procedure clears the alarm and restores
phone service.
.

86
 Basic Programming

System Options to Avoid

Certain options in Form 04 could cause unexpected behaviors in system
operation if changed from their factory-set (default) values.
Table 12: System Options to Avoid
Option # Option Name Default
60 Tone Plan NA
68 SX-200 ICP DSP DTMF Receiver Channels 7
(0...7)
69 DTMF ON Timer (5-15 in 10 ms increments); 9 (90 ms)
70 DTMF OFF Timer (5-15 in 10 ms increments); 9 (90 ms)
71 Slot 10 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays) 2
72 Slot 11 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays) 2

Programming the Customer Data Entry

(CDE) Forms
The CDE Forms are factory-set with default values that make programming
the system faster and easier. The defaults allow you to install the system
and connect up to 20 IP phones plus two analog terminals (phone, fax, or
modem) and place extension-to-extension calls without doing any
programming. You will also be able to receive fax and modem calls, but will
have to program ARS to make external calls from ONS devices.
The default database configures the system to operate as a square key
system with six trunk appearances per phone.
Note: The default numbering plan uses three-digit extension numbers. If you
require a four-digit plan, either reprogram Forms 9, 17, and 50 or install the
four-digit database available on Mitel Online. For more information, see
“Installing an Alternate Database” on page 205.

87
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Programming Features for each Phone

Before you begin

• Ensure that the phone-related MOSS options are specified in CDE
Form 04, System Options.
• Enable COS options for features that are COS dependent.

To program features for IP phones:

• Program the appropriate features for each phone either from the
phones (using Superkey) or in the Expand Set Subform for Form 09.
The table below shows the codes to enter when programming features
that are not selectable via SUPERKEY.
The figures on page 90 show the key numbers required for
programming features via CDE.
A list of the features and the phones that support them is in Appendix D.
Table 13: Feature Codes
Code Feature Key Code Feature

00 Speedcall (See Note) 14 Night Answer

01 Forward All 15 Forward Call

02 Account Code 18 Release

03 Do Not Disturb 19 Single Flash

04 Auto Answer 20 Double Flash

05 Music 21 Headset Mode

06 Direct Page 22 Handset Mute

07 PA Paging 23 Call Park

08 Pickup 24 System Park

09 Campon (I Will Wait) 25 Forward Always

10 Callback 26 Forward Busy

11 Swap (Trade Calls) 27 Forward No Answer

12 Privacy Release 28 Forward Busy/No Answer

(Page 1 of 2)

88
 Basic Programming

Table 13: Feature Codes (continued)

Code Feature Key Code Feature

13 Override (Intrude)

To program features using Feature codes:

• Using the phone dialpad, enter the Program Feature Key access code.
• Press a programmable key.
• Enter the feature code listed above.
• Press SPEAKER or CANCEL.

Note: After dialing 00, dial the number to be stored.

(Page 2 of 2)

89
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

The programmable keys on 5010 and 5215 IP Phones are numbered as

follows:

Note: Key 1 is reserved for the phone’s prime directory number.

The programmable keys on 5207 (not shown), 5020 and 5220 IP Phones
are numbered as follows

90
 Basic Programming

The programmable keys on 5212 IP Phones are numbered as follows

The programmable keys on 5224 IP Phones are numbered as follows

91
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

The keys on the 5448 PKM are numbered as follows:

The keys on the 5412 PKM are numbered as follows:

92
 Basic Programming

Programming Embedded Voice Mail

Note: Embedded voice mail Release 6.22 (included in SX-200 ICP Releases
2.0 and 2.1) now supports notification on every new message regardless of
whether or not notification for previous messages has already been
answered. This feature is normally deactivated by default and may only be
enabled or disabled by accessing the Administrator's mailbox.

CDE Programming for Embedded Voice Mail

The default database includes most of the programming required for a fully
operational voice mail system. The defaults are as follows:
• 16 Voice Mail mailboxes are assigned with the same extension
numbers as the first 16 IP phones (extension 102 to 117)
- Attendant Console (SUPERCONSOLE 1000; extension 198)
- Subattendant (extension 199)
- Two ONS ports (extensions 201 and 202)
• Hunt Group for Voice Mail ports with pilot number 300
- COS 6 and
- extension 301 to 324 for voice mail ports (default is from 301 to 304)
• System-wide Call Forward No Answer to voice mail, for internal and
external calls
• Maximum number of saved messages per mailbox is 10, which the
system deletes after 15 days.
Voice mail programming that is NOT provided in the default database
includes:
• Auto Attendant Setup
• Bilingual Prompting
• Mailbox Greetings and Names
• Distribution Lists
• RAD Setup
• Record a Call
• PMS Integration

93
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

• Open and closed greetings

Note: The default password for mailboxes is 1111.

See “CDE Programming for Embedded Voice Mail” in the Technical Reference
for programming requirements when not using the default database.

Voice mail forms

Use the following CDE forms to complete the voice mail programming:
Table 14: Voice Mail Options
Form Options

49 Used to set the following system-wide parameters:

• Default Prompt Language
• Alternate Prompt Language and Language Change Number (for
bilingual operation)
• Fax Destination Number
• Message Notification
• Digital Pager Callback Number
• Auto Attendant Transfer to Any Extension
• Auto Attendant Transfer Restrictions
• Directory Voice Prompt for First/Last Name
• Generate Account Codes in SMDR (for Message Notification Calls
• Personal Contact Numbers
• Synchronize Business Open/Closed Greetings with System
Day/Night mode
• Business Hours
• Length of Mailbox numbers
• Length of passcodes
• PMS Protocol (for PMS integration)
• RAD Greeting Setup
• SMTP/IMAP Server Addresses (required for Unified Messaging)
(Page 1 of 2)

94
 Basic Programming

Table 14: Voice Mail Options (continued)

Form Options

50 Used to add and delete mailboxes and to customize the following

mailbox settings:
• Mailbox type (extension, guest, information-only, transfer-only, etc.)
• Message Notification
• Forward of Voice Mail to E-mail using SMTP or IMAP (Unified
Messaging - standard)
• Routing for Multi-Level Auto Attendant and Personal Contacts
• Operation Extension
• Language
• Play Message Envelope? (priority, date, time, and caller ID)
• Maximum Message Storage
• Delete Saved Messages
• Set Password
• Personal Contacts and Menus (for Multi-Level Auto Attendant)
Note: Mailbox creation and setup can be done automatically for each
new extension added in Form 09 by enabling Option 277 in the
extension's Class of Service (Form 03). If System Options 107
(Lodging), 108 (Property Management System) or 124 (Voice Mail
Property Management System) are enabled, the mailboxes created will
be GUEST instead of EXTENSION type mailboxes. Form 50 is used
to customize mailbox following initial setup.

51 Used to set up distribution lists of system-wide use.

Note: For each list created, record a name for identification purposes.
(Page 2 of 2)

95
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Setting up RADs
Before you begin,
• determine how the customer intends to use the RADs.
• map the expected call flow to determine how many messages are
required and the order of play.
• script the messages and say them several times to ascertain how
much time they take.
• verify that sufficient voice mail ports and DSP resources are available;
see DSP Configuration Options, page 12.
Note: All embedded voice mail ports can operate as dedicated RAD ports.
However, a least one non-RAD port is required to record RAD greetings; to
administer the voice mail system by telephone; and for message notification
by pager.
When configuring voice mail ports, ensure that some of the last ports
are not configured as RAD ports to avoid any potential conflicts with
message notification. It is recommended that at least two or three
ports be left free for message notification dependant upon system
usage. Embedded voice mail will attempt to use the last
programmed voice mail port that is available for message
notification. If the last port is not available, the second last port will
be attempted and if that port is busy, the third last port and so on.
Embedded voice mail will continue in this fashion until it finds a free
port but message notification will not function properly on a port
assigned to RAD.

To program RADs:
1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
- Enable System Option 134, Recorded Announcement Devices.
2. Record RAD greetings
- Access the System Administrator's mailbox (see Using the
Administrator’s Mailbox, page 99.)
- Press 8 to select the RAD Greetings menu.
- Press 1 to record a greeting.
- Select RAD greeting number to record (1- 200).

96
 Basic Programming

If the selected RAD greeting already exists, you will hear it along with
prompts to accept, review or re-record it.
- Record the greeting, speaking clearly into a handset (do not use a
handsfree or speaker phone).
- Follow the voice prompts to record each additional greeting set.
3. Form 49 (Voice Mail Options), RAD Setup subform
- Assign greeting sets to the RAD ports and specify how often the
sets play.

Note: Leave fields for unneeded greetings blank.

Note: Verify that disconnect supervision is provided by the CO.

4. Form 17, Hunt Groups

- Select unused voice mail ports and assign them to their own hunt
group. Leave the hunting method set to CIRCULAR.
- Set each RAD hunt group type to RECORDING.
5. Recording Hunt Group Options subform of Form 17
- Give the RAD hunt group a name — for example, Greeting 1.
- Set the Message Length timer to the duration of the RAD greeting
set (Greeting 1 + Greeting 2 + Greeting 3...) multiplied by the
amount of times the set repeats plus three seconds.
Note: When the Message Length timer expires, the Recording Failure to
Hangup Timer starts. If the RAD port is still off-hook when this timer expires,
the port is placed into DND state making it unavailable to answer calls. The
port remains unavailable until DND is disabled. The Recording Failure to
Hangup Timer is Option 404 in Form 03, COS Define.
- Set the RAD Greeting set (number 10-39) as programmed in Form 49.
6. Form 03, COS Define
- Put RAD ports in a COS of their own, with only COS option 223
(Flash Disable) enabled.

Setting up Record a Call

1. Form 04, System Options
- Enable Record a Call, Option 87.

97
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

2. Form 02, Feature Access Codes:

- Choose an access code for Send Message (feature number 41; default
code *41) if sharing Record a Call ports with voice mail messages.
3. Form 03, COS Options
- Set the following COS options
COS of Voice COS of COS of
COS Option Mail Ports Phones Attendants
used for RAC using RAC using RAC

Option 119, Attendant Tone Signalling Not required Not required Enable

Option 229, Voice Mail Port Enable Not required Not required
Option 268, Record a Call in Voice mail Enable Enable Enable

Option 269, Record a Call: Start Not required Optional Optional

Recording Automatically

Option 270. Record a Call: Save Not required Optional Optional

Recording on Hang up

4. Form 17, Hunt Groups

- (Optional) Assign voice mail ports for exclusive use by Record a
Call to their own hunt group. Set the group type to STN/SET.
Note: Dedicating voice mail ports to Record a Call is NOT advisable for basic
systems that have only four such ports.
- In the Recording Hunt Group Options subform, enter the maximum
number of ports allowed for Record a Call use.
Note: The number entered must be less than the number of available voice
mail ports; otherwise, none would be available for voice mail.
5. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table
- Enter the voice mail hunt group as the Record a Call Voice mail
Destination For This Tenant.
6. Program a feature key for Record a Call on phones that require it.
7. Form 50, Mailboxes
- Program a mailbox for each extension that requires use of
Record a Call.
8. (Optional) To forward Record a Call messages to e-mail, see
“Programming SMTP” on page 185.

98
 Basic Programming

Using the Administrator’s Mailbox

The Administrator's Mailbox allows you to do some voice mail
programming using a telephone. Programming by phone cannot
completely replace CDE programming; however, it is convenient for
certain functions such as adding mailboxes and editing mailbox settings.
The passcode used to log into the Administrator's Mailbox determines
which functions can be accessed:
• Manager Passcode: Allows the user to perform all the system
administration, mailbox management, and maintenance functions
except changing the Administrator passcode or passcode length.
• Administrator Passcode: Allows the user to perform all the manager
functions plus changing the Administrator passcode and passcode
length; and defaulting the voice mail database.
Default passcodes are as follows:
Passcode Length
Passcode Type 3 4 5 6
Administrator 864 8642 86420 864200
Manager 648 6483 64830 648300

Important: The Manager passcode should be given to the person

who performs the day-to-day task, such as adding mailboxes and
changing greetings. The Manager passcode provides limited
access to the database, thereby reducing the likelihood of novice
users causing serious disruptions to the system. (Note that users
are still prompted to begin a new installation when they enter the
Manager Passcode, but get the response “Invalid Selection” when
they attempt to do so.) To protect system security, change the
passcodes at first login and keep them confidential.

Accessing the Administrator's Mailbox

Follow these steps to log in to the administrator's mailbox.
1. From any internal DTMF telephone, lift the handset and obtain dial tone.
2. Dial the voice mail hunt group number (default is 300). The system
answers and plays the usual greeting.
3. Press * when you hear the greeting.

99
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

4. When prompted for a mailbox number, enter the system administrator

mailbox number: default 999.
5. When prompted for a passcode enter the Administrator's passcode or
the Manager's passcode. (See above for defaults.)
6. You are now logged in to the system administrator's mailbox. Follow
the voice prompts for instructions; use the menu map on the following
page for reference.

Figure 15: Administrator Mailbox Menu

100
 Basic Programming

Voice Mail Notification On Every New Message

To activate voice mail notification on every new message (which can only
be performed using the telephone user interface):
1. Access the System Administrator's mailbox.
2. When prompted for a passcode, enter the Technician's passcode
(default is 9731) instead of using either the Administrator’s passcode
or the Manager's passcode.
3. Press 9.
4. Enter 20301 to enable notification on every new message.
To deactivate voice mail notification on every new message (the default
setting):
1. Access the System Administrator's mailbox.
2. When prompted for a passcode, enter the Technician's passcode
(default is 9731).
3. Press 9.
4. Enter 20302 to disable notification on every new message.

101
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Testing voice mail operation

Perform the following tests to verify that voice mail is working properly.
1. Call the business using an outside line or cell phone. Verify that you
hear the company open or closed greeting (as appropriate) and that
the message is clear and understandable.
2. Call the business using several outside lines. Verify the number of
rings allowed before the system answers.
3. Call the business using an outside line. When the auto attendant
answers, press 0 and verify that the system transfers the call to the
attendant.
4. Call the voice mail hunt group using an internal line. Verify that you do
not hear the company greeting. Verify the number of rings allowed
before answer.
5. Call the voice mail hunt group using an internal line. Verify that you do
not hear the company greeting. When the system answers, press *0
and verify that the system transfers the call to the attendant.
6. Call to several extensions directly (not through auto attendant) to verify
that the calls are forwarded to the correct mailbox.
7. Leave a message at an extension to verify that the messaging waiting
indicator (light) comes on.
Note: ONS/CLASS lines do not support high-voltage message-waiting
lamps.
8. (Optional) Call the voice mail hunt group from a fax terminal and verify that
the Auto Attendant answers and transfers the call to the fax extension.
9. (Optional) Call an extension that has message notification enabled
and verify that it is working correctly.
10. (Optional) Leave a message at an extension and verify that the
message is forwarded to the user's e-mail account.

Note: Once a message has been deleted, it cannot be recovered.

102
 Basic Programming

Programming Phonebook
1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
- Enable System Option 128, Phonebook.

Note: The option must be purchased (listed on MOSS sheet).

Note: Phonebook and Speak@Ease (Option 85) cannot both be enabled.

2. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table

- Program the voice mail hunt group number to the “Phonebook
Number For This Tenant” field.
3. Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments
- Program a Phonebook feature key on phones that do not have
softkeys.
4. (Optional) Form 02, Feature Access Codes
- Enter the access code for Feature 65 to allow DNIC-based single
line phones to access the Phonebook. All types of phones can also
use the access code. (Default, *65)
5. Form 50, Mailboxes
- Enter a NAME for each mailbox owner. Only mailboxes with names
are listed in the Phonebook.
Note: Phonebook searches will only work if the first and last name entered
in Form 50 are in the order specified by the Directory Voice Prompt option in
Form 49. For example, if the option is set to LAST NAME, then the name
“Tom Jones” should be entered as Jones Tom in Form 50. However, you may
want to enter the name in Form 9 as first name, last name (Tom Jones)
because it looks better on the called party's display. And at the same time,
you may want Phonebook searching by last name. In this case, set “Directory
Voice Prompt” in Form 49 to LAST NAME, enter “Tom Jones” as the device
name in Form 9 Tom Jones, and then name the mailbox in Form 50 “Jones
Tom.” Only one space is permitted between the first and last name.
6. Form 49, Voice mail Options
- Set the Directory Voice Prompt option to search the Phonebook by
first or last name.

103
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Programming an Attendant Console

Except for LDN assignments, the programming for a
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 is provided already completed in the default
database (see page 316 for the defaults). If you are starting with a blank
database default, follow the steps below to program the console:
1. Form 01, System Configuration
- Program one of the two DNIC circuits.
2. Form 07, Console Assignment
- Assign an extension number, COS, COR, and Tenant for each
console bay/slot/circuit entry.
3. Form 08, Console LDN Assignment
- Assign a directory number and label to each required console
LDN key.

Programming a Subattendant Set

The programming for a subattendant set is provided already completed in

the default database (see page 316 for the defaults). If you are starting with
a blank database default, follow the steps below to program the console:
1. Form 01, System Configuration
- Program a Digital Line Card or DNIC module.
2. Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments
- Assign set type to SUB, extension number, COS, COR, and name
(optional) for each bay/slot/circuit.
- Assign a separate COS with subattendant options.
- Set type SUB can only be SUPERSET 4150, SUPERSET 430, or
SUPERSET 4DN.
- Complete the sub-form for assigned keys, types, and options.

104
 Basic Programming

Programming a Printer Port

System Printer Port

• Form 34, Directed I/O
- Program the printer port in Form 34.
- Define Printout Types that are to be delivered to the system printer
port.
- Remove printer port for print types not used.
- Speed of printer port is programmed in Maintenance. Defaults:
Baud Rate: 300
Stop Bits: 1
Data Bits: 8
Flow Control: None
Parity: None

Note: Printer ports only work on the SX-200 ICP controller, not on Peripheral
cabinets.

Dataset Printer Port

1. Form 11, Data Circuit Descriptor
- Define a circuit descriptor to match characteristics of device type.
Refer to Form 04, System Options and Timers on page 133 for
typical circuit descriptor.
2. Form 12, Dataset Assignment
- Assign the type of data device for the dataset PLID. Available types
are DSCONS Console (output only, maximum 2400 baud) and
1103/2103 Standalone dataset.
- Assign a Tenant, Extension number, COS, COR, and circuit
descriptor number.
3. Form 34, Directed I/O
- Define printout type to be delivered to the dataset.

105
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

IP Printer Port
Data for the functions listed below can be output through an IP socket in
the controller to a telnet-enabled application for printing.

• SMDR • ACD Real Time Events

• CDE Data Print • ACD Agent Summary
• Maintenance Logs • ACD Group Summary
• Traffic Measurement • Hotel/Motel Audit
• IP Traffic Measurement • Hotel/Motel Wakeup

The default database sends SMDR and CDE Data Print output to IP socket
61328. If you are using a different database, follow the procedure below to
program a printer port.
1. Form 11, Data Descriptor
- Define a circuit descriptor to match the characteristics of the device
type. The default circuit descriptor number 1 works for most
applications.
2. Form 12, Data Assignment
- Program a SOCKET type data device to an available PLID in the
following range:
PLID Port PLID Port
1/13/20 61320 1/13/25 61325
1/13/21 61321 1/13/26 61326
1/13/22 61322 1/13/27 61327
1/13/23 61323 1/13/28 61328
1/13/24 61324
- Assign a Tenant, Extension number, COS, COR, and circuit
descriptor number.
3. Form 34, Directed I/O
- Define the printout type to output.

106
 Basic Programming

Programming Stations/Sets Automatically

The AUTO PROGRAM function in Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments,
checks for unprogrammed circuits in the system and programs them as
follows:
• Extension numbers are automatically assigned according to a Bay,
Slot, Circuit address format “BSCC”, where
- B is the Bay number (1-8)
- S is the slot number (1-8)
- CC is the cct number (01-12).
The system prompts for a starting extension number.
• Other parameters assigned to ONS and OPS devices:
- COS = 2
- COR = 1
- Tenant = 1
• Other parameters assigned to DNIC and IP sets:
- COS = 1
- COR = 4 for all set types except SUPERSET 430 and
SUPERSET 4150
- COR = 5 for the SUPERSET 430 and SUPERSET 4150
- Tenant = 1

Note: Before an extension number can be automatically assigned, a DNIC

set or DMP must be physically connected to the circuit. If no set or console
is detected on a circuit, that circuit is skipped and no extension number is
assigned.

107
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

To automatically program all connected sets, DNIC sets and DMPs:

1. Install all ONS cards, OPS cards, DNIC cards. Do not program
stations, DNIC, sets or DMPs.
2. Connect the DNIC sets or DMPs to the circuits.
3. Access Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments.
4. Press Auto Program.
The system prompts for an extension number to assign to the first
auto-programmed extension. The number is incremented by one for
each subsequent extension—for example, 100, 101, 102.
5. Enter a starting extension number.
Conflicts with existing extension numbers result in an error message
and a prompt to press the CONTINUE or ABORT softkey.
Auto-programming will not proceed to the next BAY/SLT/CCT until a
valid extension number has been found for the current position.
Note: The maximum length of extension numbers is five. It is recommended
that the length be equal to the “Length of Mailbox Numbers” in Form 49, to
take advantage of automatic mailbox creation.
After verifying that the unprogrammed sets are physically connected,
the system automatically programs all unprogrammed circuits. The
system displays all of the devices that have been programmed.
If a circuit cannot be programmed because an extension number has
already been assigned to that circuit, a warning is displayed. Press
ABORT to cancel the procedure or press CONTINUE to skip the
device and resume programming the other devices in the range.

108
 Basic Programming

Deleting a Device and All Dependent

Resources
The DELETE softkey in Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments, deletes a
device and all of its dependent resources including
• All line keys (including LDN) that are programmed on a deleted set,
standalone BLF, or PKM module
• All line and feature keys that are programmed on associated BLF or
PKM modules
• The associated BLF and PKM modules
• Any other line appearances and BLFs of the deleted station or set.
A warning message appears if any of the above exists. To continue, press
CONFRIM. To abort, press CANCEL.

Deleting a range of devices and dependent resources

The RANGE DELETE softkey in CDE Form 09, Desktop Device
Assignments, allows block deletion of devices and all dependent resources.
To delete a range of devices and all dependent resources:
1. Press RANGE DELETE.
The system displays: FROM BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:.
2. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the first device and press
the ENTER softkey.
The system displays: TO BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:.
3. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the last device and press
the ENTER softkey.
The system prompts you to choose whether or not you want to receive
warnings as devices are deleted.
4. To receive a warning prior to deleting each device and its dependent
resources, press YES. To delete all devices and dependent resources
without warning, press NO.
The system prompts you once again to confirm the deletion of the range.
5. To proceed with the deletion of the range of devices and all dependent
resources, press CONFIRM. Press CANCEL to abort.

109
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

If you chose to receive warnings each time a device is deleted, the

system displays “deleting all keys, ...“ for each device in the range.
6. To proceed, press CONFIRM. Press CANCEL to abort the deletion of
the specific device and continue with the next device.
To abort the deletion of a range of devices, press ABORT. Any devices
that were deleted prior to pressing the ABORT key will remain deleted.

Programming a Single Line Voice Station

The default database for a basic system has programming for two
ONS/CLASS circuits. The Analog Option Board adds two more. If you are
starting with a blank database, follow the steps below to program a single
line voice station:
1. Form 01, System Configuration
- Program an ONS or OPS line card.
- Program a Digital Line card or DNIC module for SUPERSET 401+,
and SUPERSET 4001 sets.
2. Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments
- Assign an extension number, COS, COR, and name (optional) for
each bay/slot/circuit (set type remains STATION).
3. Form 30, Device Interconnection Table (optional)
- Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example, to restrict
connections between specific device types).
4. Form 05, Tenant Interconnection Table (optional)
- Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example, to restrict
connections between specific tenants).
5. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table (optional)
- Program how to handle the caller’s call violations.
- Each tenant requires its own Call Rerouting Table.
6. Form 03, COS Define (optional)
- Create a unique class of service (COS) if required.
7. Form 20, ARS: COR Group Definition
- Create a COR group that includes the COR number which you will
assign to the station.

110
 Basic Programming

- This COR group restricts the external calls that the user can dial.
Ensure that the system is provisioned with a sufficient number of DSP.

Programming a Multi-Line Set

The default database for a basic SX-200 ICP has programming for sixteen
multi-line IP phones and two multi-line DNIC sets. See page 317 for circuits
locations, extension numbers and other defaults. If you are starting with a
blank database default, follow the steps below to program a multi-line set:
1. Form 01, System Configuration
- Program a line if not already programmed.
2. Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments
- Assign set type, extension number, COS, COR, and name
(optional) for each bay/slot/circuit.
- Complete the Expand Set subform for key types and options.
3. Form 30, Device Interconnection Table (optional)
- Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example, to restrict
connections between specific device types).
4. Form 05, Tenant Interconnection Table (optional)
- Set the required interconnect restrictions (for example, to restrict
connections between specific tenants).
5. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table (optional)
- Program the action that the system will take to handle the caller’s
call violations.
- Each tenant requires its own Call Rerouting Table.
6. Form 03, COS Define (optional)
- Create a unique class of service (COS) if required, or use an
existing COS.
7. Form 20, ARS: COR Group Definition
- Create a COR group that includes the COR number which you will
assign to the station, or use an existing COR.
- This COR group restricts the external calls that the station user can
dial.

111
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Programming an Analog Device to a SIM2

(DNIC Phones Only)
The analog interface in the SIM2 supports devices such as analog
telephones, fax machines, or modems. The SUPERSET provides the
power to the analog interface.
Ensure that the set firmware revision level matches the system firmware
revision level. If the revision level on the system is higher than the set
revision level, upgrade the set firmware.
Refer to Upgrading Set Firmware (page 216).
When adding an analog set to a SIM2, use Form 12 to program the port.
The port type is AIM.

Programming an NSU or a PRI Card in a

Peripheral Cabinet
The NSU and PRI card support the following purchasable MOSS options:
QSIG (option 86), NFAS (option 91), D-Channel Backup (option 92),
Remote LAN Access (option 93), Min/Max (option 94), Auto Min/Max
(option 95), Number of Links 0-8 (option 96).
Option 91 to 95 are downloaded to each NSU and PRI card installed. Option
96 enables the number of ISDN T1 links purchased. These MOSS options
serve all the NSUs and PRI cards in the system. If you change any of these
options, you must reset the NSU and PRI card to enable them, and you may
need to download a new IMAT database into each NSU and PRI card.
Note: If you purchase a number of T1 links less than the number of T1 links
you install and program, Mitel cannot reliably predict which T1 links the
system will use after a reset. If you purchase a number of T1 links (System
Option 96) greater than the number of T1 links you install and program, the
T1 links programmed will remain consistent.

CDE programming
1. Form 53, Bay Location Assignment
- Assign a bay number to the CIM or FIM ports used to connect each
NSU or PRI card to the controller.
2. Form 01, System Configuration

112
 Basic Programming

- Program the bay(s) assigned in Form 53 as ISDN nodes.

- Program a T1 Trunk Card in Slot 6 and 8 (assuming both spans will
be programmed)
3. Form 03, Class of Service (COS)
- Create a separate COS for ISDN trunks.
Note: COS Level 7 in the default database has all COS options required by
ISDN trunks enabled except for Option 246 (SMDR - Extended Record).
- Enable the following COS options for the ISDN Trunks:
246 – SMDR- Extended Record
701 – No Dial Tone
702 – SMDR - Overwrite Buffer. (Required if option 806 SMDR-
Record Incoming Calls enabled)
801 – Incoming Trunk Call Rotary
802 – Limited Wait for Dial Tone
811 – ANI/DNIS Trunk
814 – SMDR - Record ANI/DNIS
Tip: Ensure that COS Option 800 (ANI Applies) is NOT enabled in the
class of service of the ISDN trunks.

- For extensions (sets and stations), the following COS options must
be set:
Table 15: Extension COS Options for Systems with
an NSU or PRI Card
Notes
COS Option Setting

236 – Outgoing Trunk Callback Disable

237 – Outgoing Trunk Campon Disable

502 – Display ANI/DNIS Information and Enable Must have 502 enabled for
possibly 613 to function.
613 – Display ANI information only

503 – Enable Calling Name Display Enable

702 – SMDR Overwrite Buffer Enable Required if option 806 SMDR

– Record Incoming Calls
enabled

113
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

4. Form 04, System Options/System Timers

- Assign values to the first two options in table below and enable the
others as required:
Table 16: NSU MOSS Options
System Options Setting Notes
Option 48 – Limited Wait for Dial Tone 1-15 secs Set to 1 sec.
Default = 5 sec.

Option 96 – Number of Links 2 Purchase 1 for each link used.

Default = 0

Option 86 - QSIG Optional Enabling Option 86 allows the

called party to see the name of the
caller on their telephone display.
The option is not required if
connected to a DMS100 Central
Office.

Option 91 – NFAS Optional If Option 91 is to be disabled,

Option 92 must be disabled first.
Not required if using a single link
PRI.

Option 92 – D-Channel Backup Optional If Option 92 is to be enabled, Option

91 must already be enabled.
Not required if using a single link
PRI

Option 94 – Min/Max Optional If Option 94 is to be disabled,

Option 95 must be disabled first.
Option 95 – Auto Min/Max Optional If Option 95 is to be enabled, Option
94 must already be enabled.

5. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor

- Assign a T1 trunk circuit descriptor. To receive CLID or DDI digits,
the PRI trunk must be a non-DISA trunk that is programmed with a
T1 E&M trunk circuit descriptor. The Debounce timer must be set
to 100 milliseconds and the Incoming Start type and Outgoing Start
type must be set to WINK.
6. Form 13, Options Subform
- Set the DTMF option to NO.
- Set the QSIG Supplementary Services to “Yes” if you want to insert
the calling name ID when the trunks are programmed for QSIG or
connected to a DMS100.

114
 Basic Programming

7. Form 15, Dial-In Trunks

• PRI trunks are Dial-In Trunks and are not normally used in a
Non-Dial-in configuration.
Search for the correct Bay/Slot/Circuit and enter the following for
each trunk:
- COS number – see previous requirements
- COR number
- Tenant number – unless site has tenanting set to 1
- N – number of incoming DID digits – usually 4
- M – number of digits to absorb – usually 0
- X – digits to be inserted (up to 2 digits)
- CDN – Circuit Descriptor Number
- Trunk Number – Enter a trunk number (1-200)
8. Form 16, Trunk Groups
- Locate an empty Trunk Group and add the PRI trunks (trunk
numbers programmed in Form 15) to the Trunk Group. (Program
them in reverse order to prevent contention with incoming calls
from the CO.)
- Add a name to the Trunk Group for future reference.
- Set Group Type to Terminal (recommended) or Cyclic.
- Enable SMDR (outgoing only) if required.
9. Form 42, T1 Link Descriptor
- Create a Link Descriptor for the PRI trunks using the recommended
settings in the following table:
Table 17: T1 Link Descriptor Values for PRI trunks
Descriptor Value
Alarm debounce timer (300 –3200 ms) 2500

Line Coding (AMI, AMI&ZCS, B8ZS) B8ZS

Line Build Out (0, -7.5, -15. –22.5 dB) 0 dB

Line Length (max 132, 265,398,533 or 655) 266-398

Framing (D4 or ESF) D4

(Page 1 of 2)

115
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 17: T1 Link Descriptor Values for PRI trunks (continued)

Descriptor Value
Slip rate – maintenance limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 255

Slip rate – service limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 7000

Slip rate – network sync limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 7

BER – maintenance limit ( 10**-n , n = (3,4,5,6 )) / hour 4

BER – service limit ( 10**-n , n = (3,4,5,6 )) / hour 3

Framing losses – maintenance limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 255

Framing losses – service limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 9000

RTS timer – service limit exceeded (1- 255 min) 30

RTS timer – net slip limit exceeded (1- 255 min) 30

RTS timer – after alarm (0 – 300 sec) 10

(Page 2 of 2)

10. Form 43, T1 Link Assignment

- Assign the Link Descriptor to the PRI trunks (referencing the Bay
and Slot location).
11. Form 44, Network Sync
- Enter the links according to their Bay/Slot/Circuit in the order that
you want them to be used as the network sync source. Typically,
CO’s are the first choice for a sync source. When using both PRI
and TI trunks, make the PRI trunk the clock source.
12. Form 22, Modified Digit Table
- DID Calling Party Number to the network interacts with the current
SX-200 ICP system networking functionality and ignores
programmed node-IDs in the NSU or PRI card. The Node ID
Information Element (“*8”) for Analog Networking, if programmed in
the Modified Digit Table, will be ignored by the NSU or PRI card. If
*6 is programmed in the digit modification table the DID calling
extension number is sent to the NSU or PRI card and can be sent
to the network as the calling party. The extension must belong to a
block of DID numbers purchased from the Network provider.

116
 Basic Programming

The following table shows how Analog Networking and Call-by-Call

information co-exist in the Modified Digit Table.
Quantity to Digits to be
Entry Comments
Delete Inserted
01 1 *4000*6*4*04 ISDN CxC and DID

In the “Digits to be Inserted” field, the definition of characters are:

*4 No SMDR for further modified digits
000 Call-by-Call digits, (speech, default O/G, clid)
*6 Send caller ID (DID to network)
*4 Start SMDR again for further modified digits
*04 Inserts Caller's Name (for calls over ISDN Trunks)
13. Complete ARS programming
- ARS programming must match with the service selection
programming that is entered through the ISDN Maintenance
Administration Tool (IMAT) computer.
14. Program the IMAT database according to the instructions in the next
section.

IMAT Programming
The IMAT software is used to program hardware and call characteristics
for the NSU and PRI card. IMAT is also used to install software upgrades
and backup the NSU database.

Note: You must have IMAT software version 7.3 or greater.

Maintenance activities include access to the following maintenance
information:
• a list of all software files and versions on the NSU
• log messages that contain a history of activities and the status of faults
• a database

Installing IMAT Software

You can install IMAT on the Maintenance PC or on its own PC (IMAT PC).
Note: If using a dial-up connection to the NSU, we strongly suggest that you
use a non-networked computer (a Windows 95/98 networked computer may
have difficulties communicating with Dial-up Networking).

117
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

To install IMAT on the PC:

1. Close all the applications running on the PC.
2. Insert the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM in the CD drive.
3. Open the Tools folder, then the Disk 1 folder.
4. Double-click the Setup.exe file. The installation program starts. Follow
the prompts to install IMAT.

Programming IP Settings
Collect the following information:
• The Static IP Address that will be programmed on the NSU. Choose
an IP Address that will not conflict with the IP Phone range, which
starts at the default 192.168.1.20 and continues to 192.168.1.250. For
example, you might choose 192.168.1.15 as the static IP address.
• The gateway address (if there is a gateway on your network)
• The subnet mask (the default setting is 255.255.255.0 which is
represented in hexadecimal as ffffff00)

To program a static IP address on the NSU:

1. Ensure the NSU is disconnected from the SX-200 ICP Controller and
that no power is applied to the NSU. Re-apply power only after
completing CDE and IMAT programming.
2. If you have not already done so, connect a serial cable from a com port
on your PC to the Maintenance port on the NSU.
3. Launch a Hyperterminal session on the PC (38400, 8, N, 1, no flow
control).
4. Apply power to the NSU by connecting the power cord.
Messages are displayed on the PC while the NSU is booting up.
5. When the PC displays “Press any key to stop this autoboot”, press any
key on the PC keyboard. If you do not stop the autoboot on time,
remove the power cord from the NSU and repeat this step
The PC displays “[MC269AA Boot]”
6. Type ‘c’ on the PC keyboard.
The PC displays “boot device”.
7. Press the Enter key until “net on ethernet” is displayed.

118
 Basic Programming

8. Enter the IP Address of the NSU and Subnet mask as shown in the
following example:
192.168.1.2:ffffff00 (where ffffff00 is the subnet mask 255.255.255.0)

Note: There are 6 x f's and 2 x 0's,

9. Press the Enter key until the PC displays “gateway inet (g):”
10. Enter the IP Address of the Gateway as shown in the following example:
192.168.1.1
11. Press the Enter key until the PC displays “[MC269AA Boot]”
12. Enter “@” to continue the bootup or power down the NSU.

Connecting a Windows PC to the NSU

Only the direct cable connection is described here. For information on
connecting to the NSU via modem and or LAN, see the IMAT Online Help.
By default, Windows does not support a direct cable connection. You must
add a device driver. Windows takes the information from a Mitel file and
creates the driver called NT Direct Connection.

To install a direct connection device driver in Windows:

1. Use the instructions for your Windows operating system to install a
new modem.
2. Browse to find the install file located at: c:\Program Files\Mitel\Imat.
3. Select a COM port.
• Windows creates a driver called NT Direct Connection.
4. Set the following parameters:
Maximum speed: 38400
Only connect at this speed enabled
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Mode: Auto Answer (in Advanced Settings).
Error control: Clear if you have a direct connect cable.
Flow Control: Clear if you have a direct connect cable.

119
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

5. To connect the PC to the NSU, connect an RS-232 straight DTE serial

cable between the NSU’s serial port and the PC’s serial port.
Note: If you are connecting through a modem, use a null modem adapter on
the NSU side.

To create a Dial-Up Network connection on Windows 95/98:

Note: You might need to do this procedure twice to create two Dial-up
Networking connections: one for on-site direct access, and one for remote
modem access.
1. Click the Start button, select Programs, Accessories, then Dial-Up
Connections.
2. Double-click Make New Connection.
3. Enter an appropriate name for the connection (for example, Direct for
direct connections, Remote or a customer’s name for remote
connections) and click Next.
4. Enter an Area Code and Telephone Number and select a Country
Code from the drop-down list. Click Next.
Note: Even though it is not needed for a direct connection, Windows requires
that you enter this information.
5. Click Finish.
6. Right-click your new connection icon and click Properties.
7. Click Configure. Ensure the fields are set as follows:
Data bits: 8
Parity: none
Note: If you are creating a direct connection, make sure NT Direct Connection
is listed in the drop-down list in the Make a New Connection window.
For a direct connection:
Maximum speed: 38400
Check: only connect at this speed.
Select wait for dial tone before dialing.
Select cancel the call time at 60 seconds.
Click Advanced and turn off error control and flow control.

For a remote connection:

- Stop bits: 1

120
 Basic Programming

- Click Advanced and turn on error control and select Compress data.
- Turn on flow control and select Hardware.
8. Click OK.
9. Select Server Types tab and make sure that PPP: Windows, Windows
NT3.5, Internet or PPP:Internet appears in the Type of Dial-Up Server field.
10. In the Advanced Options field, select Log onto Network and Enable
software compression.
11. Make sure that only TCP/IP is selected in the Allowed network
protocols field.
12. Select the Scripting tab and enter:
c:\program files\mitel\Imat\pridun.scp.
13. Click OK.

To create a Dial-Up Network connection on Windows 2000:

Note: You may need to follow this procedure twice to create two Dial-up
Networking connections: one for on-site direct access, and one for remote
modem access.
1. Click the Start button, select Programs, Accessories,
Communications, then Dial-Up Connections.
2. Double click Make New Connection, and then click Next.
3. Select Dial-up to the Internet, and then click Next.
4. Select I want to set up my Internet connection manually, or I want to
connect through a local area network (LAN). Click Next.
5. Select I want to connect through a phone line and a modem, and then
click Next.
6. Use the COM Port that has been configured as a null Modem
connection: 38400, 8, none, 1.
7. In the Choose Modem box, from the drop-down list select
Communications cable between 2 computers. Click Next.
8. Clear the box Use area code and dialing rules, and then click Advanced.
9. For the Connection type, select PPP (Point to Point Protocol).
10. For the Logon procedure, select Use logon script, and then click
Browse. Select the appropriate script c:\program files\mitel\Imat\
pridun.scp, click OK, then Next.

121
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

11. In the Internet account logon information box, leave the username and
password fields blank and then click Next.
12. Dialog boxes appear that warn you that you will not be able to connect to
your Internet service provider without your user name and your password.
Disregard these warnings and click Yes on these boxes to continue.
13. Enter the Connection name, and then click Next.
14. In the box to set up an Internet mail account, select No, then click Next.
15. De-select the option to connect to the Internet immediately, then click
Finish.
16. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, right-click on the new
DUN connection, point to Properties, then click Configure.
17. From the Maximum speed (bps) list, select 38400 for the baud rate.
18. Click OK until you exit the windows.

Using IMAT

To start IMAT:
1. Launch IMAT (ignore messages about username configuration error).
2. In the File menu, select Connect to Remote Site.
3. Choose the Connection Medium: Serial or Ethernet Network Card.
4. If you selected Ethernet Network Card, enter the IP Address of the
Remote Site.
If you selected Serial, select the connection name you entered when
you created the dial-up network connection.
5. For the Ethernet Remote System, select PRI Card / Universal NSU.
6. Click Connect.
IMAT displays a confirmation of the connection (for example
“Connected over Ethernet”).
7. Press Okay.
8. In the File menu, select Load -> Database -> Sources -> PRI Card
/NSU. This loads the IMAT with the database from the NSU.
9. Press Load.

122
 Basic Programming

IMAT provides a confirmation of the connection (for example

“Database received”).
10. Press Okay.
11. In the File menu, select Load -> SW Versions -> Sources -> PRI Card
/Universal NSU. This loads the IMAT with the Software version from
the NSU.
12. Press Load.
IMAT provides a confirmation of the connection (for example
“Software Version received”).
13. Press Okay.
14. Verify that the SW Version of the NSU matches the SW version listed
in the FCI delivered with the latest SX-200 ICP load:
- In the Maintenance menu, select Software versions. Verify the
package version that is listed against the FCI.
- If the package version and the FCI don't match, select SW Upgrade
From IMAT (the NSU load is on the CD).
- After the Upgrade is completed, select Remote Site Reset.
15. Program the NSU Config for the links provided by your PRI provider:
- In the Config menu, select Site Options.
- Confirm the System Type: Universal NSU.
- Confirm the Connected Platform: SX200 EL/ML/ICP.
- If the following options are required, enable them: Qsig, Network
Side Interface.
- In the Config menu, select PRI Link Characteristics.
- Verify BOTH links for Protocol type: DMS250, DMS100, 4ESS,
NI2, QSIG.
- Verify BOTH links for Physical type: T1/CSU or T1/DSX1.
- Verify BOTH links for Characteristics: line coding, line length,
framing, invert data, invert D channel.
- To get a view all of your settings, from the Config menu select View
Database.

123
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

To save a database:
1. In the File menu, select Save, then Database.
2. In the Files box, type in the Destination of the database (if you have
changed the database you can save it back to the PRI/Universal NSU
and/or you can save a copy of the database to your PC) and give it a
file name.
3. Click Save.
Note: If you save the database changes to the NSU, you must reboot the
NSU. You can do this by selecting Maintenance -- Remote Site Reset. (This
should be done after hours or when there is no traffic on the NSU.)

To convert a database:
If you are loading a database with a software version that is earlier than the
current IMAT version, IMAT displays the Local Database Load window,
which allows you convert the ISDN database to a newer version.
1. In the Local Database Load window, select the new database version
from the Database Version drop-down menu.
2. Click OK.
Closing IMAT

Note: Always save any open databases before closing IMAT

124
 Basic Programming

Programming an Embedded PRI Trunk

1. Form 53, Bay Location Assignment
- Assign the Dual T1/E1 Framer module a bay number.

Note: Reset the system after updating Form 53.

2. Form 1, System Configuration

- Program the node type as ONB T1 NODE. Program the trunk card
as T1 ISDN for the slots specified in the following table.
Module Location Slot
MMC1 2 and/or 4
MMC2 6 and/or 8
Note: One link of the Dual T1/E1 Framer can be programmed for PRI (T1
ISDN) and the other for T1 (T1 Trunk).

Note: A trunk must be programmed in form 14 or 15 before it the will show

as installed in Form 1.

3. Form 03, Class of Service (COS)

- Create a separate COS for ISDN trunks.
Note: COS Level 7 in the default database has all COS options required by
ISDN trunks enabled except for Option 246 (SMDR - Extended Record).
- Enable the following COS options for the ISDN Trunks:
246 – SMDR- Extended Record
701 – No Dial Tone
702 – SMDR - Overwrite Buffer. (Required if option 806 SMDR-
Record Incoming Calls enabled)
801 – Incoming Trunk Call Rotary
802 – Limited Wait for Dial Tone
811 – ANI/DNIS Trunk
814 – SMDR - Record ANI/DNIS
Tip: Ensure that COS Option 800 (ANI Applies) is NOT enabled in the class
of service of the ISDN trunks.

125
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

- For extensions (sets and stations), the following COS options must
be set:
Table 18: Extension COS Options for Systems with embedded PRI
Notes
COS Option Setting

236 – Outgoing Trunk Callback Disable

237 – Outgoing Trunk Campon Disable

502 – Display ANI/DNIS Information and Enable Must have 502 enabled for
possibly 613 to function.
613 – Display ANI information only

503 – Enable Calling Name Display Enable

702 – SMDR Overwrite Buffer Enable Required if option 806

SMDR – Record Incoming
Calls enabled

4. Form 04, System Options/System Timers

- Assign a one to five second value to System Option 48, Limited
Wait for Dial Tone if ISDN trunks are present. Purchase and
program the correct Number of Links (option 96), and if required,
purchase and enable Remote LAN Access (option 93).
Notes:
1. Options 86, 91, 92, 94, and 95 are not available with embedded
PRI.
2. A system reset may be required after some options are
programmed. For example, changing the number of links in
option 96 requires a reset.

3. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor

- Assign a T1 trunk circuit descriptor. To receive CLID or DDI digits,
the PRI trunk must be a non-DISA trunk that is programmed with a
T1 E&M trunk circuit descriptor.

126
 Basic Programming

4. Form 13, Options Subform

- Set the Debounce Timer to 100 milliseconds.
- Set the DTMF option to NO.
- Set the Incoming Start Type to WINK.
- Set the Outgoing Start Type to WINK.
5. Form 15, Dial-In Trunks
• PRI trunks are Dial-In Trunks and are not normally used in a
Non-Dial-in configuration.
Search for the correct Bay/Slot/Circuit and enter the following for
each trunk:
- COS number – see previous requirements
- COR number (if required)
- Tenant number – unless site has tenanting set to 1
- N – number of incoming DID digits – usually 4
- M – number of digits to absorb – usually 0
- X – digits to be inserted (up to 2 digits) or Feature Access Code
67 (Digit Translation Table Access) programmed on Form 02
- CDN – Circuit Descriptor Number
- Trunk Number – Enter a trunk number (1-200)
6. Form 16, Trunk Groups
- Locate an empty Trunk Group and add the PRI trunks (trunk
numbers programmed in Form 15) to the Trunk Group. (Program
them in reverse order to prevent contention with incoming calls
from the CO.)
- Add a name to the Trunk Group for future reference.
- Set Group Type to Terminal (recommended) or Circular.
- Enable SMDR (outgoing only) if required.

127
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

7. Form 42, T1 Link Descriptor

- Create a Link Descriptor for the PRI trunks using the recommended
settings in the following table:
Table 19: T1 Link Descriptor Values for PRI trunks
Descriptor Value
Alarm debounce timer (300 –3200 ms) 2500

Line Coding (AMI, AMI&ZCS, B8ZS) B8ZS

Line Build Out (0, -7.5, -15. –22.5 dB) 0 dB

Line Length (max 132, 265,398,533 or 655) 0 - 132

Framing (D4 or ESF) ESF

Slip rate – maintenance limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 255

Slip rate – service limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 7000

Slip rate – network sync limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 7

BER – maintenance limit ( 10**-n , n = (3,4,5,6 )) / hour 4

BER – service limit ( 10**-n , n = (3,4,5,6 )) / hour 3

Framing losses – maintenance limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 255

Framing losses – service limit (0 – 9000) /24 hrs 9000

RTS timer – service limit exceeded (1- 255 min) 30

RTS timer – net slip limit exceeded (1- 255 min) 30

RTS timer – after alarm (0 – 300 sec) 10

Embedded PRI Protocol DMS100

Embedded PRI Protocol Variant None

Embedded PRI Network/User User

Embedded PRI Unknown Numbering Plan Disabled

Embedded PRI Bearer Capability Voice Speech

Embedded PRI CLIR Voice Allow

Embedded PRI Invert D Channel No

8. Form 43, T1 Link Assignment

- Assign the ISDN trunk T1 Link Descriptor to the slot(s) specified in
Form 1.

128
 Basic Programming

9. Form 44, Network Sync

- Enter the links according to their Bay/Slot/Circuit in the order that
you want them to be used as the network sync source. Typically,
CO’s are the first choice for a sync source. When using both PRI
and TI trunks, make the PRI trunk the clock source.
10. Form 22, Modified Digit Table
- DID Calling Party Number to the network interacts with the current
SX-200 ICP system networking functionality and ignores
programmed node-IDs in the Dual T1/E1 Framer module. The
Node ID Information Element (“*8”) for Analog Networking, if
programmed in the Modified Digit Table, will be ignored by the
module. If *6 is programmed in the digit modification table the DID
calling extension number is sent to the module and can be sent to
the network as the calling party. The extension must belong to a
block of DID numbers purchased from the Network provider.
The following table shows how Analog Networking and Call-by-Call
information co-exist in the Modified Digit Table.
Quantity to Digits to be
Entry Comments
Delete Inserted
01 1 *4000*6*4*04 ISDN CxC and DID

In the “Digits to be Inserted” field, the definition of characters are:

*4 No SMDR for further modified digits
000 Call-by-Call digits, (speech, default O/G, clid)
*6 Send caller ID (DID to network)
*4 Start SMDR again for further modified digits
*04 Inserts Caller's Name (for calls over ISDN Trunks)
11. Complete ARS programming in CDE.
Note: If Calling Party Number (CPN) substitution is programmed, make sure
that Form 22, ARS: Modified Digit Table, contains an entry with CPN enabled
for embedded PRI. Entries for offboard PRI cards and NSUs should have
CPN disabled.

129
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Programming an Embedded T1 Trunk

1. Form 53, Bay Location
- Assign the module or card a bay number.
Note: If two modules are installed, assign them to the same bay.

2. Form 01, System Configuration

- If the module is in MMC slot 1, program a T1 Trunk card in slot 2
and/or 4 of the assigned bay. If the module is in MMC slot 2,
program a T1 Trunk card in slot 6 and/or 8.
Note: One link of the Dual T1/E1 Framer can be programmed for PRI (T1
ISDN) and the other for T1 (T1 Trunk).

Note: A trunk must be programmed in form 14 or 15 before it the will show

as installed in Form 1.

3. Form 03, COS Define

- Enable COS Option 802, Limited Wait for Dial Tone.
4. Form 04, System Options and Timers
- Program Option 48, Limited Wait for Dial Tone, and Option 96,
Number of Links (0-8).
5. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptors
- Specify options for the T1 trunk types.
6. Forms 14 (Non-dial-in Trunks) and 15 (Dial-in Trunks)
- Specify options for specific trunk circuits.
Note: CDE Form 14 and 15 do not accept programming changes if the T1
card is installed in the Peripheral Cabinet, and the T1 link is down but still
active. To make a programming change, unplug the T1 card, make the
change and then re-insert the card.
7. Form 43, T1 Link Assignment
- Select a T1 link descriptor for the T1 link.
8. Form 42, T1 Link Descriptors
- Specify options for the T1 link descriptors.
9. Form 44, Network Sync
- Enter the links according to their Bay/Slot/Circuit in the order that
you want them to be used as the network sync source. Typically,
COs are the first choice for a sync source.

130
 Basic Programming

10. Forms 22, 23 and 26

- Complete the ARS programming required to access the T1 trunks.
11. Form 16, Trunk Groups
- Put the trunks in a trunk group.

Programming Analog Trunks

Non Dial-In trunks

1. Form 01, System Configuration
- Program a trunk card that meets the trunk type requirements.
2. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor
- Create a trunk circuit descriptor that corresponds to the type of
trunk that you are programming.
3. Form 03, Class of Service
- Assign trunk options only.
4. Form 14, Non-Dial-in Trunks
- Assign COS and Tenant.
- Assign the directory number or an abbreviated dial number which
incoming calls will ring for Day Service, Night Service 1 and 2
modes.
- Assign a Circuit Descriptor Number (links this form to Form 13).
- Assign a Trunk Name if desired. This name appears on the
consoles and on the set displays for incoming and outgoing calls.
- Assign a Trunk Number in the range 1 to 200.
Note: For T1 cards or T1/E1 modules in Peripheral Cabinets - Form 14 does
not accept trunk programming changes if the card or module is installed and
the T1 link is down but active. To make a programming change for a T1 card,
unplug the T1 card, make the programming change and then re-insert the
T1 card. To make a programming change for a T1/E1 module, insert a
Peripheral Interface Card (PIC) into the software location (slots 5 or 6) for
that T1 link, make the programming change, and then remove the PIC from
the slot to reset the T1 link.
5. Form 16, Trunk Groups
- Assign to a trunk group if outgoing.

131
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Programming a range of Non Dial-in Trunks

The RANGE PRGRM softkey allows block programming of trunks on the
same card. You must program the first trunk in the range and then press
RANGE PRGM to copy the values to the range of trunks that you specify.
The following fields are copied from the first trunk in the range:
COS, TEN, DAY, N1, N2, CDN
The TK NAME and COMMENTS fields are left blank.
The trunk numbers are assigned in sequence, beginning with the first trunk
in the range. If there are trunks that are already programmed within that
range, those trunks are skipped. The trunk number sequence is
incremented each time a trunk is skipped. If the trunk number is incremented
to a value that is already used, the sequence continues to increment until a
free number is found. The trunk numbers restart at 1 if necessary. An error
message is displayed if there are no more free trunk numbers.

Note: BRI trunks are not supported.

To program a range of trunks:

1. Program the first trunk in the range. Enter values for the COS, TEN,
DAY, N1, N2, CDN fields.
2. Press RANGE PRGRM.
3. The system displays: FROM BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:.
4. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the first trunk and press
the ENTER softkey.
5. The system displays: TO BAY: SLOT: CIRCUIT:.
6. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the last trunk and press
the ENTER softkey.
7. The system copies the values from the first trunk to all the trunks
specified in the range.

132
 Basic Programming

Dial-in trunks
1. Form 01, System Configuration
- Program a trunk card that meets the trunk type requirements.
2. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor
- Create a trunk circuit descriptor that corresponds to the type of
trunk that you are programming.
3. Form 03, Class of Service
- Assign trunk options only.
4. Form 15, Dial-in Trunks
- Assign COS, COR, and Tenant.

Note: Assign a separate COS for the Dial-In Trunk.

- Column N lists the number of expected digits.

IMPORTANT: Changing the N field of a working system from
0 to any other digit or vice versa removes the trunks from the
trunk group.

Note: If this digit is 0, the system treats this as a Tie trunk. If this digit is not
0, the system treats this as a DID trunk.

- Column M lists the number of digits to absorb. To absorb no incoming

digits, set to 0. To absorb n digits, enter n (a whole number).
- Column X defines the digits to insert.

Do not insert 0 as a blank. To insert no digits, leave blank.To

insert digits, enter the actual digits.

- Assign a Trunk Name if desired. This name appears on the

consoles and on the set displays for incoming and outgoing calls.
Note: For T1 cards or T1/E1 modules in Peripheral Cabinets - CDE Form 15
does not accept trunk programming changes if the T1 card or T1/E1 module
is installed and the T1 link is down but active. To make a programming change
for a T1 card, unplug the T1 card, make the programming change and then
re-insert the T1 card. To make a programming change for a T1/E1 module,
insert a Peripheral Interface Card (PIC) into the software location (slots 5 or
6) for that T1 link, make the programming change, and then remove the PIC
from the slot to reset the T1 link.

133
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

5. Form 16, Trunk Groups

- Assign to a trunk group if outgoing.

Programming a range of Dial-in Trunks

Follow the instructions on page 132 for range programming Non Dial-in
Trunks.

DISA trunks
1. Form 01, System Configuration
- Program a trunk card that meets the trunk type requirements.
2. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptors
- Select a DISA circuit descriptor to match hardware type.
Note: Assignment of a DISA circuit descriptor to a trunk changes the trunk
to a DISA trunk.
3. Form 03, Class of Service
- Assign trunk options only.
4. Form 15, Dial-In Trunks
- Assign COS, COR, and Tenant.

Note: Assign a separate COS for the Dial-In Trunk.

- Column N: set to 0
- Column M: set to 0
- Column X: leave blank
- Assign a Trunk Name if desired. The name is what appears on the
consoles and phone displays for incoming and outgoing calls.

Recommended Options for System Security

Form 03: Enable Option 808 (Special DISA).
Form 04: Enable Option 5 (Verified Account Codes) and specify a time for
Option 54 (DISA Answer Timer).

134
 Basic Programming

Form 33: Enter appropriate DISA access codes.

Notes:
1. If the DISA trunk is a loop-start CO trunk, then loop- start
interconnection rules apply and the restrictions on-loop start CO
trunks applies.
2. Four-circuit/Eight-circuit LS/CLASS trunks can also be
programmed as DISA trunks.

Programming T1 and PRI trunks as DISA trunks

1. Program the trunk(s) as T1 E&M. (A T1 E&M circuit descriptor is not
required.)
2. Form 02, Feature Access Codes
- Program Feature Number 19 (Direct Inward System Access) with
a number that is within the DID range.
3. Form 03, COS Define
- Enable COS Option 606, Telephone - Enhanced Answering
Position (provides answer supervision to telco when the SX-200
ICP provides it dial tone).
4. Form 19, Call Rerouting Table
- Program the DISA access code from Form 02 as the DISA Day
Service Routing for this Tenant.

Programming ANI/DNIS on an Incoming trunk

Note: The following does not apply to PRI trunks.

ANI (Automatic Number Identification) - the local carrier sends the phone
number of the calling party to the PBX.
DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service) - the local carrier sends the
digits dialed by the calling party to the PBX.
ANI/DNIS is available only to incoming trunks with trunk descriptor
“T1-E&M” and “T1-DID/TIE”, which accept DTMF signaling and have the
wink timer active.

135
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Only MCI and US Sprint Standards are supported. MCI sends the ANI
digits without delimiters. Sprint delimits the DNIS and ANI digits with
asterisks.
DNIS digits on a dial-in trunk are used to route that trunk call, and no
further digits will be expected.
1. Create an ANI/DNIS trunk by creating a separate COS. Enable the
following options in the trunk's Class Of Service:
- COS Option 802 - Limited Wait for Dial Tone
- COS Option 811 - ANI/DNIS Trunk
- COS Option 246 - SMDR Extended Record (for SMDR to report the
ANI and DNIS digits).
2. In the Trunk Circuit Descriptor parameters set
- DTMF = ENABLED
- Incoming Start Type to Wink
- Wink Timer to 100-350 for MCI and 140-290 for US SPRINT
- Debounce Timer to 100 ms or greater.
3. To define which information will be displayed on the sets, ANI, DNIS,
both, or none (standard trunk label display), select the required
following COS options:
- COS Option 502 - Display ANI/DNIS Information = ENABLE
- COS Option 613 - Display ANI Information Only = ENABLE /
DISABLE
4. To display ANI and DNIS digits on a console when talking to an
ANI/DNIS trunk, enable COS Option 502 - Display ANI/DNIS
Information for the console.
Notes:
1. Intercept reason (FROM xxx DND) and Forwarding Information
(FWD FROM xxxx) take priority over DNIS.
2. Tenant Name and Calling Line ID take priority over ANI
information (immediately following the word TRUNK).’
3. COS Option 613 - Display ANI Information Only does not apply
to a console.

136
 Basic Programming

The following tables identify displays during each call state according to
digits sent by the trunk and COS options selected for the display set.
Note: If a name is received on the incoming trunk in the scenario where you
would see the DNIS in the ringing state, you will see the ANI instead.

Table 20: ANI/DNIS Digits on Phone Display

(COS Option 502 Enabled and COS Option 613 Disabled)
COS Option 502 - Display ANI/DNIS = YES (enable)
COS Option 613 - Display ANI only = NO (disable)
Phone display during Phone display after
ringing answer
ANI and DNIS sent DNIS ANI
ANI sent ANI ANI
DNIS sent DNIS DNIS
Neither sent Trunk Number or Label Trunk Number or Label

Table 21: ANI/DNIS Digits on Phone Display

(COS Option 502 Enabled and COS Option 613 Enabled)
COS Option 502- Display ANI/DNIS = YES (enable)
COS Option 613 - Display ANI only = YES (enable)
Phone display during ringing Phone display after
answer
ANI and DNIS sent ANI ANI
ANI sent ANI ANI
DNIS sent Trunk Number or Label Trunk Number or Label
Neither sent Trunk Number or Label Trunk Number or Label

137
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

The following table describes the set display for logged in ACD Agents with
the delivery of ANI/DNIS digits on the incoming trunks.
Table 22: ANI/DNIS for ACD Agents
Path Talking
COS 502 COS 613 COS 654 Ringing State
Name State

Enabled Enabled Disabled None ANI ANI

Enabled Disabled Disabled None DNIS ANI

Disabled Disabled Disabled None Path Number Trunk Name

Disabled Enabled Disabled None Path Number Trunk Name

Disabled Disabled Enabled None Path Number Path Number

Disabled Enabled Enabled None Path Number Path Number

Enabled Enabled Enabled None ANI Path Number

Enabled Disabled Enabled None DNIS Path Number

Enabled Enabled Disabled Yes Path Name ANI

Enabled Disabled Disabled Yes Path Name ANI

Disabled Disabled Disabled Yes Path Name Calling Trunk Name

Disabled Enabled Disabled Yes Path Name Calling Trunk Name

Disabled Disabled Enabled Yes Path Name Calling Path Name

Disabled Enabled Enabled Yes Path Name Calling Path Name

Enabled Enabled Enabled Yes Path Name Path Name

Enabled Disabled Enabled Yes Path Name Path Name

138
 Basic Programming

CLASS trunks
1. Form 01, System Configuration
- Program the ASU Trunk card, the LS/CLASS Trunk module, or the
LS/CLASS Trunk card.
2. Form 03, Class of Service, Define for trunks.
Assign a separate COS for the trunk.
- To have Calling Line ID digits reported in the SMDR records,
enable COS Option 806 (SMDR-Record Incoming Calls) and COS
Option 814 (SMDR-Record ANI/DNIS/CLASS). Enable COS
Option 702 (SMDR - Overwrite Buffer).
- To have CLASS name reported in the SMDR records, enable COS
Option 246 (SMDR-Extended Record) and COS Option 814
(SMDR-Record ANI/DNIS/CLASS).
3. Form 03, Class of Service, Define for SUPERSET sets.
- To display Calling Line ID digits on a SUPERSET display set or
console, enable COS Option 502 (Display ANI/DNIS/CLASS
Information) in the class of service for the set/console. Enable COS
Option 613 - Display ANI Information Only if required.
- To display CLASS name before Calling Line ID digits on phones
with 2-line displays, enable COS Option 503 (Display CLASS
Name) in the class of service for the set.
4. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptor
- Assign the CLASS trunk with the circuit descriptor. LS/CLASS
trunks in the controller or an ASU use ASU CLASS circuit
descriptor. An LS/CLASS Trunk module in a Peripheral Cabinet
uses “4-CIRCUIT CLASS” and an LS/CLASS Trunk card uses
“8-CIRCUIT CLASS“.
- Program the option “CLASS Trunk” in the circuit descriptor options
subform for the appropriate ASU, 4-circuit, or 8-circuit CLASS trunk.
5. Form 14, Non-Dial-In Trunks or Form 15, Dial-in Trunks
- Program the CLASS trunks. In Form 15 the CLASS trunk becomes
a DISA trunk.
6. Form 04, System Options and Timers
- Program the CLASS receivers for the LS/CLASS Trunk module.
The LS/CLASS Trunk card provides its own CLASS receivers and
does not require programming in Form 04.

139
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Running the Line Quality Test for LS Trunks

Run the Line Quality test to measure and program optimum audio
configuration settings (line length and impedance) for AMB CLASS
circuits.
1. Form 13 (Audio Configuration subform)
- Program the trunks so that one trunk provides milliwatt tone for all
other trunks in a loopback setup when the test is performed.

Sample setup (trunk 6 provides milliwatt tone):

Trunk # Tel # Milliwatt

1 1111001 6
2 1111002 6
3 1111003 6
4 1111004 6
5 1111005 6
6 1111006 1

Note: If the local CO provides a milliwatt tone number, do not configure

the loopback setup described above. Instead, enter the milliwatt tone
number in Form 13 (Trunk Circuit Descriptors) and run the Line
Quality test.

2. Switch to MTCE.
3. Press
DIAGNOSTICS
LS_MEASURE
select LINE_QUALITY (for one trunk) or BATCH_QUAL (for all trunks)
Respond to the prompts to run the test.
When the test is complete, LENGTH and IMPEDANCE are
programmed automatically in Form 13 (Audio Configuration subform).

Note: LENGTH and IMPEDANCE must be set to AUTO in order to

be programmed automatically when the test is run. Refer to the logs
to determine the actual settings for AUTO. To view the logs, press
DIAGNOSTICS > LS_MEASURE > TEST_RESULTS > ENTER.

140
 Basic Programming

Programming Symbol MiNET Wireless

Phones (Optional)
A site survey by Symbol Technologies followed by the installation and
configuration of Air Access Points (also by Symbol) precedes
programming of the phones.
1. Complete programming on the SX-200 ICP.
In Form 09 (Devices Assignments) enter the following information:
- Device Type (WRLSS)
- Directory Number
- PIN (must be four digits)
In Form 03 (COS Define), assign a Class of Service and Class of
Restriction to the phone.
2. Install the Symbol NetVision MiNET phone administrator tool on a
Windows NT or Windows 2000 PC (see below).
3. Upgrade the Symbol phone firmware to use the MiNET protocol. Refer
to the Symbol NVP II MiNET Update Procedure document (Symbol
MiNET.pdf) found on the SX-200 IPCP software CD.
The instructions in the Update Procedure document refer to a
configuration text file. Use the Minet_protocol.txt file provided on the
SX-200 IP software CD. The file is located in the folder
3rd Party/Wireless/Administration_Tool/.
4. Configure the wireless phones using the Symbol NetVision MiNET
Phone Administrator Tool.

Install Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone

Administrator Tool
The tool is found on the SX-200 ICP software CD and must be installed on
a PC that is running Windows NT or Windows 2000.
To install the tool:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click \3rd_Party\Wireless\Administration_Tool \MiNET<xxx>.exe.
3. Click Unzip to place files in C:\temp\symbol.

141
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

4. Click Close.
5. Open the C:\temp\symbol folder.
6. Click setup.exe.
7. Follow the instructions in the install wizard.

Twinning the Symbol phone with a wireline

(desk) phone
Phone twinning provides concurrent ringing and message waiting
indication on as many as five phones.
To set up twinning:
1. Form 02, Feature Access Codes
- Program the Disable Twin Phone access code (61).
2. For BOTH the Primary Telephone (Symbol MiNET Wireless Phone)
and Secondary Telephone(s)
- In Form 03, enable Option 276, Twin Phone, and then assign the
COS to the primary and secondary telephone(s).
3. For the Primary Telephone
Tip: In Form 09, ensure that the primary telephone has no key-line
appearance in the system.

Note: The Symbol phone must be programmed as the primary phone.

4. For IP and DNIC Secondary Telephones

- In Form 09, Expand Set Subform, assign a multicall line key to the
primary DN and make the multiline key the preferred line (LINE
PREF softkey) for incoming and outgoing calls. This is required to
light the message waiting lamp on the secondary phones.
5. For ONS Secondary Telephones
- In Form 09, program the Primary DN (i.e., the DN of the Symbol
phone) in the ASSOC field.

142
 Basic Programming

Programming IP Sockets for Hotel/ Motel

terminals and ACD Monitor
Note: Hotel/Motel front desk terminals, ACD Monitors and other applications
that are not IP-enabled, and that require bi-directional data, must use an
RS232-to-IP serial port converter, such as the Precidia Technologies
Ether232 or iPocket232 (available from the vendor or its resellers), to connect
to the SX-200 ICP. A dataset connection to a DNIC port or an RS-232 serial
port on the SX-200 ICP controller will not work.
1. Form 03, COS Define
- Select the COS number.
- Enable the following COS Options:
901 - DTRX Herald
904 - DTRX Complete Message Text
906 - Data SMDR - Does Not Apply
2. Form 29, DTE Profile
- Select a DTE profile number. You will use this profile number in
Form 12 - Data Assignment.
- Select the SEL. Option Subform.
- Enable: DTRX Echoplex, Editing, and Edit Character = 127.
3. Form 11, Data Circuit Descriptor
- Select a Circuit Descriptor (CDN).
Match the CDN values to those of the selected Terminal. For
example, All Baud Rates = 9600, Parity = None, Character Length
= 8, and Stop Bits = 1.
4. Form 12, Data Assignment
- Program a SOCKET type data device to an available PLID in the
following range:
PLID Port PLID Port
1/13/20 61320 1/13/25 61325
1/13/21 61321 1/13/26 61326
1/13/22 61322 1/13/27 61327
1/13/23 61323 1/13/28 61328
1/13/24 61324

143
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

In the Data Terminal Equipment profile (DTE) field, enter the DTE
number you used in Form 29 and the same CDN you used in Form 11.
- Assign a Tenant, Extension number, COS, COR, and circuit
descriptor number programmed in Form 11.
5. Program the RS232-to-IP serial port converter with the settings in
Table 23 on page 145.
Note: For Remote Port, enter the port number programmed in Form 12, not
6830 as the table shows.
6. Connect the Hotel/Motel terminal or ACD Monitor computer to the
Layer 2 switch using the RS232-to-IP serial port converter.
7. Verify that the device and SX-200 ICP are communicating. If they are
communicating, you will see an exchange of ENQ (Enquire) and ACK
(Acknowledge) commands at the device. If they are not
communicating, see page 273 for troubleshooting information.

144
 Basic Programming

Programming Voice mail and PMS Integration

Requirements
• MOSS Option 124, Voice mail Property Management System.
• A Hyatt Encore or HIS compatible PMS.
• An RS232-to-IP serial port converter, such as the Precidia
Technologies Ether232 or iPocket232 (available from the vendor or its
resellers), is required to connect the customer's PMS computer to the
Layer 2 switch. A dataset connection to a DNIC port or an RS-232
serial port on the SX-200 ICP controller will not work.
Follow the instructions supplied with the converter to program its
Ethernet and serial port settings. Programming for the Precidia
programming is provided below. The Ethernet settings (converter IP
address, Subnet Mask and Gateway IP address) to use depend on the
LAN configuration. The serial port settings to use are as follows:

Table 23: RS232-to-IP Serial Port Converter Settings

Setting Value
Protocol Transparent tcp (tunnel)
Local Port 0
Port Speed Varies with the PMS System:
HIS - 2400 baud, Even Parity, 7 Data & 1 Stop Bit, No
Flow Control
Encore - 1200 baud, Even Parity, 7 Data & 1 Stop Bit, No
Flow Control
Connection control Net-Link
Remote IP SX-200 ICP RTC IP Address
Remote Port 6830 (as programmed in CDE Form 12)
Terminators Not required

145
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

SX-200 ICP programming

1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
- Enable Option 124, Voice mail Property Management System..

Note: Enabling Option 124 requires a system reset.

2. Form 49 - Voice mail Option

- Select the PMS Protocol, Hyatt Encore or HIS.

Setting up the Ether232

1. Connect cables (power, Ethernet from Layer 2 switch to Ether232, and
serial from PC to Ether232).
Note: The serial cable connecting the PC to the Ether232 must be a Null
Modem (RS232-Crossover) cable.
2. Start a terminal program on the PC (such as Hyperterminal) and set
the configuration to 9600-8-N-1.
3. Press and hold the Configure button on back panel of the Ether232 for
several seconds until the Ether232 configuration menu appears on the
terminal.
4. Assign the Ether232 a valid IP Address with Subnet Mask and
Gateway IP Address.
5. Configure the Serial Port for the Ether232 with the settings in Table 23.
6. Set the remote IP address. This is the IP address of the SX-200 ICP.
7. Set the remote IP port to 6830.
8. Ensure that all remaining entries are set to zero. If they are not 0 set
them to 0.
9. Save the configuration.
10. Unplug the PC from the Ether232 and connect the PMS computer in
its place.
11. Press any key to establish communication with the SX-200 ICP.

146
 Basic Programming

Programming the PMS Interface on the

SX-200 ICP

Requirements
• Purchase MOSS Option 108, Property Management System.
• Lodgistix PMS software package (or a package that follows the same
protocol).
• An RS232-to-IP serial port converter, such as the Precidia
Technologies Ether232 or iPocket232 (available from the vendor or its
resellers), for PMS applications requiring serial connectivity to the
SX-200 ICP. IP-enabled applications can connect via Telnet.

SX-200 ICP programming

1. Determine the customer’s PMS communications protocol requirements:
baud rate, parity, character length and number of stop bits.
2. Form 04, System Options
- Program the following:
System Options / Timers Status
04 Message Waiting and Message Register Clear Print ENABLE
11 Automatic Wake-Up ENABLE
13 Automatic Wake-Up Print ENABLE
32 Outgoing Call Restriction ENABLE
27 Room Status Audit DISABLE
33 Room Status DISABLE
34 Auto Room Status Conversion / Wake Up Print DISABLE
108 - Property Management System ENABLE
124 - Voice Mail Property Management System ENABLE

147
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

3. Form 11, Circuit Descriptor

- Program to match the protocol.
- Select the Circuit Descriptor Options.

Option Name Value

Session Inactivity Timer 0
Guard Timer 2
Minimum Baud Rate match customer’s PMS
Default Baud Rate match customer’s PMS
Maximum Baud Rate match customer’s PMS
Always use Default Baud Rate when called YES
DTR Off Disconnect Timer 5
DTR to CTS Delay Timer 100
DTR Forced High YES
RTS Forced High YES
DSR Is held High when device is Idle YES
CTS Is held High when device is Idle YES
Originate a DTRX Call with Low - High transition of NO
DTR
Action taken if the Idle DTE has DTR Low REFUSE
(Auto-Answer)
ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed (Auto Baud) DISABLE
ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud DISABLE
ASYNC: Flow Control XON/XOFF
ASYNC: Break Key Function Transparent
ASYNC: PBX Attention Character 0
ASYNC: Parity match customer’s PMS
ASYNC: Character Length match customer’s PMS
ASYNC: Number Of Stop Bits match customer’s PMS
DS2100: Operating Mode ASYNCHRONOUS

148
 Basic Programming

4. Form 12, Data Assignment

- Program a SOCKET type data device to an available PLID in the
following range:
PLID Port PLID Port
1/13/20 61320 1/13/25 61325
1/13/21 61321 1/13/26 61326
1/13/22 61322 1/13/27 61327
1/13/23 61323 1/13/28 61328
1/13/24 61324
- Assign a Tenant, Extension number, COS, COR, and circuit
descriptor number.
5. Form 34, Directed I/O: program the PMS.
EXT NUM PRINTOUT PRINTOUT TYPE GUARANTEED

From Form 12 PMS AUTOPRINT NO

6. Form 03, Class of Service Define

- Program the following table:
Device COS Option Status
Attendant 101 Attendant Outgoing Restriction / Room Status ENABLE
Consoles Set Up
105 Attendant Guest Room Key ENABLE
Room 202 Alarm Call ENABLE
Phones 220 Do Not Disturb ENABLE
232 Message Waiting SETUP Lamp ENABLE
703 Message Register Applies ENABLE
239 Priority Dial 0 (optional - see step 6) ENABLE
244 Room Status Applies DISABLE
608 SUPERSET Status Display DISABLE

149
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

7. Form 19, Call Rerouting

- Program “Station Dial 0" routing.
The “Station Dial 0" answer point for all tenants must be a Console
LDN or Subattendant LDN. To allow the customer’s PMS to set
message waiting, you must program Day, Night 1, and Night 2 answer
points to the same LDN.

[ Tenant ___ ] Type Of Call Day N1 N2

Station Dial 0 Routing Same LDN Same LDN Same LDN

- If you require different “Dial 0" answer points for Day, N1, and N2
use “Priority Dial 0" as an alternate method.
8. Form 34, Directed I/O: program the PMS.
EXT NUM PRINTOUT PRINTOUT TYPE GUARANTEED
From Form 12 PMS AUTOPRINT NO

9. Do one of the following:

- Start a Telnet session on the PMS computer to the IP address of the
SX-200 ICP and the socket port number programmed in Form 12.
- Connect the PMS computer to the Layer 2 switch using the
RS232-to-IP serial port converter. Then, program the converter
with the settings in Table 23 on page 145.
Note: For Remote Port, enter the port number programmed in Form 12, not
6830 as the table shows.

10. Verify that the customer’s PMS computer communicates with the
SX-200 ICP.
For serially-connected PMS computers, you will see an exchange of
ENQ (Enquire) and ACK (Acknowledge) commands at the customer’s
PMS computer if it is communicating with the SX-200 ICP. If they are
not communicating, see page 273 for troubleshooting information.

150
 Basic Programming

Programming for the 6010 Teleworker

Solution
IMPORTANT: Basic I & M certification qualifies technicians to
install a Mitel 6010 Teleworker for voice-only use. Installation
in a converged voice and data network requires Advanced
I & M certification.

Requirements
Support for the 6010 Teleworker on the SX-200 ICP requires the following:
• Mitel 6000 Managed Applications Server (MAS), Release 6.0 or higher

Note: The 6000 MAS must be on the same VLAN (subnet) as the SX-200 ICP.

• Mitel 6010 Teleworker Solution Blade (installs on the 6000 MAS),

Release 6.0 or higher
• a valid Service Link account
• 5020 IP, 5212 IP, 5215 IP, 5220 IP, or 5224 IP Phone (with Boot Load
5.22 or later)
• an IP Phone license for each Teleworker phone

Installation and programming

Below is an overview of the installation and programming needed to
implement the 6010 Teleworker Solution. For more information, see the
Applications & Solutions section on the Mitel Customer Documentation
website for documentation.

SX-200 ICP
• Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments
- Assign set type (5020, 5212, 5215, 5220, or 5224), extension
number, COS, COR, and name (optional) for each bay/slot/circuit
that will host a Teleworker phone.
Note: Phones with low bandwidth connections should have Option 688
(IP Set Requires Compression) enabled in their Class of Service.

151
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

6000 MAS
In the 6000 MAS Server Manager web interface,
- enter the ICP Name, IP address, and System ID (from Form 04,
Option 101) of the SX-200 ICP, and then select SX-200 ICP as the
Mitel ICP type.
- enter the MAC address (printed on a label on the bottom of the
phone) into the list of allowed MAC addresses on the 6010
Teleworker Solution blade panel in the 6000 MAS. When an
unregistered remote IP Phone attempts to connect, the 6010
Teleworker Solution server will automatically register the MAC
address.

Teleworker Phone
Register the phone by entering the following information:
- the IP Address of the 6010 server
- the Netmask or Subnet Mask for the office network (only required
if giving the phone a static IP address).
- the Default Gateway IP Address for the office network.

Testing IP Phone connectivity and voice quality

The 6000 MAS includes a tool, the Teleworker Network Analyzer, that is
used to test remote IP Phone connectivity to the 6010 Teleworker Solution
and voice quality.

152
 Basic Programming

Programming SpectraLink Wireless

Telephones

Requirements
• SX-200 ICP Release 2.1 or later software and one IP device license
per Netlink phone.
• A properly configured and operational wireless LAN—includes
compatible 802.11b wireless access points and SpectraLink Voice
Priority Server (SVP).
Notes:
1. Software for the SpectraLink telephones is provided on the
SX-200 ICP system software CD.
2. The push-to-talk feature of the NetLink i640 requires enabling
multicasting on the subnet used for the wireless telephones and
the SVP Server. Routers are typically configured with filters to
prevent multicast traffic from flowing outside of specific domains.
Where possible, the wireless LAN can be placed on a separate
VLAN or subnet to reduce the effects of broadcast and multicast
traffic from devices in other network segments.

Programming
SX-200 ICP
• In CDE Form 47, IP Networking, DHCP Options, Common Options
subform, program the following options:
• 3, Default Gateway IP address (default is 192.168.1.1)
• 66, SpectraLink firmware TFTP server IP address
(default is 192.168.1.2)
• 129, SX-200 ICP (RTC) IP address (default is 192.168.1.2)
• 130 - DHCP Server Identifier (default is MITEL IP PHONE)
• 151, SVP server IP address.
• Register the telephones with the SX-200 ICP either in CDE Form 09
(Desktop Device Assignments) or from the telephones by entering the
IP Set PIN Registration code and the desired directory number.

153
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

• Assign a Class of Service to each telephone in Form 09.

• (Optional) Associate the SpectraLink Wireless phone with the user's
desk phone. See Phone Twinning for programming instructions.
• (Optional) Assign features and line appearances to keys on the phones.
SpectraLink Devices and Access Points
The following table summarizes the programming requirements for
SpectraLink and other associated third-party devices. For detailed
instructions, refer to the SpectraLink documentation on the SX-200 ICP
software CD. See also the documentation supplied with the Access Points
selected for the installation.
Notes:
1. The menus and options in the examples may vary slightly
depending on the version of software in the device or the
device type.
2. Settings not explicitly configured should be left at their default
values.

154
 Basic Programming

Table 24: SpectraLink Installation Checklist

NetLink Telephones
Parameter Requirement
ESS ID Ensure that ESSID matches Access Point ESSID.
Example:
ESS ID -> Static Entry -> 123456

License Ensure that selected license setting allows for TFTP Server IP Address
Management Input.
Example:
License Mgmt -> Set Current -> Type 014
Security Ensure that selected security matches Access Point Security Settings.
Example:
Security -> WEP -> Authentication -> Open System
Security -> WEP -> WEP On/Off -> WEP On
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Default Key -> 1
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key Length -> 40-Bit
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #1 -> 1111111111
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #2 -> 2222222222
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #3 -> 3333333333
Security -> WEP -> Key Information -> Key #4 -> 4444444444
Security -> WEP -> Rotation Secret -> 1

NOTE: Please be aware that once a WEP Key has been entered, it will
not be displayed when re-accessing that Key Information menu.
CAREFULLY enter the required Key to prevent typos.

IP Addresses Ensure that the defined IP addresses match the host Access Point
subnet settings using either Static or DHCP configuration.
Example:
Static settings
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> Phone IP -> 192.168.0.101
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> TFTP Server IP -> 192.168.0.15
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> Default Gateway -> 192.168.0.1
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> Subnet Mask -> 255.255.255.000
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> SVP IP Addr -> 192.168.0.20
IP Addresses -> Static IP -> RTC IP Addr -> 192.168.0.15

DHCP settings
003 (Default Gateway) - IP Address - 192.168.0.1
128 (TFTP Server IP Address) - IP Address - 192.168.0.15
129 (RTC IP Address) - IP Address - 192.168.0.15
130 (DHCP Server Identifier) - ASCII String - MITEL IP PHONE
151 (SVP Server) - IP Address - 192.168.0.20

(Page 1 of 3)

155
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 24: SpectraLink Installation Checklist (continued)

Access Point (Symbol)
Parameter Requirement
ESS ID & IP Ensure that the correct IP settings for the Access Point, as well as the
Addresses desired Net_ID (ESS ID), are configured correctly.
Example:
IP Address - 192.168.0.25
Gateway IP Address - 192.168.0.1
DNS IP Address - 192.168.0.200
Net_ID (ESS) - 123456
Additional DNS - 192.168.0.201

Special Ensure that the desired wireless security settings are defined correctly.
Functions Example:
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Pre-shared Key -> Enabled
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> WEP -> 40 bit
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> Encryption Key ID -> 1
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 1 -> 11111 11111
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 2 -> 22222 22222
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 3 -> 33333 33333
Configure Authentication and Encryption -> Configure WEP/KeyGuard
-> WEP/KeyGuard Key Maintenance -> Key 4 -> 44444 44444

Set System Ensure that Access Control is enabled in order to make the wireless
Configuration network more secure.
Example:
Set System Configuration -> Access Control -> Allowed

Set Access Ensure that devices allowed on the wireless network have their MAC
Control List Address entered correctly in the list.
Example:
Set Access Control List -> Address Type -> Individual -> Add-[F2] ->
08:00:0F:01:02:03

(Page 2 of 3)

156
 Basic Programming

Table 24: SpectraLink Installation Checklist (continued)

Netlink SVP Server
Parameter Requirement
SVP-II Ensure that the proper settings for the NetLink wireless phones
Configuration SpectraLink Voice Priority management are entered correctly.
Example:
SVP-II Configuration -> Phones per Access Point -> 4
SVP-II Configuration -> SVP-II Master -> 192.168.0.20
SVP-II Configuration -> First Alias IP Address: -> 192.168.0.21
SVP-II Configuration -> Last Alias IP Address: -> 192.168.0.24
SVP-II Configuration -> SVP-II Mode -> Netlink IP

NOTE: Please ensure that the defined Alias IP Addresses Range does
not overlap with any other device, including NetLink Wireless IP
Phones, located on the same subnet.

Network Ensure that the correct IP Settings for the SVP Server are configured
Configuration correctly.
Example:
Network Configuration -> IP Address -> 192.168.0.20
Network Configuration -> Subnet Mask -> 255.255.255.000
Network Configuration -> Default Gateway -> 192.168.0.1

IMPORTANT: Ensure that the Access Point(s) in use is/are on the

same subnet as the SVP Server. Each subnet must have its own SVP
server:

(Page 3 of 3)

157
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Programming with MyAdministrator

The SX-200 MyAdministrator software application is used to perform basic
changes to telephone and voice mail programming. It is also used to gather
and display IP voice networking statistics related to IP trunk performance,
delays during peak periods, and outages in the network.

Note: The SX-200 ICP supports MyAdministrator Release 3 and higher only.

The application software is the MyAdmin folder on the SX-200 ICP

software CD. Run Setup.exe to install it.
MyAdministrator can manage the following device types:
• All Mitel IP Phones, and sub-attendant variants of the 5020, 5220,
5220 Dual Boot, and 5224 Dual Boot IP Phones
• Mitel 5310 IP Board Room Conference Unit (shown as 5020 IP
Phones)
• ONS Stations
• SUPERSET 401 and 4001 (key programming is not supported)
• SUPERSET 410, 4105, 420, 4025, and 4125, 430, 4150, and their
subattendant variants
• Programmable Key Modules
• SpectraLink NetLink e340, h340 and i640 Wireless Telephones

The application identifies but cannot program the following devices:

• PKM Interface Unit (DSS/BLF Interface Unit)
• SUPERSET 3DN and 4DN telephones
• DMP Units.

Requirements
• The SX-200 ICP requires purchasable System Option 80,
MyAdministrator Access.
• A PC running Microsoft® Windows® 98, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows ME, a Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (Service Pack 4.0 or
greater), or Windows XP.
• A LAN connection for the PC. Direct and modem connections to the
SX-200 ICP are not supported.

158
 Basic Programming

Programming Call Forwarding - External

Call Forwarding - External forwards calls to an external destination by
using a personal speed call key, system abbreviated dial number, or a key
system personal speedcall.
Call Forwarding - External requires a receiver for dialing. If one is not
available in Call Forward - Don’t Answer, forwarding is ignored. If one is
not available during a reroute, the caller is dropped or given reorder tone.
1. Program the following COS options in the extension’s COS:
- Enable COS Option 245 (Abbreviated Dialing Access).
- Enable COS Option 208 (Call Forwarding External).

Note: The device which is calling the destination that is an external call
forward must have COS Option 208, Call Forward External, enabled.

Note: Check for split forwarding COS 260 and COS 709.
- Disable COS Option 200 (Account Code, Forced Entry - External
Calls) to allow call forwarding to system abbreviated dial numbers.
2. Enable System Option 21 (Incoming to Outgoing Call Forward) for a
trunk or party with a single party trunk on hold to forward externally.
3. Program a feature access code for Feature Access Code 03 (Call
Forwarding - All Calls).
4. Form 30 (Device Interconnection Table) specifies which devices can
be connected together. For external call forwarding that involves two
trunks, verify that they can be connected together.
Toll Control applies to the calling party for Call Forwarding - External to
personal speed call keys or to key system personal speedcalls.
Toll Control does not apply when forwarding to system abbreviated dial
external numbers.
Toll Control does not apply to CO trunks which are externally call
forwarded.
The forwarding destination is the current stored speedcall key number,
personal abbreviated dial number, or system abbreviated dial number.
Note: On a Call Forward - Busy or Call Forward - Always call, the COS of
the caller (trunk or extension) is checked. Keep this in mind when transferring
calls to a phone which is externally Call Forwarded.

159
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Feature Limitations
Table 25: SX-200 ICP Feature Limitations
Feature Limitation
Maximum number of simultaneous calls 248
Maximum number of Call Park keys 24
Maximum number of Mailbox keys 748
Maximum number of speech paths or channels used 2
by any call
Maximum number of simultaneous consultations 5
Maximum number of System Park Orbits 25
Maximum number of Specific Park Orbits 25
Maximum number of Voice mail Ports 16
Maximum number of Voice mail Boxes 748
Maximum number of simultaneous add-on (3-way) DSP configuration
calls dependent
(see page 12)
Maximum number of simultaneous station-controlled DSP configuration
conference calls dependent
(see page 12)
Maximum number of parties in conference at one time 5
Maximum number of calls that can simultaneously be 247
camped on to a station, trunk group, or hunt group
Maximum number of simultaneous callbacks that can 100
be enabled
Maximum number of simultaneous call forwards that 650
can be enabled
Maximum number of simultaneous “Dial 0” calls 48
Maximum number of ONS telephones ringing 32
simultaneously per bay
Maximum number of messages queued in the system 750
(Page 1 of 4)

160
 Basic Programming

Table 25: SX-200 ICP Feature Limitations (continued)

Feature Limitation
Maximum number of hunt groups 99
Maximum number of hunt groups in ACD 99
Maximum number of ACD agents that may be defined 999
Maximum number of active agents in ACD per bay 25
Maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously unlimited
connected to Music-on-Hold
Maximum number of stations in a station hunt group 50
Maximum number of stations in a call pickup group 50
Maximum number of dial call pickup groups 50
Maximum number of trunks assignable to night 200
stations
Maximum number of trunks in a trunk group 50
Maximum number of trunk groups 50
Maximum number of calls that can override a given 1
extension
Maximum number of attendant consoles 11
Maximum number of attendant consoles on a Digital 4
Line Card
Maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously 8
held by one attendant
Maximum number of incoming calls that can be 8
separately identified at the attendant console
Maximum number of LDNs that can be identified at the 9
attendant console
Maximum number of LDNs 100
Maximum Number of Night Bells 25
Maximum number of calls waiting that can be 99
displayed at console
(Page 2 of 4)

161
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 25: SX-200 ICP Feature Limitations (continued)

Feature Limitation
Maximum number of calls that can be waiting at 200
console
Maximum number of abbreviated dial numbers 1000
Maximum number SUPERSET Speed Dial numbers 2212
Maximum number of trunk buffers for SMDR 200
Maximum number of DATA SMDR buffers 128
Maximum number of stations of SUPERSET 4001, 650
SUPERSET 4015, SUPERSET 4025,
SUPERSET 4125, SUPERSET 4150,
SUPERSET 401+, SUPERSET 410, SUPERSET 420,
SUPERSET 430, SUPERSET 3DN and 4DN
telephones, DSS /BLF Interface Units, and ONS ports.
Maximum number of user devices (all sets, stations, 768
trunks, consoles, stand alone datasets, and DMP
units)
Maximum number of IP devices and other resources
per system
- IP trunks 24
- IP phones 248
- IP phone-to-IP phone calls (with voice compression) 96
Compression channels 24
Maximum number of music sources 25
Maximum number of Door relays 3
Maximum number of ASU 2
Maximum number of lines: SX-200 Peripheral cabinet 96
Maximum number of TDM bays 7
Maximum number of ISDN bays 4
Maximum number of T1 links, including T1 D4 links, 8
PRI links, and NSU links
Maximum Number of T1 links per system 8
(Page 3 of 4)

162
 Basic Programming

Table 25: SX-200 ICP Feature Limitations (continued)

Feature Limitation
Maximum Number of Page Groups 50
Maximum Number of Paging Zones 9
Maximum Number of Stations in a Page Group 64
Maximum Number of Sub-attendants 25
Maximum Number of LDN Appearances 16
Maximum Number of Line Appearances 32
(Page 4 of 4)

163
 SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

CDE Cross Reference

FORM
04 - System Options/System Timers

06 - Tenant Night Switching Control

09 - Desktop Device Assignments

05 - Tenant Interconnection Table

08 - Attendant LDN Assignments

18 - Miscellaneous System Ports

20 - ARS: COR Group Definition

21 - ARS: Day Zone Definition

22 - ARS: Modified Digit Table

13 - Trunk Circuit Descriptors
02 - Feature Access Codes

11 - Data Circuit Descriptor

23 - ARS: Route Definition

07 - Console Assignments
01- System configuration

19 - Call Rerouting Table

14 - Non-Dial-In Trunks

25 - ARS: Route Plans

12 - Data Assignment

24 - ARS: Route Lists

10 - Pickup Groups

15 - Dial-In Trunks

16 - Trunk Groups

17 - Hunt Groups
03 - COS Define

DEVICE
OR
OPTION
ACD A7 A4 A1 C C C C C C C
ASU A2 A3
Compression A2 A1 A3
Console A1 B2 B C C A2 B1 C C C C C C C C
Dataset A1 C B1 C C C C A2 A3 C C C C C C
DID Trunk A1 B1 C C C C A2 A3 B C
DISA Dial In A1 C B1 C C C C A2 A3 B B A4 C C C C
E&M “Tie Trk” A1 C B1 C C C A2 A3 A4 B A5 C C C C
Hotel C B A C C C B C C C C C
IP Trunk A2 A3 A1 A4 A5 A6 A8 A7 A6
ISDN Device A2 A5 A1 B C A3 B B
Key System A1 C B1 C C C A2 C C C C C C C C C C
Modem A1 A4 A2 C C B
MOH A1 C C C A2 B
Multiline set A1 C B1 C C C A2 C C C C C C C C C C
Night Bell A1 C C A2 C
Non Dial In Trk A1 B1 C C C C A2 A3 A4 C
NSU A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A13 A12 A11
Pager A1 B C A2
Phonebook B A1 A3 A2
Printer
RAD A1 B1 C C A2 A3 C
RAD (EMEM) A3 A1 A4 C
Single Line A1 C B1 C C C A2 C C C C C C C C C
UCD C C C C C C A1 A2
Verified Acct. A2 A3 C C C C B1 B2
Voice mail (EMEM) A2 A4 A3 A1 A5 A6

Legend:
A Forms must have specific programming completed to perform the task.
B Forms have direct impact on device operation.
C Related to process, or device, but not mandatory.

Digits after the letters (A1, A2...) denote the required order of entry.

164
 26 - ARS: ARS Digits

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
27 - ARS: Maximum Dialed Digits
28 - Form Access Restriction Def’n.

C
29 - DTE Profile

C
A4

B
B
B
30 - Device Interconnection Table

A6
31 - System Abbreviated Dial Entry

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
32 - CDE Data Print
33 - Account Code Entry

C
C
C
C
C
C

A1
B2
B
34 - Directed IO

C
C

B1
35 - Global Find Access Code

B
36 - Modem Assignment

A3
B
37 - Guest Rm SUPERSET KeysTemplate
38 - ACD Keys Template
39 - ACD Agent Groups

A5 A2
40 - ACD Supervisors

A3
A6 41 - ACD Paths

42 - T1 Link Descriptors
43 - T1 Link Assignment
44 - Network Synchronization

A8 A9 A10
46 - Key System Toll Control

C
C
C
47 - IP Networking
48 - Voice Networking

A9

B
49 - Voice Mail Options

A2
50 - Mailboxes

A7 A8
A4
51 - Voice Mail Distribution

C
52 - Email

C
53 - Bay Location Assignment

A1
A1

54 - Calling Party Number

A
A
A
A
A

55 - Digit Translation Table

A
A
A
A
A
ASU

RAD
NSU
ACD

UCD
MOH
Hotel

Pager
Basic Programming

Printer
Modem

165
Dataset
Console

IP Trunk

Night Bell
DID Trunk
FORM

Single Line
Phonebook
Multiline set
Key System
DISA Dial In

ISDN Device

Verified Acct.
Compression

RAD (EMEM)
E&M “Tie Trk”

Non Dial In Trk

OR

Voice mail (EMEM)

DEVICE

OPTION
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

166
 Chapter 4
Advanced Installation and
Programming
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

168
 Advanced Installation and Programming

Overview
This chapter is for technicians who are installing the controller in an
existing computer network or as a standalone IP networking for both voice
and data.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt the procedures in this chapter
until you have successfully completed the Mitel Advanced
SX-200 ICP I & M Course. For more information, see
“SX-200 ICP Advanced Installation and Maintenance Course”
on page 3.

Topics covered:
ˆ Basic PC Networking
ˆ Planning your LAN
ˆ Implementing Virtual LANs (VLANs)
ˆ Networking Mitel IP-PBXs
ˆ Programming Unified Messaging

169
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Planning your Installation

Adding PCs and data devices to a voice-only LAN or installing the
SX-200 ICP into an existing data LAN requires careful planning.
Completing the following pre-installation questionnaire will help you select
and implement a network configuration that best suits the needs of your
customer.
Tip: Refer to the Engineering Guidelines document on the SX-200 ICP
software CD-ROM on Mitel Online for more information on network planning
and configuration.

Question Answer
Will you connect to a private network or virtual private
network (VPN)?

What are the IP addresses, gateway address, and

subnet mask required for the SX-200 ICP sub network?
or
Will you use an external DHCP server?
Internal configuration questions
How many IP phones are you connecting to the
system?
How many PCs are you connecting to the system?
Are you connecting printers or file servers? How many?
Will these PCs and other devices use the DHCP server
in the SX-200 ICP controller?
Are you providing internet access through the WAN port
a Layer 2 switch port?
External configuration questions
What type of internet connection will you use? Dial-up,
xDSL, cable, or other?
Will you connect the system to an existing LAN?
What type of authentication is required?
Username
Password
PPP Security type
Will you network with other SX-200 ICP or 3300 ICP
systems?

170
 Advanced Installation and Programming

Basic PC Networking
The dual-port IP Phones (5010, 5020, 5212, 5215, 5220 and 5224) provide
an inexpensive way to network a small number of PCs.

Figure 16: Basic PC Network

Enabling the (2nd) Port on IP Phones

IMPORTANT: To ensure optimum network performance, DO
NOT connect servers to the 2nd port on IP phones.

1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers

- Enable System Option 131, PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone.

Note: The option must be purchased (listed on the MOSS sheet).

2. Form 03, COS Define

- Enable Option 280, PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone.

171
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Virtual LANs (VLANs)

This section shows examples of the three most common, converged voice
and data networks for an SX-200 ICP.
• Configuration 1: One DHCP Server per VLAN
• Configuration 2: One External DHCP Server for Two VLANs
• Configuration 3: Router on a Stick (one router interfacing multiple VLANs)

Configuration 1: One DHCP server per VLAN

Figure 17: VLAN Configuration 1

172
 Advanced Installation and Programming

DHCP Server Settings (Example)

The following settings must be programmed in the DHCP server:

• DHCP IP Address Range • Option 129 (RTC IP)

• Subnet Mask • Option 130 (IP Phone DHCP Server)
• Option 03 (Router) • Option 132 (VLAN ID)
• Option 128 (TFTP Server • Option 133 (Priority)
IP address)

Table 26 shows the DHCP settings programmed for this configuration.

See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server” on page 178 for
information on programming SX-200 ICP DHCP settings on a Windows
2000 DHCP server.
Table 26: DHCP Server Settings for Configuration 1 Example
DHCP Server on VLAN 1 Internal DHCP Server on
(IP: 10.10.10.2) Controller
Setting
Scope 1 Scope 1
DHCP 10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.100 20.20.20.10 to 20.20.20.100
Subnet 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Opt. 03 10.10.10.251 20.20.20.251
Opt.128 20.20.20.1 20.20.20.1
Opt. 129 20.20.20.1 20.20.20.1
Opt. 130 MITEL IP PHONE MITEL IP PHONE
Opt. 132 2 2
Opt. 133 6 6

For information on programming the controller IP address and DHCP

settings, see page 178.

173
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)

The following two tables show settings on a Cisco and an HP Layer 2
switch for the Configuration 1 example.
Note: These settings also apply for the other network configuration
examples.

Table 27: Cisco Layer 2 Switch Settings for All Configuration

Examples
Port Use Command
A Access port None (by default, all ports belong to VLAN 1)
for VLAN 1
B
C Access port L2switch(config-if)#switchport mode access
for VLAN 2 L2switch(config-if)#switchport access vlan 2
D
E Trunk port L2switch(config)#interface fast 0/5
with Dot1q for L2switch(config-if)#switchport mode trunk
IP Phone L2switch(config-if)#switchport trunk encapsulation
dot1q

Table 28: HP Layer 2 Switch Settings for All Configuration Examples

Port Use Command (on HP VLAN menu)
A Access port for VLAN 1 VLAN 1 = untagged
VLAN 2 = NO
B
C Access port for VLAN 2 VLAN 1 = NO
VLAN 2 = untagged
D
E Trunk port VLAN 1 = untagged
VLAN 2 = tagged

174
 Advanced Installation and Programming

Configuration 2: One external DHCP server for

two VLANs

Figure 18: VLAN Configuration 2

To configure the SX-200 ICP system to use an external DHCP server (for
example, Windows NT server or Windows 2000 server) through the
Layer 2 switch port, you must use Form 47 to disable the controller’s
built-in DHCP server. The local phones and PCs on the SX-200 ICP LAN
will then be able to receive IP addresses from the external server.

175
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

DHCP Server Settings (Example)

The following settings must be programmed in the DHCP server:

• DHCP IP Address Range • Option 129 (RTC IP)

• Subnet Mask • Option 130 (IP Phone DHCP Server)
• Option 03 (Router) • Option 132 (VLAN ID)
• Option 128 (TFTP Server • Option 133 (Priority)
IP Address)

Table 29 shows the DHCP settings programmed for this configuration.

See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server” on page 178 for
information on programming SX-200 ICP DHCP settings on a Windows
2000 DHCP server.

Table 29: DHCP Server Settings for Configuration 2 & 3 Examples

DHCP Server on VLAN 1
(IP: 10.10.10.2)
Setting Scope 1 Scope 2
DHCP 10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.100 20.20.20.10 to 20.20.20.100
Subnet 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Opt.03 10.10.10.251 20.20.20.251
Opt. 128 20.20.20.1 20.20.20.1
Opt. 129 20.20.20.1 20.20.20.1
Opt. 130 MITEL IP PHONE MITEL IP PHONE
Opt. 132 2 2
Opt. 133 6 6

For information on programming the controller IP address and DHCP

settings, see page 178.

Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)

See “Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)” on page 174.

176
 Advanced Installation and Programming

Configuration 3: Router on a Stick

Figure 19: VLAN Configuration 3

DHCP Server Settings (Example)

See Table 29, “DHCP Server Settings for Configuration 2 & 3 Examples,”
on page 176.
See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server” on page 178 for
information on programming SX-200 ICP DHCP settings on a Windows
2000 DHCP server.

Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)

See “Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)” on page 174.

177
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Programming the controller IP address and DHCP

settings
The IP address of the SX-200 ICP and its DHCP settings are set at the
factory. Use the following procedure if you need to change them.
To change the controller’s IP address and DHCP settings:
1. Establish a serial connection to the Maintenance port on the
SX-200 ICP Controller (see page 82 for instructions).
2. Log in to the CDE application.
3. In Form 47 (IP Networking), Subform 01 (SYSTEM IP)
- Enter values for IP ADDRESS, IP NETMASK, IP GATEWAY, and
other settings as required.
4. Press ENTER.
5. In Subform 02 (DHCP SERVER)
- Enter the required values. See the SX-200 ICP Technical
Documentation for information on values to use.
- To disable the controller’s DHCP server, press the DISABLE
softkey; press ENABLE to re-enable it.
6. Press ENTER.
7. Reset the system (see page 197 for instructions).

Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP server

You can modify a Windows 2000 DHCP server to support IP Phones. A
DHCP server must be configured to support the IP Phones for each
subnet. The following items must be configured:
• TFTP Server IP address (system IP address of the SX-200 ICP)
• IP address of the RTC card
• Mitel tag “MITEL IP PHONE”

To modify a Windows 2000 DHCP Server:

1. On the Start menu, point to Programs, then Administrative Tools,
and click DHCP.
2. Highlight the Server name and point to Action, then click Set
Predefined Options.

178
 Advanced Installation and Programming

3. In the Predefined Options and Values window, click Add.

4. In the Option Type window, set the following:
- Name: IP phone TFTP Server IP Address
- Type: IP Address
- Code: 128
Click OK.
- Value: enter the system IP address of the SX-200 ICP, then click
OK.
5. In the Predefined Options and Values window, click Add again.
6. In the Option Type window, set the following:
- Name: RTC IP Address
- Type: IP Address
- Code: 129
Click OK.
- Value: System IP Address of SX-200 ICP
Click OK.
7. In the Predefined Options and Values window click Add again.
8. In the Option Type window, set the following:
- Name: IP Phone DHCP Server
- Type: String
- Code: 130
Click OK.
- Value: MITEL IP PHONE.
Click OK.
If you are using VLANs, do ALL of the following steps. If you are not using
VLANs, do steps 13 to 18 and step 21
9. In the Predefined Options and Values window click Add again.
- Name: VLAN ID
- Type: Hex LONG (32 bit word)
- Code: 132
Click OK.
- Value: enter a numeric value for the VLAN.
Note: The server will automatically convert the numeric value to Hex.

179
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

10. (Optional) In the Option Type window, set the following:

- Name: Priority
- Type: Hex LONG
- Code: 133.
Click OK.
- Value: enter a value from 1 to 7; Mitel recommends 0x6.
Click OK.

Note: The server will automatically convert the numeric value to Hex.

11. Highlight the Scope which contains the IP range for the IP Phones and
select Scope Options.
12. In Action, click Configure Options.
13. In the General window, select option 003 Router and enter the IP
address of the default Gateway and then click Add.
14. Click OK.

180
 Advanced Installation and Programming

Networking Mitel IP-PBXs

IP trunks allow you to interconnect multiple Mitel SX-200 ICP, SX-200 IP
Nodes and 3300 ICP systems in a Wide Area Network (WAN). The IP trunks
carry voice and signal messages through the Ethernet switch to the WAN.
The SX-200 ICP MX supports up to 30 IP trunks on a single “virtual” IP
Trunk card programmed in Bay 1, Slot 6.
Notes:
1. The SX-200 ICP supports end-node functionality only, which
means it can be connected to no more than one other node in
the network.
2. This configuration requires dedicated, managed links to the
Internet and is intended for larger implementations. For smaller
implementations, cable or DSL links can be used if the IP trunks
are carried within IPSec VPN tunnels with traffic shaping
features. The Mitel 6042 Managed VPN is recommended.

Figure 20: IP Trunking Example

181
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

SX-200 ICP Programming

1. Form 48, Voice Networking
- Enter the IP Node Number and IP Address of each IP-PBX and
specify the maximum number of calls allowed to each.
Notes:
1. MAX CALLS must be greater than zero (the default); otherwise,
no calls are allowed to the node.
2. Each IP-PBX in the network must be assigned a unique IP Node
Number, which can be any number in the range 1 - 255.

The example below shows the Form 48 programming for a network of

three IP-PBXs. Each IP-PBX (node) has a unique IP Node number that
all the other IP-PBXs must have in their programming. The local site is
always Bay 1; the other sites have no Bay association.

2. Form 03, COS Define

- Enable the following COS options
- 801, Incoming Trunk Call Rotary
- 802, Limited Wait For Dial Tone
- 811, ANI/DNI/CLASS Trunk
- It is also recommended that you enable COS option 702 to prevent
calls from being denied access to trunks when the SMDR output is
stopped. If you want to capture incoming SMDR, enable COS
options 806 and 814.
Note: COS number 7 has the default IP Trunk settings.

182
 Advanced Installation and Programming

3. In Form 04, System Options/System Timers, enable option 86, PRI

Card - QSIG, to allow Calling Name and Number to be transmitted
over IP trunks.
4. In Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptors
- Set a descriptor to T1 E&M in the Options subform. Descriptor 7 in
the default database has the correct settings for IP trunks. If
selecting another descriptor, set options to the default values,
except:
set Incoming Start Type to WINK
set Outgoing Start Type to WINK
set QSIG Supplementary Services to YES
set DTMF to NO.
5. Form 15, Dial-in Trunks
- In the CDN field, enter the descriptor number that defines the T1
E&M trunk specified in Form 13.
6. Form 16, Trunk Groups
- All IP Trunks must be programmed in the same group. To avoid
collisions with incoming IP trunk calls, enter the trunks into the
group in the opposite order that the far end has them entered.
7. Form 23, Route Definition
- Program route definitions
- In the Show IP subform, specify the routes of IP Trunk Groups.
8. If the connection to the PSTN is through embedded PRI (Dual T1/E1
Framer or T1/E1 Combo module), program Calling Party Number
(CPN) substitution in the following Forms
- Form 54, Calling Party Number
- Form 19, Call Rerouting Table
- Form 22, ARS: Modified Digit Table
Note: In Form 22, for all SX-200 ICP controllers in the network, program a
modified digit entry with CPN enabled for external calls (calls destined to the
PSTN through the embedded PRI). Program another entry with CPN disabled
for internal network calls.

9. If you have not already done so, program the following Forms:
- Form 26, ARS: Digit Strings.
- Form 22, ARS: Modified Digit Table.

183
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Uniform Numbering Plan

Optionally, you can configure the nodes in your network with a uniform
numbering plan. For example, you can program nodes A, B, and C to
share extensions 1000 to 1999.
1. Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptors
- Set Present Node ID over IP Trunking to YES in the Options
subform.
2. Form 02, Feature Access Codes
- Program the Node ID (Feature 34).
3. On each node, program ARS leading digits containing node numbers
for all other nodes in the network. This eliminates the need for users
to insert digits when they return external calls from other nodes.

184
 Advanced Installation and Programming

Programming Unified Messaging

The Unified Messaging feature package enables the SX-200 ICP to
manage e-mail messages using SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
and/or IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol). Mitel’s implementation
of IMAP is known as Standard Unified Messaging.

Requirements
• MOSS Option 126, Email Messaging.
• Embedded voice mail for forwarding of voice mail to e-mail.
• Advanced certification for data networking.
• For SMTP, each user needs an account on an SMTP e-mail server.
The server can be yours or one belonging to your Internet Service
Provider (assumes that the SX-200 ICP is connected to the Internet).
• For IMAP, each user needs an account on the Unified Messaging
blade installed in the 6000 MAS. Also, the 6000 MAS must be
programmed to interact with the SX-200 ICP.
Note: E-mail notification only works with SMTP e-mail servers capable of
forwarding emails.

Programming SMTP
Programming the SMTP client
1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
- Enable System Option 126, Email Messaging.
- Program System Option 81, Enter offset from GMT (+/-hh:mm).
Enter the difference in hours and minutes between the time zone
that the SX-200 ICP is in and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
- (Optional) Enable System Option 137, Mark SMTP Forwarded
Voicemails as Read. If enabled, messages change from "new" to
"read" state when forwarded. Otherwise, they remain in their
original state (i.e, a "new" message will remain "new" after
forwarding). Only "new" messages flash user's MWI lamp.

185
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

2. Form 47, Subform 01, System IP,

- Enter a valid domain host name that is registered in your DNS or
listed in the Hosts file of the SMTP e-mail server. The host name
must be 49 characters or fewer and in the format aaa.zyz.com—for
example, SX200icp.xyz.com.
3. Form 49, Voice Mail Options,
- Enter the IP address of the SMTP server.
- If authentication is required, enter the SMTP server username and
password.

Programming to send voice mail and Record a Call messages to e-mail

1. Complete the SMTP programming described above.
2. Form 50, Mailboxes
In the Email subform, select a mailbox, then select a forwarding option:
- MANUAL FWD: Allows the user to forward voice messages to e-mail
using a telephone. The messages are saved in the user's mailbox.
- MAN FWD DEL: Allows the user to forward voice messages to
e-mail using a telephone. After the messages are sent, they are
deleted from the user's mailbox.
- ALWAYS FWD: Causes the system to forward all of the user's
voice messages to e-mail. The messages are saved in the user's
mailbox.
- ALL FWD DEL: Causes the system to forward all of the user's voice
messages to e-mail. After the messages are sent, they are deleted
from the user's mailbox.
Enter the e-mail address for voice messages.
(Optional) Press SHOW MORE and enter the e-mail address for
Record a Call messages. If no address is entered, Record a Call
messages are sent to the e-mail address for voice messages.
Note: The user can update the forwarding option by entering a telephone
command. The E-Mail subform of Form 50 displays the current forwarding option.

186
 Advanced Installation and Programming

Example voice mail forward to e-mail message (SMTP)

-------------------------------------------------------------------
From: [email protected]
Sent: Friday, May 09, 2004 10:03 AM
Subject: Voice mail Message
-------------------------------------------------------------------
This email contains a voice message.
Double click on the attached file to listen.
"Part(s): 2.001.4107.wav audio/basic 154.89 KB"

Note: The Subject and body are in the language of the message recipient's
voice mailbox—extension 4107 in the example—as programmed in Form 50.

Programming to send logs, alarms, and E911 notifications to e-mail

1. Complete the SMTP programming described above.
2. Form 52, Email
- Enter the e-mail address(es) for system logs, alarms, and E911 call
notifications.
- In the COMMENTS field, enter information to help in the
identification of the 911 caller's location—see example below.

Example E911 notification

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
From: [email protected]
Sent: Friday, May 09, 2004 10:03 AM
Subject: E911 Caller: R.Smith, 3702 4th Fl Stat A3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Location: 350 Legget Dr, Kanata, ON
6 story building, across from big parking lot

The information after the extension number in the Subject Line of the
message is from the Comments field in Form 09 and only appears in the
e-mail if the comment begins with “@”. The language of the message is the
DEFAULT LANGUAGE programmed in Form 49, Voice Mail Options.
The Location portion comes from the Comments entered in Form 52.
The call is also recorded in the Maintenance logs and appears as follows
(for example):
2003-OCT-12 10:40:42 IP LINE CARD 01 01 05 01 Ext 106
Called 911 Alarm Code = 17

187
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

3. Test the setup by sending an alarm, an E911 notification, and a log to

e-mail. The messages for these events should be sent to the correct
e-mail address. (Disconnect the system from the PSTN while testing
E911.)

Programming IMAP (Standard Unified Messaging)

Programming the IMAP client
1. Form 04, System Options/System Timers
- Enable System Option 126, Email Messaging.
- (Optional) Enable System Option 137, Mark SMTP Forwarded
Voicemails as Read. If enabled, messages change from "new" to
"read" state when forwarded. Otherwise, they remain in their
original state (i.e, a "new" message will remain "new" after
forwarding). Only "new" messages flash user's MWI lamp.
2. Form 49, Voice Mail Options
- Enter the IP address of the IMAP server.

Programming voice mail to e-mail forwarding

1. Complete the IMAP programming above.
2. Form 50, Mailboxes
- In the Email subform, select a mailbox in the FWD column, then
press the UNIFIED softkey.
Note: Configure user account information, including e-mail addresses and
extension numbers, in the 6000MAS.

Example voice mail forward to e-mail message (IMAP)

-------------------------------------------------------------------
From: 106 <voicemail@do-not-reply>
Sent: Tuesday, April 13, 2004 10:03 AM
To: 107
Subject: Voicemail message from 106 <ID: 1081872898>
-------------------------------------------------------------------
This e-mail contains a voice message.
Double click on the attached file to listen.

188
 Advanced Installation and Programming

Programming the 6000 MAS to support IMAP

In the 6000 MAS Server Manager web interface:
• On the Standard Unified Messaging panel,
- enable the application
- enter the IP address of the SX-200 ICP
- enter the system ID (from Form 04, Option 101) of the SX-200 ICP
• On the Users panel, select Add user account and complete the form.
Make sure the extension number matches the mailbox number
programmed in the SX-200 ICP, and the password matches the value
programmed in the user’s e-mail client. Repeat for each new user.
Note: When adding a user account to the 6000 MAS, enter the extension
number in the last portion of the Phone number field. See the 6000 MAS
documentation for details.

189
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

190
 Chapter 5
Routine Maintenance
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

192
 Routine Maintenance

Is the System Healthy?

System health checklist

ˆ LEDs on controller and expansion units are the correct color
ˆ Internal and external calls can be made from IP phones and DNIC and
ONS sets
ˆ Voice mailboxes are accessible
ˆ Users have user guides for their phones
ˆ Database is backed up

193
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Checking the System

1. Check the controller and expansion units. Ensure that all LEDs
indications are correct. See “Checking the System LEDs” on
page 241.
2. Make internal and external calls from the IP phones and analog sets.
3. Call into the system on all line types and ensure that incoming calls
ring (if programmed) the correct destination.
4. Review voice mail programming. Make calls to phones and check that
they forward to voice mail.
5. Ensure the external call forwarding permissions are set correctly.
6. Ensure that remote system access is set up if you plan to perform
remote programming. See “Secure Telnet Connection to the
controller” on page 83.
7. Ensure that you have made recent backups. See “Performing
Backups” on page 203.

194
 Routine Maintenance

Installing FRUs
Only persons who have successfully completed a Mitel Installation and
Maintenance training course for the SX-200 ICP should perform removal
and replacement procedures.

WARNING:INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED

EXPLICITLY WHEN THEY INVOLVE WORK WITH AND
CHANGES TO THE PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY OF THE UNIT.

Precautions
Observe the following precautions when working on the system,
particularly when handling PCB cards or using test equipment to measure
voltages.
• When installing or replacing PCB cards turn power off, but maintain
the ground connections to the equipment. Power must be OFF when
inserting or removing cards. These cards are identified with
appropriate warnings on their faceplates.
• Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed circuit
cards. Handle PCB cards only by the edges and avoid contact with any
exposed electrical connections. When removing a new card from its
package, touch the package to the cabinet frame first to release any
static voltage buildup, prior to removing the card and inserting it into
the equipment.
• Conductive packages (antistatic packaging) should be grounded prior
to opening them to remove the contents, and similarly grounded prior
to placing a card in the package. Place suspected faulty cards in
conductive packages to prevent further possible damage to the cards.
Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic packaging when
returned will not be covered by any warranty.

Use proper fitting Phillips screwdrivers (#1 or #2) to prevent

damaging components and fasteners.

195
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Power Down System

The following chart describes system power down procedures.
Table 30: System Power Down
Step Action Comments
1. Power Down the controller
• Disconnect the power cord from the
controller.
2. Power Down the NSU or ASU
• Disconnect the power cord from the
NSU or ASU.
3. Power Down Peripheral Cabinets
• Unlock and open door.
• Turn off Bay Power Supply switch
and remove cabinet line cord from The system is now properly
the wall outlet. powered down.

Power Up System
The following chart describes system power up procedures.
Table 31: System Power Up
Step Action Comments
1. Plug the controller power cord
into the wall outlet.
2. Plug the NSU and ASU (if
installed) line cord into the wall
outlet.
3. Plug the Peripheral Cabinet (if
installed) line cord into the wall
outlet. Turn on Bay Power
Supply switch.
Replace any covers or barriers The system is now properly powered
that were removed previously. up, and its door is closed and locked
Close and lock the door. to prevent unauthorized access to
equipment.

196
 Routine Maintenance

System Reset
The controller can be reset by:
• pressing the Reset button on the front panel
• using the RESTART_SYSTEM command from the Maintenance terminal
• powering the controller down then back up
When the system is reset, it stops all call processing activity, runs
initialization tests. It also reloads software from the external CompactFlash
card if it detects that the card was removed, and then reinserted.

CAUTION: Resetting the system drops all calls in progress. If a

reset is required, do it during periods of low or no call traffic.

System Shutdown
A System Shutdown is required before moving the controller or replacing
hardware in it. Shutdown terminates all calls (except calls between IP
phones or calls carried on IP trunks) and disables the serial and IP
interfaces.

CAUTION: The following procedure takes the system out of

service.

To shut down the system:

1. Log into the Maintenance Terminal (serial connection only) and begin
a Maintenance session.
2. Press the following softkeys:
RE_START
SHUTDOWN
ENTER
After entering the command, wait for this message to display: "System
shutdown complete." Then, unplug the power cord.
To return the system to service:
• Unplug it and plug it in again, or press the Reset button.

197
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Re-initializing the Controller

Re-initializing the controller re-installs the system software and database.
Perform a re-initialization to recover from a failed attempt to upgrade the
system software or to return an unstable system to a known state.
You can re-initialize the controller two ways:
1. Re-install the software and a new, or previously backed-up database,
from the external CompactFlash card. For instructions, see “Installing
Software Using an External CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial
Install)” on page 35
2. Use an FTP server to download the software and database to the
controller. For instructions, see “Upgrading by FTP” on page 209.

IMPORTANT: Re-initializing a working system with a database

that has different IP addressing information than the database it is
replacing will force the IP Phones to reboot. The phones take 10 to
15 minutes to return to service once the system is re-initialized.

198
 Routine Maintenance

Replacing the Hard Drive or CompactFlash

Use this procedure to replace faulty internal media. To upgrade the media
in a working system, follow the procedure on page 46, “Installing a hard
drive.”
Note: Use Mitel-provided CompactFlash cards and hard drives only;
those obtained elsewhere are not supported.

To replace the hard drive or internal CompactFlash

1. Remove the external CompactFlash card, if inserted.
2. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
3. Remove the cover.
4. If replacing the CompactFlash card, remove it, install the new one, and
then skip to step 6.
5. If replacing the hard drive,
a. Unplug the ribbon cable and the power cable from the old hard drive.
b. Remove the old hard drive by unfastening the four small border
screws. Keep the screws.

c. Replace the drive with the new one.

Note: Ensure that the jumpers on the new drive are set to the Master
setting.
d. Connect the ribbon cable and power cable to the new hard drive.

199
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

6. Replace the cover.

7. Restore power to the controller.
8. Perform an Initial (CompactFlash Card) installation from the software
CD; see page 35 for instructions.
Note: When prompted for a database, select Custom to install a backup of
the original database (if available).

Replacing the Analog Main Board

1. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
2. Remove the top cover.
3. Remove the front panel.
4. Disconnect the three power supply connectors.
5. Remove the ribbon cable by flipping up the clip on the connectors at
each end of the cable as shown in the following figure.

200
 Routine Maintenance

6. Remove the internal flash card as shown in the following figure.

7. Remove the four standoffs and two screws as shown in the following
figure.

201
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

8. Remove the two screws at the back of the unit as shown in the
following figure.

9. Remove the Analog Main Board.

10. Insert the new Analog Main Board.
11. Re-attach the two screws at the back of the unit.
12. Re-attach the two screws and the four standoffs.
13. Replace the flash card.
14. Replace the ribbon cable and snap the clips at both ends in place.
15. Replace the power supply connectors.
16. Snap the front panel back in place.
17. Replace the top cover.

Other FRUs
To replace the following, follow the installation procedure provided on the
page indicated.
• Analog Option Board, see page 39
• DSP Module, see page 41
• Dual FIM Module, see page 43
• Quad CIM Module, see page 44
• Dual T1/E1 Framer Module, see page 45
• Stratum Clock Module, see page 48

202
 Routine Maintenance

Performing Backups
Backing Up a Database
The controller has three databases, one for CDE data, one for voice mail data
(includes configuration, greetings, and user messages) and one for IP
networking settings. All databases are maintained in flash memory (or on the
hard drive, if installed) inside the controller. An FTP server is required to back
up the databases. For information on setting up an FTP server, see page 75.
Note: Database backups do NOT include log files and trap files. Mitel
Technical Support may request these files should you call for assistance; see
““Sending Logs and other System Files to an E-mail Address or FTP Server”
on page 233” for more information.

It is recommended that you back up the database:

• after the system is first installed and the database is set up
• after changes have been made to the database
• before any software upgrades.
Before starting the backup, ensure that the FTP destination directory is
writable (i.e., not read-only). Also, check that the FTP server IP address,
username, and password in Form 47 are correct.
To back up the database:
1. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or SX-200
ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session.
2. Press
SYSTEM
DATABASE
BACKUP
FTP_SERVER
FULL or MEDIUM
CONFIRM (enter a a file name)
CONFIRM
FULL backs up everything; MEDIUM excludes voice mail messages.
Full backups are recommended.

Note: Voice mail is unavailable while the backup is progress.

The system creates a backup to the specified FTP home directory.

203
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Restoring a Database
IMPORTANT: If the IP addressing information in the old and
new (restored) databases do not match, the IP Phones will
reboot. Rebooting begins 10 to 15 minutes after the system
resets (a reset is required following a database restore) and
takes approximately two to three minutes to complete.
Before restoring, check that the FTP server IP address, username, and
password in Form 47 are correct.
1. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or SX-200
ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session.
2. Press
SYSTEM
DATABASE
RESTORE
FTP_SERVER
ENTER
CONFIRM
The system prompts you for the file name.
3. Enter the file name.
4. Press CONFIRM.
After the database file is restored, the system automatically resets and
reboots.

204
 Routine Maintenance

Installing an Alternate Database

The software CD has two databases on it that you can use instead of the
factory-installed default database. One is blank except for the IP settings in
Form 47 which are the same as those in the default database; the other is
for use with Premier Business systems. Another that has four-digit extension
numbers is available on Mitel Online. You can also install databases that
were programmed on other systems and backed up to a file.
To install an alternate database either:
• Re-install the system software and the required database to a
CompactFlash card, and then use the card to re-initialize the
controller. For more information, see “Installing Software Using an
External CompactFlash Card (Optional Initial Install)” on page 35.
Or
• Download the database to the controller via an FTP server.

Notes:
1. To avoid MOSS option conflicts, install the Premier database
BEFORE enabling the MOSS options.
2. Advanced certification is required to install a Premier Business
system.

Installing an alternate database via FTP

Before beginning the installation, Check that the FTP server IP address,
username, and password in Form 47 are correct.
1. Establish a connection between the FTP server and the controller
either through the Layer 2 switch or by connecting directly to the LAN
port on the controller.
2. Copy the required .db file to the FTP server’s home directory.
3. Follow the instructions on page 204 to restore the database to the
controller.

205
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Upgrading the System Software

You can upgrade system software either from the external CompactFlash
card or by FTP, unless upgrading from a Release 1.x system. The internal
media in 1.x systems require repartitioning, which can only be done with a
CompactFlash card that has an “Initial Installation” software load.
Upgrading does not alter the currently installed database.
Release 1.x systems upgraded to Release 2.0 or later no longer require
that the external CompactFlash remain in the controller at all times.
Note: De-program phantom bays programmed on the Release 1.x
system before migrating to Release 2.0 or later.

Upgrading from Release 1.x to Release 2.0 or later

The recommended procedure for upgrading Release 1.x systems is as
follows:
1. Back up the database to an FTP server. See page 203 for instructions.
2. Unplug the power cord from the controller.
3. Remove the external CompactFlash.
4. Run the Initial [CompactFlash card] Installation from the SX-200 ICP
software CD-ROM. See page 35 for more detailed instructions.
5. Insert the CompactFlash card into the slot on the front of the controller.
IMPORTANT: Use a Mitel-supplied 256 MB CompactFlash card.
DO NOT partition the card and DO NOT copy files to it before
proceeding with the software installation.
6. Power up the controller.
7. Wait for the CompactFlash status LED to turn GREEN, and for the
phones to come up, indicating that the upgrade is complete.
8. Remove the CompactFlash card.
9. Update the IP settings to enable the database to be restored by FTP.
10. Restore the database. See page 204 for instructions.
After the database file is restored, the system automatically resets and
reboots.
11. To prevent unnecessary alarms, revise the Alarm Thresholds in
Maintenance and check the bay number assignments in Form 53.

206
 Routine Maintenance

Upgrading from the External CompactFlash Card

(Release 2.0 or later)
WARNING:THE UPGRADE PROCEDURE WILL INSTALL NEW
SOFTWARE IN THE CONTROLLER.

Installer's PC requirements
• Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP operating
system running an FTP server.
• For serial connections, a VT100 terminal emulator (HyperTerminal)
• For remote or LAN-based connections, a secure Telnet client that
supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client recommended), or a web
browser to access the SX-200 ICP Web Interface
• A serial connection to the controller Maintenance port and/or a
Network Interface Card (NIC) connected to the IP network
• A CompactFlash Card Reader/Writer
• 256M CompactFlash card (use Mitel-supplied card only).
• (Optional) System Option 109 - Remote Software Download in Form 04.

Note: Windows 2000 users must clear the browser cache.

You also need

• The IP address of the controller (default 192.168.1.2)
• The system software CD or access to the appropriate online resource.
Note: A typical upgrade requires approximately five minutes to complete
once the new software is installed and the system rebooted. Add five minutes
more if installing additional voice mail language files and another 10 minutes
if the upgrade includes a new load of software for the Analog Main Board.

To upgrade the system from the CompactFlash card

1. Remove the external CompactFlash card from the controller (if
installed).
2. Insert the CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash Reader/Writer.
IMPORTANT: Use a Mitel-supplied 256 MB CompactFlash card.
DO NOT partition the card and DO NOT copy files to it before
proceeding with the software installation.

207
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

3. Insert the system software CD-ROM into the PC or access the file online.
4. Run SX200ICP_SETUP.EXE from the CD.
5. Select Local Upgrade [Flash Card] Installation, then click Next.
6. Select languages for voice mail prompts if applicable. The default is
English and is not selectable.
7. Select the CompactFlash Reader/Writer drive.
8. Select Format to format the CompactFlash card, then click Next.

Note: When formatting the CompactFlash card, select FAT as the file system.

9. Click Finish when prompted.

10. Wait until the computer completes writing to the CompactFlash card
before ejecting it.
Notes:
• To avoid ending the writing operation before it finishes, DO NOT
click STOP prior to EJECT.
• Certain PC CompactFlash readers have problems with cards
larger than 128M. They report that copying is complete when in
fact not all the files have been copied. If in doubt, eject the card,
re-insert it, and then use Windows Explorer to confirm that all 37
files (64 if a second language for voice mail was installed) are
present.

11. Remove the CompactFlash card from the Reader/Writer and insert it
into the card slot on the front of the controller.
12. Log into the Maintenance Terminal and begin a Maintenance session.
13. Press
SYSTEM
RE_START
RESET_SYSTEM
The system boots from the CompactFlash card and installs the new
software. Installation is complete when the phones are up and the LED
next to the card slot turns green.
14. When prompted, log into the Maintenance Terminal in CDE mode and
program all the purchased options from the MOSS sheet. (This step is
not usually required for a software upgrade.)

208
 Routine Maintenance

15. Remove the CompactFlash card from the controller when the LED
adjacent to the card slot turns green.

Upgrading by FTP
Before beginning the upgrade, check that the SX-200 ICP is programmed
with the required FTP information in Form 47, Subform 01 (see “Setting up
an FTP Server on a Maintenance PC” on page 75. Also, verify that the
following additional requirements have been satisfied:
• existing database is backed up to the PC (for instructions, see
page 203)
• Remote Software Download option (System Option 109 in Form 04)
has been purchased and enabled
• external CompactFlash card is inserted in the SX-200 ICP (release 1.x
systems only)
The upgrade takes about 3-4 minutes depending on the speed of the FTP
connection. Double the time if installing additional languages for voice mail
prompts.
To upgrade the SX-200 ICP Controller software from an FTP server:
1. Run SX200ICP_SETUP.EXE from the software CD or on-line source.
2. Select Remote Upgrade (FTP) Installation, and then click Next.
3. Select languages for voice mail prompts if applicable. The default is
English and is not selectable.
4. Select the FTP server home directory, then click Next twice to begin
the installation.
5. Click Finish when prompted.
6. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or SX-200
ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session.
7. Press
SYSTEM
DATABASE
UPGRADE_SW
CONFIRM
8. When prompted, press ENTER to begin the upgrade.
9. If the upgrade failed, consult the Maintenance Logs for the cause.

209
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Upgrading the NSU or PRI Card Software

Use the IMAT application to upgrade the software for a PRI card or an
NSU. For more information about using IMAT, refer to “IMAT
Programming” on page 117.
To upgrade an NSU or PRI card to a new version of software or
re-install the software:
1. Ensure that the NSU or PRI card is running by checking its status
LEDs.
2. Connect a computer to the RS-232 serial port of the NSU or PRI card.
3. Run IMAT.
4. Click on File -> Connect to connect to the NSU or PRI card.
5. Download the software from Mitel Online or insert the software
CD-ROM in the computer's CD-ROM drive.
6. Click on Maintenance -> Software Upgrade and proceed with the
software upgrade or re-installation.
7. Click on Maintenance -> Remote Site Reset to reset the NSU or PRI
card.

210
 Routine Maintenance

Migrating an SX-200 EL/ML to an SX-200 ICP MX

Except for the parts in the table below, most of the EL/ML system,
including the customer database, is preserved in the migration to the
SX-200 ICP MX.
Table 32: Retained and Surplus Parts
Retained Parts Surplus or Unsupported Parts
main cabinet (becomes a peripheral bay) control card in main cabinet
peripheral cabinets SPINE Bays
customer database IP Nodes
peripheral interface cards and modules Control Dual and Triple FIMs/CIMs
telephones and other peripherals ISDN Gateways
COV cards/COV Vmail
SUPERSET 3 and 4 telephones
Datasets for PMS and ACD monitors

Notes:
1. This migration procedure will work only for an MX controller and
not for a CXi controller.
2. An SX-200 LIGHT system must upgrade to an SX-200 EL/ML
(LW, 19.3.2 or later) before migrating to an SX-200 ICP MX.
3. Mitel Express Messenger (MEM) data (programming, greetings
and messages) are not included in the migration. If MEM is
retained, MWI will not be lost. If you continue to use the MEM
card, the database will remain operational provided that you
enable System Option 98 (Support 3DN, 4DN and 400 series
Set Types).
4. Call logs and callback requests are lost in the migration.
5. The IP bay (i.e., the controller) is bay number 1 by default. It
becomes bay number 8 following the migration. All references
in documentation are to the default.
6. The SX-200 ICP supports a maximum of 30 IP trunks. If Option
115 (Maximum IP Trunks) in Form 04 is programmed with more
than the maximum, only the first available 30 IP trunks will function.
7. Migration causes phantom bays on the SX-200 EL/ML to become
peripheral bays on the SX-200 ICP. You must manually
re-program these bays as phantoms in Form 53.

211
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Parts Required
• SX-200 ICP Release 2.0 software or later
• Peripheral FIM Carrier (PFC) or Peripheral CIM Carrier (PCC) for the
SX-200 cabinets.
• Fiber Interface Module (FIM) or Cable Interface Module (CIM) with
appropriate connector cables for the SX-200 ICP.

Note: The SX-200 ICP supports 1KM, 5KM, and 14KM FIMs.

Preparations
Before starting the migration,
• survey the existing EL/ML hardware to determine any potential
configuration issues such as unsupported devices.
• ensure that there are enough FIMs or CIMs to connect the EL/ML
cabinets.
• if the SX-200 EL/ML has T1 or PRI trunks, install a Stratum 3 clock in
the SX-200 ICP
• compare MOSS sheets for both systems to ensure that sufficient bays
have been purchased (System Option 133 - TDM Bays). Option 102
(Feature Level) of the SX-200 ICP MOSS sheet must be set to 6.
Option 98 (Support 3DN, 4DN and 400 series Set Types) must be
enabled if 400 series telephone sets or some 3rd-party DNIC voice
mail systems are being used.

Migration Procedure
A typical migration requires approximately one hour to complete.
To migrate an SX-200 EL/ML to an SX-200 ICP MX:
1. Back up the database on the SX-200 EL/ML using Kermit.
2. Print CDE Forms 1 and 47 from the EL/ML for reference during
programming.

CAUTION: The following step takes the system out of service.

3. Power down the SX-200 EL/ML control cabinet and peripheral

cabinets.

212
 Routine Maintenance

4. Install the SX-200 ICP MX and optional modules (Stratum 3 clock,

Quad CIM, Dual FIM, Dual T1/E1 Framer, etc.).
5. Power up the SX-200 ICP MX.
6. Restore the SX-200 EL/ML database to the SX-200 ICP using Kermit
over the serial port.
After the database file is restored, the system automatically resets.
7. Phantom bays on the SX-200 EL/ML become peripheral bays on the
SX-200 ICP. Re-program these bays as phantoms in Form 53.
8. SPINE Bays or IP Nodes are no longer supported and will be
converted to phantom bays. In CDE, reprogram any SPINE or IP Node
bays as follows:
- In Form 53, add new bay numbers for each SPINE or IP Node.
- In Form 09, move each set on the SPINE bay to a PER Node and
each set on the IP Node to the IP Bay.
- Delete all SPINE Bay and IP Node device assignments in Form 18,
Miscellaneous System Ports.
- Delete each trunk on the SPINE Bay and IP Node and reprogram
on the PER Node Bay and IP Bay respectively.
- Remove ARS programming for IP Nodes in Forms 26 (including
subform), 22, and 23.
- In Form 48, modify all IP Node programming.
9. In Form 53, assign the PER Bays to CIM or FIM ports.
10. In Form 04, enter the Mitel Options Code (MOC) and Mitel Options
Password (Option 100). Set all other options as required.
11. Reset the system (if prompted).
12. In Form 47, enter the IP networking information recorded in step 2.
Note: Voice Compression in Form 47 for the IP Node is a System
Option in Form 04 (Option 120, Number of Compression Resources)
in the SX-200 ICP.
13. (Optional) Program the embedded voice mail system with Mitel
Express Messenger information (if installed in the EL/ML) or, if the
MEM card is still being used, enable System Option 98 (Support 3DN
and 4DN Set Types).

213
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

14. Disconnect the fiber cables from the EL/ML control cabinet. Label the
Tx and Rx cables, identify the Bay that the cables connect to, and label
the front of the SX-200 ICP MX controller to ensure that connections
are made to the proper bays.
15. Remove the main control card from the EL/ML control cabinet.
16. Install the required peripheral CIM or FIM cards into the EL/ML
cabinet(s).
17. Remove all CIM and FIM triple modules from the SX-200 EL/ML
control cabinet.
18. Connect all bays to CIMs or FIMs.
19. Power up the EL/ML cabinet(s).
Note: A system with a BCC III may take as long as 20 minutes to
come up following the upgrade. Subsequent reboots will not incur
this delay.
20. Verify that the migration succeeded by placing calls to and from sets
connected to the Peripheral Cabinet(s). Test the voice mail system by
leaving, retrieving, and deleting messages. Verify that features
function properly, especially call forwarding.
21. Back up the SX-200 ICP database using FTP. (See page 203.)
22. To prevent unnecessary alarms:
• In Maintenance, revise the Alarm Thresholds.
• In Form 53, check the bay number assignments. If a bay is
assigned a bay number, it must be connected to a physical device;
otherwise, it will generate an alarm. To prevent this problem, move
disconnected bays from physical connections (CIMs and MMCs) to
phantom bays.

214
 Routine Maintenance

Replacing IP Phones
To replace a registered IP phone, you can
• Replace it and retain all existing programming for that circuit, or
• Replace it and re-program the circuit.
Note: 5215 and 5010 IP phones will fail to register on a system that
has a Default or Premier database because of the line appearances
programmed on keys 8 and 10—keys that exist on the 5207 but not
on the 5215 or the 5010. To register these phones, first delete the
line appearances in Form 09, or follow the phone replacement
procedure on the next page to delete all key programming.

To replace a registered IP phone and retain all programming

for that circuit:
• From the phone
- Dial the IP Set Replacement PIN (default ###) followed by the
extension number of the phone.
• From the CDE terminal
- Access Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments.
- Select the circuit belonging to the IP phone that is to be replaced.
- Press Show CESID.
- Press Show MAC.
- Delete the existing MAC address.
- Disconnect the phone from the LAN and connect the new phone in
its place.
- Register the new phone by entering its MAC address in Form 09.
Or
Go to the phone and dial the IP Set Registration PIN (default ***)
followed by the phone’s extension number.

215
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

To replace a registered IP phone and re-program the circuit:

1. Access Form 09, Desktop Device Assignments.
2. Delete the extension number of the IP phone that you want to replace.

WARNING:IF YOU DELETE THE EXTENSION NUMBER OF A

PHONE, ALL PROGRAMMED DATA FOR THAT CIRCUIT IS
DELETED.

3. Assign a new extension number or reuse the old one.

4. Program the features for the IP phone.
5. Register the new phone by entering its MAC address in Form 09.
Or
Go to the phone and dial the IP Set Registration PIN (default ***)
followed by the phone’s extension number.

Restarting IP Phones
Restarting the IP Phones causes them to renegotiate their DHCP settings.

IMPORTANT: Because it takes two or three minutes for the

phones to return to service, limit restarts to after hours.

To initiate a restart:
1. Log in to the Maintenance Terminal (direct, secure Telnet, or SX-200
ICP Web Interface) and begin a Maintenance session.
2. Press the following softkeys:
RE_START
IP_PHONES
ENTER

Upgrading Set Firmware

Upgrade the firmware for SUPERSET™ 4025, SUPERSET 4090,
SUPERSET 4125, and SUPERSET 4150 telephones, only if the revision
on the system is higher than the set revision. The boot code and the
firmware revision levels must be checked.

216
 Routine Maintenance

Boot Codes
The SUPERSET boot code must be at revision Boot 3.10 or greater or the
SX-200 system cannot successfully upgrade the set’s firmware.
The boot code appears when a set is first plugged in.
If you attempt to upgrade a set with a boot code lower than 3.10, the
system will erase the set’s firmware and you will not be able to download
the new firmware. The set then becomes unusable.

Firmware Revision Levels

The firmware revision level of the set that you are upgrading must meet the
firmware revision level stated in SYSTEM maintenance. Use the
SET_FIRMWARE STATUS maintenance command to identify the revision
level.

Firmware Commands
Access the firmware commands in the SYSTEM maintenance level and
then choose SET_FIRMWARE to obtain the softkeys to qualify your target
set. See the table below.
.

Table 33: Firmware Commands

Set_Firmware Qualifiers Result
STATUS Displays the software revision level the set is
running and whether the set is scheduled for a
download.
DOWNLOAD Erases and updates the firmware on all specified
sets. The set must be idle and the set’s firmware
revision must be older than the firmware to be
downloaded.
ABORT_DOWNLOAD Removes specified sets from the scheduled
download.
FORCE_DOWNLOAD Forces the download to occur even if the set
firmware is newer than the firmware being
downloaded. This command allows a set’s
firmware to be returned to a previous firmware
version when required.

217
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Measuring LS Trunks
The LS Measurement tool in Maintenance is used to test LS trunks before
putting them into service. The test results determine the settings to
program for optimum audio quality.
Table 34: LS Measurement Tool Tests
Test Purpose
Line Quality Measures the loss level and impulse response of the
trunk and recommends Length and Impedance
settings to program in Form 13 (Audio Configuration
Table subform). If Length and Impedance are set to
AUTO in Form 13, the recommended settings are
programmed automatically when the test is run.

The test results are posted to the maintenance logs,

and e-mailed to the address specified in Form 52
(Email).

Line Length Settings: Short, Long, and Extra Long.

The Extra Long setting is only valid with AMB/AOB

LS trunks. It provides additional gain for signals
transmitted from the CO to the ICP but not for signals
transmitted from the ICP to the CO.

Impedance Settings: 600 Ohm, Complex, DSL, and

Impedance A, B, C, and D.

Impedance A can be used to match the controller to

LS lines that have loading coils. Impedance B, C, and
D are the same as 600 Ohm.
Distortion Measures distortion on the line using an external silence
(balance) termination number. Run this test only when
instructed to do so by Mitel Product Support.
Echo Measures the echo characteristics of the line using an
external silence (balance) termination number. Run this test
only when instructed to do so by Mitel Product Support.

218
 Routine Maintenance

Notes:
1. Run the test in VT100 mode, not TTY (line interface) mode.
2. The test can be run for a single trunk, or for all trunks (three
minimum).
3. The test can be immediately, or scheduled for a later time.
4. Approximate test times:
- Line Quality: 2 min / trunk
- Distortion: 40 min / trunk
- Echo: 5 min / trunk

Running the Line Quality Test

To run the Line Quality test:
1. Form 13 (Trunk Circuit Descriptors)
- Enter the milliwatt tone and silence (balance) termination numbers
provided by the CO.
Note: If the milliwatt tone number is unknown, program a second trunk
to provide milliwatt tone in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table
subform). If the silence termination number is unknown, take no
action; the termination will be generated automatically.

2. Switch to Maintenance mode.

3. Press
DIAGNOSTICS
LS_MEASURE
select LINE_QUALITY (for one trunk) or BATCH_QUAL (for all trunks)
Respond to the prompts to run the test.
If the test is successful, the results are sent to the logs and emailed to
the address specified in Form 52 (Email).
4. Switch to CDE mode.
5. Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform)
- Use the recommended settings from the logs to program Length
and Impedance for the trunk(s).

Note: If Length and Impedance are set to AUTO, the settings will be
programmed automatically when the test is run. Refer to the logs to
determine the actual settings for AUTO.

219
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Running the Distortion Test

Note: This test requires an external silence (balance) termination
number programmed in Subform 13, Circuit Descriptor Options.

To run the Distortion test:

1. Run the Line Quality test and program Length and Impedance for the
trunk in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform)
2. Log into the Maintenance Terminal and begin a Maintenance session.
3. Press
DIAGNOSTICS
LS_MEASURE
select DISTORTION (for one trunk) or BATCH_DIST (for all trunks)
Respond to the prompts to run the test.
The results are sent to the logs and emailed to the address specified
in Form 52 (Email).
4. Forward the test results to Mitel Product Support.

Running the Echo Test

Note: This test requires an external silence (balance) termination
number programmed in Subform 13, Circuit Descriptor Options.

To run the Echo test:

1. Run the Line Quality test and program Length and Impedance for the
trunk in Form 13 (Audio Configuration Table subform)
2. Log into the Maintenance Terminal and begin a Maintenance session.
3. Press
DIAGNOSTICS
LS_MEASURE
select ECHO_TEST (for one trunk) or BATCH_ECHO (for all trunks)
Respond to the prompts to run the test.
The results are sent to the logs and emailed to the address specified
in Form 52 (Email).
4. Forward the test results to Mitel Product Support.

220
 Routine Maintenance

Maintenance Commands

Maintenance Port Characteristics

8 bits/1 start/1 stop/no parity.
Baud rates: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 (default).
Maintenance commands do not require the ESC sequence used with CDE
commands.

Telnet Requirements
• For remote access over a TCP/IP network such as the Internet or the
LAN, both the SX-200 ICP controller and the PC must be connected
to the network. Remote connections require a secure Telnet client that
supports SSL/TLS (Mitel Telnet client version 1.0.0.1 or later
recommended), or a web browser (Internet Explorer 6 or Mozilla
Firefox) to access the SX-200 ICP Web Interface.
• Host name or IP address of SX-200 ICP controller.
Connect to the controller through TCP port number 2000.

Entering Command Sequences

Maintenance commands are entered by selecting a softkey from a menu,
and then selecting another softkey from the subsequent menu.
Start all maintenance sequences from the Maintenance screen.
Press the DELETE key to delete the most recently entered softkey or
device number.
At the end of a command sequence, press ENTER.
Press the CANCEL softkey at any time to exit the current operation without
committing (saving) any changes, or press the ENTER softkey, when it is
available, to commit changes or initiate an activity.
For example, to show time:
1. Select SYSTEM from the Maintenance screen.
2. Select SHOW from the System screen.
3. Select TIME from the Show screen.
4. Select ENTER from the Show screen or Press ENTER at the keyboard.

221
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Logging In
Serial Connection:
1. Launch the terminal or terminal emulator.
2. Press RETURN four times within 1 second, and then follow the prompts.
3. Select a Terminal Type.
4. Select 1 - MAINTENANCE.
5. Enter your username and password.

Secure Telnet Connection:

1. Launch the secure Telnet client.
2. Enter the hostname or IP address of the controller, and port 2000—for
example, to open a connection from a Mitel Telnet client, enter: op
192.168.2.25 2000
3. Log in to SSL/TLS with login name ‘installer’ and default password
‘1000.’
4. Select a Terminal Type.
5. Select 1 - MAINTENANCE.
6. Log in to the application with your username and password.

SX-200 ICP Web Interface Connection:

1. Launch the web browser.
2. Enter https://<controller IP or hostname>:443
For example, https://10.33.63.118:443
3. Log in to the SX-200 ICP Web Interface with login name ‘installer’ and
default password ‘1000.’
4. Select a Terminal Type.
5. Select 1 - MAINTENANCE.
6. Log in to the application with your username and password.

Logging Out
1. Press QUIT (softkey 6).
2. Press key 6 (or wait for logout timer to time out).

222
 Routine Maintenance

Switching between Maintenance and CDE

You can switch between the Maintenance and CDE applications without
having to exit and log in again.
From the top level CDE Form, press TO MTCE (requires correct access
level)
From the top level Maintenance screen, press TO CDE.

Displaying the Card Configuration

From CDE mode:
- View Form 01, System Configuration
From Maintenance mode:
- Press:
REPORTS
SHOW
CONFIG
ALL

Showing the System Identity

From Maintenance mode:
- Press:
SYSTEM
SHOW
IDENTITY
ENTER

System Commands

Table 35: System Level Functions

COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER

1-SET 1-DATE [dd/mm/yy]

2-TIME [hh:mm]

3-PASSWORD 1-ATTENDANT

2-SUPERVISOR

(Page 1 of 4)

223
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 35: System Level Functions (continued)

COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER

3-MAINT2

4-MAINT1

7-INSTALLER

4-SPEED 1-MAINT-PORT [speed]

8-PRINTER_PORT [speed]

8-RESET_TIME 1-AFTER_N_FLTS

2-DAY/TIME 1-MONDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm]

2-TUESDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm]

3-WEDNESDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm]

4-THURSDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm]

6-FRIDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm]

7-SATURDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm]

8-SUNDAY 1-TIME [hh:mm]

9-DAILY 1-TIME [hh:mm]

3-IMMEDIATELY

9-ALARM_THRESH 1-LINES 1-SYSTEM 8-CONFIRM

2-BAY (enter Bay #) 8-CONFIRM

2-TRUNKS 1-SYSTEM 8-CONFIRM

2-BAY (enter Bay #) 8-CONFIRM

3-RECEIVERS 1-SYSTEM 8-CONFIRM

2-BAY (enter Bay #) 8-CONFIRM

2-SHOW 1-DATE

2-TIME

4-DEVICE 1-MAINT-PORT

4-DATASTN_PLID 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

3-EXT-NUM

8-PRINTER_PORT

7-LN_APP_COUNT

8-RESET-TIME

9-IDENTITY

3-DATABASE 1-BACKUP 1-KERMIT

(Page 2 of 4)

224
 Routine Maintenance

Table 35: System Level Functions (continued)

COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER

3-FTP_SERVER

2-RESTORE 1-KERMIT

3-FTP_SERVER

4-SHOW_PARAM

6-TRAP_BACKUP*

7-UPGRADE_SW

8-LOGS_BACKUP

9-SET_PARAM 1-DEFAULT

2-RETRIES

3-BLOCK_CHECK

4-RECEIVE 1-EOL_CHAR

2-8_BIT_CHAR

3-CTRL_CHAR

4-REPEAT_CHAR

6-PAD_CHAR

7-PACKET_SIZE

8-RX_TIMEOUT

9-NUM_PAD_CHAR

6-START CHAR

7-SEND DELAY

4-MONITOR 1-SMDR

2-DATA_SMDR

7-LOGS 1-MAINT_PORT

2-SYS_PRINTERS

5-SUSPEND_PRTR 7-PRINTER_PLID 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT/SCT

3-EXT-NUM

8-PRINTER_PORT

6-QUIT

7-RESUME_PRTR 7-PRINTER_PLID 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT/SCT

3-EXT-NUM

8-PRINTER_PORT

(Page 3 of 4)

225
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 35: System Level Functions (continued)

COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER

8-RE-START 2-RESET_SYSTEM

3-IP_PHONES

9-STOP 7-LOGS

0 MORE_ KEYS 1-SET_FIRMWARE 1-STATUS 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

2-SET_TYPE 1-SS4150

2-SS4025

3-EXT_NUM

4-ALL

2-DOWNLOAD 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

2-SET_TYPE 1-SS4150

2-SS4025

3-SS4090

3-EXT_NUM

4-ALL

3 ABORT_DOWNLOAD 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

2-SET_TYPE 1-SS4150

2-SS4025

3-SS4090

3-EXT_NUM

4-ALL

4-FORCE_DOWNLOAD 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

2-SET_TYPE 1-SS4150

2-SS4025

3-SS4090

3-EXT_NUM

4-ALL

2-UPGRADE_BOOT

3-PING

(Page 4 of 4)

226
 Routine Maintenance

Report Commands

Table 36: Report Level Functions

COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER

2-SHOW 1-CONFIG 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

3-EXT-NUM [number]

4-ALL

2-ALARMS 2-DEVICE TYPE 1-LINES

2-TRUNKS

3-RECEIVERS

4-BAY

4-ALL 0-MORE

3-STATUS 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT DEVICE STATUS See Note

2-SWID 1-SW_STATION See Note

2-SW_RECEIVER See Note

3-SW_CONSOLE See Note

4-SW_LINE See Note

6-SW_DTMF_GEN See Note

7-SW_SET See Note

9-SW_DATA_STN See Note

0-MORE_KEYS 1-SW_CO_TRUNK

2-SW_DID_TRUNK

3-SW_TIE_TRUNK

4-SW_DISA_TRUNK

6-SW_CAP

7-SW_TRUNK_GRP

8-SW_HUNT_GRP

0-MORE_KEYS

3-EXT-NUM [number]

4-ALL 1-CP_DWA

2-CP_DWA_MEM

3-LINK STATUS

6-MT_DWA

(Page 1 of 2)

227
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 36: Report Level Functions (continued)

COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER

7-MT_DWA_MEM

8-UP_1_PAGE

9-DOWN_1_PAGE

8-VOICEMAIL

9-IP_TRUNKS

6-CHANNEL-MAP 1-LOGICAL 1-CHANNEL NUM

2-PHYSICAL 1-BAY_NUM

2-LINK_NUMBER

7-ERRORS 2-DEVICE_TYPE 3-DIGITAL_SETS

4-HDLC

6-DATASETS

7-CONSOLE

9-T1_TRUNK

3-CLEAR 7-ERRORS 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

2-DEVICE_TYPE 3-DIGITAL_SETS

4-HDLC

6-DATASETS

7-CONSOLE

9-T1_TRUNK

3-EXT-NUM

4-ALL 8-CONFIRM

6-QUIT

(Page 2 of 2)

Note: The following softkeys are presented when a SWID selection is

made: 1-CP_DWA, 2-CP_DWA_MEM, 3-LINK_STATUS, 6-MT_DWA,
7-MT_DWA_MEM, 8-UP_1_PAGE, 9-DOWN_1_PAGE. Press CP_DWA
to view the device work area for the selected device.

228
 Routine Maintenance

Traffic Measurement Commands

Table 37: Traffic Measurement Level Functions
COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER

1-SET 1-UNITS 1-CSS

2-ERLANGS

2- PERIOD 2-OFF

3-DURATION

4-AUTOPRINT 1-ON

2-OFF

7-START_TIME

8-CONDENSED 1-ON
2-OFF

2-SHOW 3-STATUS

3-PRINT

4-READ

5-IP_MEAS 1-SET 1-SAMPLE

2-PERIOD
3-DURATION

4-MAX_DELAY

2-SHOW 3-STATUS

3-PRINT

4-READ

5-TRAFFIC_MEA

7-START

8-TO_SERVER

9-STOP
9-STOP 1-TRAFFIC_RPT

3-PRINT

229
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Log Commands
Table 38: Log Level Functions
COMMAND PARAMETER QUALIFIER

1-SET 4-AUTOPRINT 1-ON

2-OFF

2-READ 1-NEWEST [number]

2-OLDEST [number]

4-ALL

8-LOGS_TEXT*

9-TRACE_INFO*

3-PRINT 1-NEWEST [number]

2-OLDEST [number]

4-ALL

8-LOGS_TEXT*

4-DELETE 1-NEWEST [number]

2-OLDEST [number]

4-ALL
9-TRACE_INFO*

6-GET_SYS_LOGS

7-TO_EMAIL
8-STOP

9-TO SERVER

* LOGS_TEXT and TRACE_INFO are diagnostic tools that only MITEL

personnel should use.

230
 Routine Maintenance

Diagnostic Function Commands

Table 39: Diagnostic Function Commands
COMMAND PARAMETER PARAMETER QUALIFIER
1-RANGE_B_OUT BAY/SLOT/CCT/SUBCCT

2-CLR_FEATURE 1-FORWARD 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

3-EXT_NUM

2-DO_N_DISTURB 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

3-EXT_NUM

3-CALL_BACK 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

3-EXT_NUM

4-ALL 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

3-EXT_NUM

3-BUSY_OUT 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

3-EXT-NUM

4-LS_MEASURE 1-LOSS_LEVEL BAY/SLOT/CCT mW tone number

2-IMPULSE_RESP BAY/SLOT/CCT Silence test number

3-DISTORTION BAY/SLOT/CCT

4-ECHO_TEST BAY/SLOT/CCT

5-RANGE_RTS BAY/SLOT/CCT/SUBCCT

8-RET-TO-SVC 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

3-EXT-NUM

DISC_TRUNK 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT

231
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Backing up Log and Trap Files using Kermit

The Log file and Trap file are used for troubleshooting. Mitel Technical
Support may request backups of these files should you call for assistance.
You can use Kermit to back up the files one at a time. Or, you can
download them along with other system files using Kermit (see page
page 234). You can also send them to an FTP server or e-mail address
(see page 233).
Your communication package must support the Kermit protocol to perform
a backup. HyperTerminal can be used for serial connections; a secure
Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS and Kermit can be used for remote
connections.
To back up log and trap files separately using Kermit:
1. Establish a connection (serial or secure Telnet) to the Maintenance
Terminal and begin a Maintenance session.
2. Press,
SYSTEM
DATABASE
TRAP_BACKUP or LOGS_BACKUP
ENTER
(Enter a file name — e.g., C:\Trap_Oct08.txt)
CONFIRM
ENTER
The system then prompts you to exit to a local Kermit session. Ensure
that the Kermit session is set to text mode, because the maintenance
log entries must be copied into a text file.

232
 Routine Maintenance

Sending Logs and other System Files to an

E-mail Address or FTP Server
To send logs and other system files to an e-mail address, program the
SMTP server IP address in Form 49, the recipient’s e-mail address in Form
52, and the system hostname in Form 47, Subform 01. (The system
hostname must be a valid domain host name registered in your DNS, or
listed in your SMTP e-mail server's Hosts file.)
To send logs to an FTP server, program the FTP server IP Address,
Username, and Password in Form 47, Subform 01.
Also, System Option 126, Email Messaging must be enabled in Form 04,
and System Option 81 should be set to the time zone that the SX-200 ICP
is in.
Logs e-mailed or uploaded an to an FTP server are compressed in a .tar
file. The estimated size of compressed file is no more than 1MB. Use
WinZip® or other compression utility to open the file.
To e-mail logs:
- Press:
LOGS
TO_EMAIL
ENTER
CONFIRM
To send logs to an FTP server:
- LOGS
TO_SERVER
ENTER
CONFIRM

233
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Retrieving Logs and other System Files

using Kermit
Use this procedure to retrieve the logs and system files via a direct or
modem connection to the Maintenance port.
The files are compressed in a .tar.gz file. Use WinZip® or other
compression utility to open the file.
Your communication package must support the Kermit protocol to retrieve
logs and system files. HyperTerminal can be used for serial connections;
a secure Telnet client that supports SSL/TLS and Kermit can be used for
remote connections.
To download logs and other system files using Kermit:
1. Establish a connection (serial or secure Telnet) to the Maintenance
Terminal and begin a Maintenance session.
2. Press,
LOGS
GET_SYS_LOGS
ENTER
(Enter a file name—e.g., C:\Sys_Logs_Oct08.tar.gz)
CONFIRM
ENTER
The .tar.gz extension is mandatory.
The system then prompts you to exit to a local Kermit session.

Maintenance Tips
• Keep regular backups.
• Ensure that you record your SysID module number and your MOSS
number.
• Record all passwords.

234
 Chapter 6
Basic Troubleshooting
and Repair
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

236
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

About this Chapter

This chapter provides standard procedures for troubleshooting the most
common problems in a voice-only SX-200 ICP.
More advanced procedures, including ones for troubleshooting
SX-200 ICP systems installed in a converged voice and data network, are
provided in the next chapter.
Go through this chapter before calling Mitel Technical Support.
Note: The maintenance and troubleshooting of your LAN/WAN network
maintenance is the responsibility of your network provider. Mitel Product
Support can help you isolate minor network problems; for more complex
network problems, Mitel Product Support will escalate to Professional
Services to assist you (this is a billable service).

IMPORTANT: Please see “Contacting Mitel” on page 6 before

contacting Mitel Technical Support.

237
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Troubleshooting Tools
The table below lists the tools available to help you troubleshoot a SX-200
ICP system.
Table 40: Troubleshooting Tools
Level Tool Name Location Function Applies to

Basic Logs SX-200 ICP Provides a history of SX-200 ICP

Maintenance the software logs. software.

Basic IMAT Maintenance or Allows you to load a PRI/QSIG

IMAT PC. databases on the NSU NSUs.
PRI.

Basic LEDs Front of each To provide overall SX-200 ICP

unit. status of unit. hardware.

Basic NSU Shell NSU Lists NSU error All NSUs.

Maintenance messages.
Port.

Basic FTP server Mitel On Line Database Backups SX-200 ICP

database

Basic and Phone IP Phones with Allows you to: IP Phone with
Advanced Debug display. display.
Option • Monitor the phone
settings
• Program a static IP
address (see page
287).
• Hard code
connection speed
and duplex mode
(reboot while
pressing 9). Auto-
negotiation is
preferred.

Advanced Network 3rd Party Monitor, Characterize, IP Phones, IP

Analyser Debug, and analyze Trunking,
the network for: Data on
Customer
• lost packets Network.
• runts

238
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Before you Contact Technical Support

If you cannot find the source of the problem in this chapter, please collect
the required information listed in the applicable section(s) before calling
Mitel Technical Support (see “Technical Support - Mitel Dealers” on
page 7 for the number to call).
You will also need the additional information below before calling
Technical Support:
ˆ Serial number(s) of your equipment and software.
ˆ Nature of the problem.
ˆ What you were doing when the problem occurred.
ˆ Troubleshooting steps taken.
ˆ Troubleshooting results.
ˆ Your network diagram.
ˆ DHCP server configuration and settings.
ˆ Layer 2 switch configuration and settings.
ˆ Whether the problem is between IP and IP, IP and remote IP, remote
IP and TDM, etc.
ˆ SX-200 ICP log and trap files
ˆ Alarm log details.
ˆ NSU Maintenance log details (if applicable).
IMPORTANT: For voice-only SX-200 ICP systems supported
by technicians with Basic certification, Mitel Technical
Support is entitled to ask that devices other than Mitel
telephones be disconnected from the Layer 2 switch to allow
network characterization.

239
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

General Troubleshooting Steps

1. Verify the status of the LEDs (Power, 10/100 Base TX Auto-MDIX,
CIM Expansion Ports, etc.) See “Checking the System LEDs” on
page 241.
2. From the Maintenance Terminal, review the Alarm details. Identify and
fix each alarm.
3. For IP Phone and physical network connectivity problems:
- Verify that the device has power.
- Verify the status of the port link integrity LEDs at each end of the cable.
- Verify that each device transmits a link integrity pulse (LINK LED on).
- Verify that proper cabling is installed between the end devices.
- Verify that a crossover cable was not used to connect the IP Phone
to the Layer 2 Switch instead of a straight-though cable.
If the IP phone still fails, try plugging it into the port of a working IP
Phone (isolates problem directly to phone or programming if phone
fails to boot) or directly into the SX-200 ICP (do this after hours since
all other phones will be out of service.)

Using the Phone Debug Option

To use the debug function on IP Phones that have displays:
1. Press both volume keys, and then release the Volume Down key.
2. While still pressing the Volume Up key, enter cfg (234) on the
telephone key pad.
3. View detail for the following categories:
- Network Parameters (View Current Values, View DHCP Values,
View Static Values, Modify Static Values)
- Hardware Configuration (View Current Port Setting, Modify Port
Setting, Analog Line Config)
- Phone Mode (Protocol, Config Teleworker)
- Tools and Features (Erase PIN, Edit 802.1x Settings, Edit LLDP
Settings, PING Test, DHCP Trace, Video Configuration, Port
Options, Diagnostics, Restore Defaults)
- Version info (Main Load, Boot Load, L2Boot Load)
4. Press Superkey to exit the debug menu.

240
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Checking the System LEDs

Controller LEDs

Figure 21: SX-200 ICP LEDs

Table 41: Controller Status LEDs

LED
LED Meaning (All LEDs)
Status
Power ON Unit plugged in and operating normally.
OFF Unit not plugged in OR unit is faulty.
Hard Drive ON or Reading/writing data to/from the flash card (internal
Flashing or external) or to hard disk.
OFF No power OR no flash card or hard disk activity.
FIM Top LED indicates the status of local FIM.
Bottom LED indicates the status of remote FIM.
ON In frame synchronization
Flashing Out of synchronization OR
Tx and Rx cables reversed.
OFF Power off OR held in reset.
(Page 1 of 2)

241
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 41: Controller Status LEDs (continued)

LED
LED Meaning (All LEDs)
Status
CIM ON Communication link established and configured.
Flashing Link established but not configured.
OFF No power.
Flash Card Orange Flash card in use, do not remove.
Orange Flash card has not been properly formatted and the
(blinking) platform is having difficulty accessing it.
Green Safe to remove Flash card.
OFF No Flash card detected.
Alarm LED - ON There are problems affecting the system in a small
Minor proportion.
OFF No problem; system is functioning properly.
Alarm LED - ON There are problems causing a serious degradation
Major of service.
OFF No problem; system is functioning properly.
Alarm LED - ON There has been a very serious loss of call
Critical processing capability; an automatic system fail
transfer (SFT) is invoked and the system is reset.
OFF No problem; system is functioning properly.
(Page 2 of 2)

Table 42: Ethernet Port (LAN/WAN) Status LEDs

LED Normal On Reset
ACT/COL GREEN: Activity RED
RED: Collision
LINK GREEN: Link GREEN
FDX GREEN: Full Duplex GREEN
100M GREEN: 100Mbs GREEN

242
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

NSU LEDs

Figure 22: NSU LEDs

Table 43: NSU Ethernet Port (LAN) Status LEDs

LED Status Color Meaning
LAN Flashing — LAN activity.
MS ON Green Message link open to the system.
(Message
Status) OFF — Message link not open to the system.
OR
With L0/L1 LEDs marching:
downloading.
ST (Status) ON — Card is booting. OR
Card is not operating.
Flashing — Operational (flashes in 0.5 seconds
intervals).
OFF — Not operational.

243
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 44: NSU L0/L1 Status LEDs

LEDs
Meaning
Left Right
— ON (Red) No Layer 1.
ON (Green) — D-channel established (PRI). OR
Layer 1 established (T1).
Flashing ON Alarm indication from far end.
(Green) (Yellow)
OFF ON Blue alarm from card (this is normal during link
(Yellow) startup; PRI NA or response to yellow).
Flashing — Layer 1 established (PRI).
(Green)
Flashing ON Alarm indication from far end.
(Green) (Yellow)
Flashing (alternating Downloading (15-20 minutes).
yellow and green)
Flashing (alternating Decompressing and copying files (2-4 minutes).
yellow)
— OFF No error.
OFF — No Link.

Table 45: NSU FIM Status LEDs

Meaning for Local, Upper
Top LED Status
and Remote, Lower FIM
ON In frame synchronization.
Flashing Out of synchronization. OR
Tx and Rx cables reversed.
OFF Power off. OR
Held in reset.

244
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Table 46: NSU CIM Status LEDs

Top LED Status Meaning (All LEDs)
ON Communication link synchronized with controller.
Flashing BSP running.
When top and bottom LEDs are alternating, NSU is
powering up. Do NOT interrupt.
OFF No power.

ASU LEDs

LED
LED Meaning (All LEDs)
Status
CIM ON Communication link established and configured.
Flashing Link established but not configured.
OFF No power.
ONS Circuits ON Circuit is in use.
Flashing Circuit is not available (undergoing maintenance).
(slow)
Flashing A fault has occurred with the circuit.
(fast)
OFF Circuit is idle.

245
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Troubleshooting Phones and Peripherals

Problems
If you cannot solve the problem using the following table, go through the
steps on page 240. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical
Support.

Table 47: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting

Symptoms Probable Causes Corrective Action
All IP PHones are not Controller not fully Wait for the controller to fully
receiving power initialized initialize. The Power LED should
be solid green.

IP Phone won’t boot. Phone cannot Check for the following:

Display stuck at DHCP connect with the • Recycle the power to reboot the
Discovery or IP address (i.e., DHCP server phone.
fails to advance to "Enter
• Verify that a crossover cable
PIN")
was not used to connect the IP
Phone to the controller instead
of a straight-though cable.
• Try another phone.
• If it still fails, plug the phone
directly into the Ethernet port on
the SX-200 ICP.
• If it still fails call Mitel Technical
Support.
IP Phone Licences Purchase more licences
exceeded

Failed to reset Reset the controller

controller following
installation of new
system software.

Can’t make calls externally COR restricted or Identify the numbers dialed by the
(display phone may show call ARS incorrectly user, then check the route used in
barred). programmed. ARS.
Remove the COR number from
COR group table in COR
assignment used in the route. OR
Change the COR group number in
the route assignment form. OR
Modify ARS programming to allow
call.

(Page 1 of 3)

246
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Table 47: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued)

Symptoms Probable Causes Corrective Action

Cannot make call over System is sending Insert a one or two second delay in
analog loop trunk the dialing digits too ARS: Modified Digit Table (Form
(intermittent problem). fast for Telco’s 22) for the route used by analog
receiver on the loop trunk.
LOOP trunk.

No dial tone on set. Set is not In CDE, program the extension

programmed. accordingly.

Wrong wiring. Check the wiring between the

phone jack and the Peripheral
Cabinet, MDF, etc.

Faulty handset wire. Replace the handset cord.

Replace the handset.
Replace the set.

Circuit is manbusy. Use the Maintenance

DIAGNOSTICS > RET-TO-SVC
command

Circuit is locked out. Verify the wiring between the

phone and the patch panel.

If NONE of the sets are Problem with Check for the following:
responding. controller. - No alarms
- The program reboot is scheduled
- There are no error logs
- The database is backed up

Sets cannot receive DID Non-DID is enabled Disable non-DID in the set’s COS.
calls. in Station Service Check for NMX fields in Form 15
Assignment form. for Valid entries.

Sets take 10-12 seconds to ANI/DNIS number Disable the ANI/DNIS number
receive incoming calls. delivery trunk option delivery in the trunk’s COS.
is enabled in T1 Tip: You can assigned an unused
trunk’s COS. COS to verify if this is the problem.

Dialing digit conflict. Check the following forms for any

potential dialing conflict:
- Desktop Device Assignments
- Miscellaneous System Portst
- Feature Access Code
- ACD Agent Groups

IP to IP calls OK, but not IP to Problem with Call Mitel Technical Support
TDM calls (rings once, then controller.
call drops).

(Page 2 of 3)

247
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 47: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued)

Symptoms Probable Causes Corrective Action

Phone service is lost (IP A database from Enable the correct options to
Phones display SYSTEM another system with restore phone service and clear
BUSY when they go offhook), different MOSS the MOSS alarm. See “Enabling
and a MOSS alarm appears options has been MOSS Options” on page 86..
in the CDE forms header. installed in the
controller.

DNIC set displays WAITING The set is having Check the wiring. If the problem
FOR SYNC or WAITING trouble communicat- persists, replace the set. If the
FOR COMM at 20 second ing with the Periph- problem affects multiple sets on
intervals. eral Bay MCC. the same card, replace the card. If
the problem affects sets on
The likely cause is different cards, and other causes
one of the following: can be ruled out, then replace the
• Defective Digital bay control card.
Line Card.
• Defective bay
controller card.
• Defective set.
• Loose or
improperly
installed wiring.

(Page 3 of 3)

248
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

NSU/PRI Troubleshooting
If you cannot solve the problem using the following table, go through the
steps on page 240. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical
Support.

Table 48: NSU Troubleshooting

Symptoms Probable Causes Corrective Action

Can’t make calls over NSU CIM Cabling CIM connection requires a CAT 5
trunks. crossover cable. Connect the
cable to the left CIM port on the
NSU only.

FIM Module FIM module in controller must be

incompatible the 1K version.

Incorrect switch Single switch on left side should be

settings on back of in the down position.
NSU
L0/L1 switches should have switch
#4 down

Switch #6 is typically in the up

position if connected to the CO.

If right L0/L1 LED is red (indicating

No sync) try changing Switch 6.

If left L0/L1 LED flashing green

(indicating Sync but D-channel is
not synchronized) ensure the
correct protocol is programmed via
IMAT.

Incorrect CDE or See “Programming an NSU or a

IMAT programming PRI Card in a Peripheral Cabinet”
on page 112“ for required
programming.

NOTE: Be sure to check

programming for all links.

Wrong NSU Check FCI for load requirements.

software load

Wrong IMAT version Must be Release 7.3 or greater

249
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

PRI Debug Commands

Use the following commands to view logging and debugging information
for PRI cards or NSUs connected to PRI trunks.
To run the PRI debug commands
1. Using a serial cable, connect a PC to the maintenance port of the PRI
card or NSU.
2. Run a VT100 terminal emulator such as HyperTerminal. Settings: 8
bits, no parity, no flow control, 1 stop bit, 38400 baud rate.
3. PRI debug commands:
Option +/- cause: Turns on/off output of cause codes
Option +/- dispcall: Turns on/off calling/called party number display
Option state: Shows the states of the links from the PRI card perspective
Option state_help: Displays the state leter commands

250
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Troubleshooting Analog Trunks

If you cannot solve the problem using the following table, go through the
steps on page 240. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical
Support.

Basic Troubleshooting
Table 49: Basic Analog Trunk Troubleshooting
Symptoms Probable Causes Corrective Action
Unable to make any external Service provider has Try the following:
calls or frequently unable to not connected line • Unplug the cable that connects
access an external line the trunk to the LS trunk port on
the controller.
• Plug a standard analog phone
or test phone directly into the
service provider’s line jack.
• Listen for dial tone, Check each
line. If dial tone isn’t present on
all lines contact your service
provider.

Faulty wiring See Appendix D “System Cabling”

between MDF and on page 365 for tip & ring
controller assignments.

Faulty programming Verify that the trunks are

programmed correctly. See
“Programming Analog Trunks” on
page 131.

Faulty Analog Main Power down the controller.

Board or Analog Remove and replace the suspect
Option Board board. See

251
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Troubleshooting Signaling Problems

The following section covers problems caused by faulty trunk signaling.

General Signaling & Supervision Concepts

All trunks share similar basic handshaking functions. The actual signaling
mechanism will vary with the trunk type.
Seize: (request to make a call) The calling party initiates the call by
requesting service from the called party.
Seize Acknowledgment: (ready to receive) The called party indicates
that the call can commence.
This acknowledgment occurs when the calling party expects a response
(Dial Tone) or when the called party needs time to establish appropriate
resources (DTMF receivers).
Digits: (who to talk with) The calling party generates the rotary pulse or
DTMF.
Stop Dial: (slow down, can’t handle the pace) The called party generates
a signal to indicate that digits are in risk of being lost.
Receipt of Digits: (status of call) The called party generates audible tones
to indicate the status of the call (for example, Ringback, Busy, and
Reorder).
Answer Supervision: (called party has answered) The called party
indicates that the call has been answered. This signal is for billing
purposes (Hotel/Motel), generation of SMDR reports, etc.
Disconnect Supervision: (release and go back to idle) Either party
generates this signal to indicate the termination of a call and to return the
trunk to the idle condition.

Loop Start Trunk

The Loop Start Line/Trunk serves the standard domestic applications and
small businesses that have key systems and PBX applications.

252
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Figure 23: Loop Start Line/Trunk

253
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 50: Loop Start Line/Trunk Summary

Loop Start Line PBX Loop Start Line PBX
Signal
Outgoing Incoming
Seize Tip-Ring leads activated 90Vac is applied to Ring
(shorted); Loop Current flows lead in 2 sec on, 4 sec
in line off cadence
Seize Loop Current and/or dial tone —
Acknowledgment generated
Digits Loop Current toggled (Rotary) —
or DTMF
Stop Dial — —
Receipt of Digits Audible Tones - Busy, —
Reorder, Ringback dependent
upon digits dialed and called
party condition
Answer Supervision Some COs can reverse Tip-Ring leads activated
current flow (shorted); Loop Current
flows in line
Disconnect Near- end termination: PBX/ Near- end termination:
Supervision Telephone can break Loop PBX/Telephone can
Current break Loop Current

Test/Verify (Loop Start)

• Verify far-end (CO) circuits by using a standard telephone set in place
of the Loop Start trunk circuit.
• Verify near-end (PBX Loop Start) circuits by connecting to a local PBX
ONS circuit.
• Check for appropriate voltages on Tip-Ring in each call state.
• During off-hook condition, 18 mA DC minimum should be drawn from
the CO (typical 25-40 mA).
• Some Key/PBX systems may be polarity sensitive; reverse Tip-Ring to
verify.

254
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Ground Start Trunk

The Ground Start Trunk serves most PBX-CO connections in an analog
environment.

Figure 24: Ground Start Trunk

255
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 51: Ground Start Trunk Summary

Ground Start Trunk PBX Ground Start Trunk
Signal
Outgoing PBX Incoming
Seize Ring lead goes active. PBX Tip lead goes active; 90
grounds the ring lead Vac is applied to Ring
lead in 2 sec on, 4 sec off
cadence
Seize Tip lead goes active; Audible Tip-Ring leads activated
Acknowledgment Dial Tone generated; ground (shorted); Loop Current
returned on tip flows in line
Digits Loop Current toggled (Rotary) —
or DTMF
Stop Dial — —
Receipt of Digits Audible Tones - Busy, —
Reorder, Ringback dependent
upon digits dialed and called
party condition
Answer CO reverses current flow in —
Supervision Tip-Ring
Disconnect Near-end: PBX opens loop Near or Far-end
Supervision Far-end: CO removes ground termination: Loop
from ring Current is broken

Test/Verify (Ground Start)

• Verify the far-end (CO) circuits by using a standard telephone for
incoming calls. Verify outgoing calls by using a Butt Set with a ground-
start lead (momentarily shorting the ring lead to the ground will
produce a dial tone from the far end).
• Verify the near-end (PBX Ground Start) circuits by connecting to
known working far end Ground Start circuits.
• Verify that appropriate voltages are present on Tip-Ring in each call
state.
• During off-hook condition, 18 mA DC minimum should be drawn from
the CO (typical 35-40 mA).
• Tip-Ring is polarity sensitive. PBX will be unable to initiate calls if
reversed. Reverse polarity to verify.

256
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Direct Inward Dial (DID)/Loop Trunk

You use the Direct Inward Dial (DID)/Loop trunk primarily in analog DID
applications; rarely in PBX-PBX Loop Tie trunk applications.
This trunk uses current reversal to signal supervision information and
provides digit flow capability in both directions, when the trunk is in the
loop/tie mode.

Figure 25: Direct Inward Dial (DID)/Loop Trunk

257
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 52: Direct Inward Dial/Loop Trunk Summary

DID/Loop Trunk PBX DID/Loop Trunk PBX
Signal
Outgoing Incoming
Seize Tip-Ring leads are activated Tip-Ring leads are
(shorted); Loop Current flows in activated (shorted); Loop
line Current flows in line
Seize Immediate Dial - Tip-Ring leads Immediate Dial - Tip-Ring
Acknowledgment stay active leads stay active.
Outgoing Wink - Tip-Ring leads Incoming Wink - Tip-Ring
toggle leads toggle Loop Current
Loop Current direction Delay direction
Dial - Tip-Ring leads reverse
Loop Current following seizure;
reverse again when ready to go
Digits Loop Current toggled (Rotary) Loop Current toggled
or DTMF (Rotary) or DTMF
Stop Dial Tip-Ring leads reverse Loop —
Current direction; forward again
when ready
Receipt of Digits Audible Tones - Busy, Reorder, Audible Tones - Busy,
Ringback dependent upon Reorder, Ringback
digits dialed and called party generated and sent to
condition calling party dependent
upon digits received and
state of called party
Answer Current flow in Tip-Ring is Current flow in Tip-Ring is
Supervision reversed reversed
Disconnect Near or Far-end termination: Near or Far-end termi-
Supervision Loop Current broken nation: Loop Current is
broken

Test/Verify (DID)
• Verify the far-end circuits by the use of a standard telephone for
outgoing calls.
• Verify the near-end circuits by connecting to known working DID/Loop
circuits.
• Verify that appropriate voltages are present on Tip-Ring in each call
state.
• During off-hook condition, 20-25 mA should be drawn from the far-end.

258
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Ear & Mouth (E&M) Trunk

You use the E&M trunk in Tie Trunk applications. The E&M trunks support
all the signaling information.
The Tip-Ring is used in a 2-wire operation shown in Figure 26, “E&M Trunk
- Type (2-wire),” on page 260.

Note: Type 1 may be used in a 2-or 4-wire operation.

The Tip-Ring and Tip Rx-Ring Rx is used in a 4-wire operation shown in

Figure 13 - E&M Trunk - Type V (4-wire).

Type I
Type 1 is used in applications when a telephone company is providing a
transmission path between PBXs. The E&M circuits connect to Telco-
provided Signaling circuits, which prepare the E&M signals for long
distance use.
Each end is identical to the other; all required voltage translation is
provided by the cable carrier.

259
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Figure 26: E&M Trunk - Type (2-wire)

260
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Type V
Type V is used in applications where short distance direct back-to-back
operation is desired. The M-lead invert is required at both ends.

Figure 27: E&M Trunk - Type V (4-wire)

Table 53: E&M Trunk Summary

E&M Trunk PBX
Signal E&M Trunk PBX Outgoing
Incoming
Seize M lead goes active (voltage is E lead goes active
dependent on Type I or Type
V operation)
Seize Immediate Dial - E Lead stays Immediate Dial - M Lead
Acknowledgment idle. Outgoing Wink - E Lead stays idle. Incoming Wink -
toggles active/idle. Delay Dial M Lead toggles active/idle
- E Lead goes active following
M; goes idle when ready to go
Digits M toggles (Rotary) or DTMF E toggles (Rotary) or
through audio path DTMF through audio path
(Page 1 of 2)

261
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 53: E&M Trunk Summary (continued)

E&M Trunk PBX
Signal E&M Trunk PBX Outgoing
Incoming
Stop Dial E lead goes active; goes —
inactive when ready to go
Receipt of Digits Audible Tones - Busy, Audible Tones - Busy,
Reorder, Ringback dependent Reorder, Ringback
upon digits dialed and called generated and sent to
party condition calling party dependent
upon digits received and
called party condition
Answer E lead goes active M lead goes active
Supervision
Disconnect Near-end termination: Near-end termination: M
Supervision M lead goes inactive; lead goes inactive;
E follows E follows
Far-end termination: Far-end termination:
E lead goes inactive; E lead goes inactive;
M follows M follows
(Page 2 of 2)

Test/Verify (E&M)
• Loop back to self whenever more than 1 E&M type V circuit is
available.
• Verify far-end circuits by activating near-end M lead and listening for
far- end dial tone.
• Verify near-end circuits by activating near-end E lead and listening for
near-end dial tone.
• Verify that appropriate voltages are present on E&M leads in each call
state.

262
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Troubleshooting T1 Trunks (D4 DS-1)

A T1 Trunk is a digital trunking standard that supports multiple users.
Unlike analog trunks, the T-1 hardware signaling layer is independent of
trunk usage; synchronization and signaling are dealt with separately.

Figure 28: TI Trunk Synchronization

Synchronization
The T1 trunk establishes and maintains a connection between the two
systems. Sampling clocks of each partner must be synchronized.
- The Master-Slave arrangement defines the leader and follower; if
connecting to a Public Network T1, the PBX will always be a slave.
- The Stratum clock levels define the accuracy of the clock and the ability
to match with the incoming master clock signal.The higher Stratum
number synchronizes to the same or lower Stratum number. For
example, a Stratum 4 (PBX) clock synchronizes to a Stratum 3 (CO/
PBX/Channel Service Unit) clock.
- When the PBX is connecting to more than one T-1 signal, choose the
order of preference of clocking sources in CDE Form 44, T1 Network
Sync (always choose a connection as close as possible to the defined
master source clock).

263
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Signaling Types
Channel Associated Signaling
T1 was originally designed to emulate 24 independent analog trunks. The
Channel Associated signaling supports Loop Start, Ground Start, DID/
Loop, and E&M trunks. The function of each channel is decided and
programmed at each end.
All handshake signaling is done with bits (A&B) taken from the bit stream
which are used to emulate the various analog trunk signals, (off-hook,
on-hook, current reversal, etc.).

Common Channel Signaling

The Handshake signaling for the first 23 channels is managed by the 24th
channel. The Common Channel signaling allows for transmission of digital
information and more advanced digital trunk applications (MITEL’s MSDN,
Bell Canada’s Megalink, ISDN, etc.). Signaling protocol is defined by the
type of service.

Test/Verify (T1)
Synchronization
Most T1 issues are a result of connectivity problems.
- Verify that the incoming T1 signal is seen at both ends; verify all
hardware connections. Failure at either end indicates loss of an
incoming synchronizing signal.
- For T1 cards in peripheral cabinets, verify that the switch settings on
the card are set for proper operation. For example: 1 is closed and 2-8
are open. The S1 Switch Settings for the T1 Trunk Cable Length (not
loop length) are as follows:

0-45.8 m (0-150 ft.): 1only closed (see figure below)

45.8 - 137.3 m (150 - 450 ft.): 2, 3, 4 closed
137.3 - 200.5 m (450 - 655 ft.): 5, 6, 7 closed

264
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

The S1 switch settings on the PRI Card shown in the following illustration
inform the T1 module of the location of the clock source and must be set
as indicated.

Loopback
Loopback is used to verify and locate the source of either a cable or a
synchronization problem through the devices in a T1 transmission path.
Devices in the T1 transmission path (PBX, CSU, Channel bank, smart
jacks, etc.) will generally have some type of loopback mode. Loopback
modes will typically have the effect of taking the input T1 stream and
transmitting the stream back to the source; the nodes thereby verify that
portion of the link.
In the absence of a loopback mode, the T1 transmits and receives pairs
that can be directly connected together to physically create a loopback
condition.

265
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

A&B bits
Taken from each of the 24 Channels to emulate the various analog trunk
signalling conditions (off-hook, on-hook, disconnect supervision, etc.) in
either Superframe or Extended Superframe (ESF) format.

Note: ESF is supported by the T1 module on the BCCIII card only.

Table 54: A-B Signaling States (Tie/E&M)

PBX port Transmit Receive
PBX Port CSU CSU condition to
condition to
Type Type analog facility
channel A B A B

Tie Trunk DPO Tx loop open 0 0 x x x

(loop start)
loop closure 1 1 x x x

DPO Rx x x x 0 x normal battery

x x x 1 x reverse battery

DID or Tie DPT Tx normal battery 0 0 x x x

Trunk (loop
start) reverse battery 1 1 x x x

DPT Rx x x x 0 x loop open

x x x 1 x loop closure

TIE Trunk E&M Tx M-lead grounded 0 0 x x x

4wire/2 wire or open
E&M
M-lead battery 1 1 x x x

E&M Rx x x x 0 x E-lead open

x x x 1 x E-lead grounded or
open

266
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Table 55: A-B Bit Signaling Example (T1/CO)

Transmit Receive
State
A B A B
Outgoing call - Basic Operation
Idle state 0 1 1 *
PBX grounds ring (wait for dial tone) 0 0 1 *
CO ground tip (dial tone applied) 0 0 0 *
PBX closes loop and removes ring ground 1 1 0 *
Dial pulsing DP 1 0 *
Completion of dialing 1 1 0 *
Incoming call - Basic Operation
Idle state 0 1 1 *
CO ground tip (interval between ringing) 0 1 0 1
CO ground tip (during ringing application) 0 1 0 0
PBX presents call 0 1 0 1
PBX answers call 1 1 0 *
Talking state 1 1 0 *
CO disconnects
Talking state 1 1 0 *
CO removes tip ground (far end hangs up) 1 1 1 *
PBX opens loop (idle) 0 1 1 *
PBX disconnects
Talking state 1 1 0 *
PBX opens loop (near end hangs up) 0 1 0 *
CO removes tip ground (idle) 0 1 1 *

267
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Troubleshooting Voice Mail

If voice mail is not working properly, refer to the chart below for
suggestions on corrective action. If you are experiencing symptoms that
are not listed here, call your dealer for assistance.
To check the amount of disk space voice mail messages are using and the
status of the voice mail ports, use the Maintenance terminal REPORTS
function.
Table 56: Voice Mail Troubleshooting
Symptom/Trouble Corrective Action
Notification calls are configured Notification is not enabled at the system level
for a mailbox, but don't seem to (see Voice Mail Options Form 49)
work. -or-
CO line access is restricted for voice mail
port extension numbers.
-or-
Notification call number incorrectly
programmed. Try dialing the number from a
telephone to see what happens.
Notification calls use the correct Check the notification phone number and
outside lines, but the pager pager type in Form 50, Mailboxes.
never beeps.
The date and time that a Check the SX-200 ICP system clock.
message was left is incorrect.
The system is warning that the Delete unused mailboxes and have
disk space is almost full. subscribers clean out unnecessary saved
messages.
Too much silence before or after When recording greetings and names, start
a greeting or mailbox name. speaking immediately after the tone and
press any key as soon as you are finished.
When outside callers reach the Check that mailbox 0 is correctly associated
auto attendant and press 0, with the operator's extension.
either no phones ring or the
incorrect phone rings.
When outside callers reach the Set Call Forward-Busy/No Answer on the
auto attendant and press 0, the Operator's phone to forward to voice mail.
operator's telephone rings and
never forwards to voice mail.
(Page 1 of 2)

268
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

Table 56: Voice Mail Troubleshooting (continued)

Symptom/Trouble Corrective Action
Internal callers occasionally All voice mail ports are busy. Try again later.
reach the Operator (or other
designated overflow point for the
voice mail port hunt group) when
calling the auto attendant.
Outside callers occasionally All voice mail ports are busy. Try again later.
reach the Operator (or other
designated overflow point for the
voice mail port hunt group)
instead of the voice mail system.
The voice mail system resets The voice mail system has the ability to
itself at times. automatically reset itself in the event of a
critical error. The SX-200 ICP also
automatically resets daily at 3:00 AM.
The message lights do not work. Verify that you have the proper access code
to turn the light on by dialing it from a phone
Note: The ONS/CLASS circuits in the
SX-200 ICP controller do not support
Message Waiting lights.
No message light exists on the Set up message notification to ring the
phone. extension number whenever messages are
received.
Prompt to “please leave a Bilingual prompts enabled (System Option
message" heard when a a busy 121) but only one language installed. Install
or unanswered extension is the missing language. See “Installing
reached repeats. Software Using an External CompactFlash
Card (Optional Initial Install)” on page 35.
(Page 2 of 2)

269
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

SX-200 ICP Property Management

System Interface
The SX-200 ICP Property Management System (PMS) interface collects
and sends the following Hotel/Motel information to a customer’s PMS
computer through the LAN.
• Maid and room status
• Guest check-in and check-out
• Guest name
• Auto wake-up and message waiting
• PMS related maintenance logs.

Property Management System Messages

A PMS message is a string of ASCII text characters.
For example, to light a message waiting lamp for guest room extension
number 2129, the customer’s PMS computer will send a string of ASCII
keyboard commands to the PMS interface.
The PMS message sent is:
^B MW 1 2129^C
When the PBX’s PMS interface receives and understands the message, it
will send an ACKnowledge character back to the customer’s PMS
computer.

270
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

The following is a PMS message format that enables a telephone’s

message waiting lamp.

^B M W space 1 space space 2 1 2 9 ^C

Start Transac- Function Code Status Code Station’s Extension End Transaction
tion STX (Room) Number ETX
The CTRL (^) B The MW followed 1 followed by a Identifies the extension The CTRL (^) C
character sig- by a space indi- space turns on number of the telephone character signals
nals the start of a cates that the PMS the message on which the message the end of a PMS
PMS message requests a mes- waiting lamp. 0 waiting lamp lights. The message
sage waiting func- turns the lamp PMS inserts leading
tion off space(s) to indicate that
no number is present

Message Formats from PBX to PMS

Maid in Room status
Maid in Room status is sent as a 10-character message, as follows:
__________
function code STS
status code n space (n is assigned room status code)
station number nnnnn (with trailing spaces)
Message Registration of Outgoing Trunk Calls
Message Registration of Outgoing Trunk Calls status is sent as a
12-character message, as follows:
____________
function code MRspace
status code nnnn (nnnn is a 4-byte peg count)
station number nnnnn (with trailing spaces)

SX-200 ICP and PMS 5-digit Extension Number Formats

The extension number is sent between the SX-200 ICP and the PMS as a
5-digit number. Numbers that are fewer than 5 digits include spaces:
ICP to PMS - extension number nnnnn with trailing spaces
PMS to ICP- extension number nnnnn with leading spaces.

271
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 57: PMS Keyboard Commands

Commands PMS Keyboard Keys Comments

Enquire (ENQ) ^E ^ = CTRL key

Acknowledged ^F
(ACK)

Not Acknow- ^U
ledged (NAK)

Start Transaction ^B
(STX)

End Transaction ^C
(ETX)

Check In ^BCHK1 XXXXX^C XXXXX is the 5-digit extension number

(use leading spaces).

Check Out ^BCHK0 XXXXX^C

Add Name ^BNAM1 a-z XXXXX^C a-z is the extension name, 20 characters
in length (use trailing spaces), followed
by a single space, followed by the
extension number. Only the first 10
characters of the name are displayed.

Replace Name ^BNAM2 a-z XXXXX^C

Delete Name ^BNAM3 a-z XXXXX^C

Send Message ^BMW 1 XXXXX^C Insert a space before and after the digit 1.

Delete Message ^BMW 0 XXXXX^C Insert a space before and after the digit 0.

Set Wakeup ^BWKPTTTTXXXXX^C TTTT is the time in hours:minutes. Use a

24-hour clock.

272
 Basic Troubleshooting and Repair

SX-200 ICP and PMS Cannot Communicate

If the SX-200 ICP PMS interface and the customer’s PMS computer
cannot communicate, the system will generate PMS related maintenance
log messages. Typically, PMS maintenance log messages will identify
• Operating status of the PMS
• Invalid start (STX) and end (ETX) of text message characters
• Invalid function code message characters
• Invalid status code message characters
• Invalid room number message characters.

Testing the PMS Interface of the PBX

PMS problems typically occur in these areas:
• PMS Protocol settings: Ensure that the communication parameters
between the systems match.
• PMS Programming: Verify that all the recommended PMS and
Dataset programming is complete.
• RS232-to-IP serial port converter: Use a straight-through cable
between the customer’s PMS computer and the converter.
Test the SX-200 ICP PMS interface as follows:
1. Disconnect the customer’s PMS computer from Ethernet-to-Serial
converter.
2. Connect a personal computer to the converter.
- Ensure that the communications parameters of the personal
computer / terminal match those expected by the PBX’s PMS
interface.
- Verify that you receive the ENQuire character from the SX-200 ICP
PMS interface. If not, verify that all the programming and the
connections are correct.

273
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

3. Type the PMS message required to light a telephone’s message

waiting lamp, using CAPITAL letters only. See the following example.

^B M W space 1 space x x x x x ^C
Start Trans- Function Code Status Code Station’s Extension (Room) End Trans-
action STX 1 = ON Number action ETX
(CTRL B) 0 = OFF Enter the telephone’s extension (CTRL C)
number (5 digits with leading
spaces).

4. Verify that the telephone’s message waiting lamp is lit.

If the lamp is not lit, check the PMS-related logs in Maintenance. The
logs will indicate which section of the PMS message is invalid.
Note: For the PMS to light a lamp station the Dial 0 for that tenant must be
a console, and the Dial 0 must be the same for Night 1 and Night 2.

5. Type the PMS message required to turn off the telephone’s message
waiting lamp.
6. Verify that the telephone’s message waiting lamp is off.
Turning a telephone’s message waiting lamp on and off from a PC
confirms that the SX-200 ICP PMS interface works correctly.
If problems continue when you reconnect the customer’s PMS computer,
check the maintenance logs for PMS related information, identifying
problems with the customer’s PMS hardware/software.

Note: Faster PMS PCs may have to be forced to wait for a reply.

274
 Chapter 7
Advanced Troubleshooting
and Repair
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

276
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

About this Chapter

This chapter provides advanced procedures to help you identify and
troubleshoot common problems involving the following:
• Network connectivity and performance
• IP Phone registration
• Audio quality
• IP trunking

Go through this chapter before calling Mitel Technical Support.

Note: The maintenance and troubleshooting of your LAN/WAN network
maintenance is the responsibility of your network provider. Mitel Product
Support can help you isolate minor network problems; for more complex
network problems, Mitel Product Support will escalate to Professional
Services to assist you (this is a billable service).

IMPORTANT: Please see “Contacting Mitel” on page 6 before

contacting Mitel Technical Support.

277
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

General Network Troubleshooting

It is beyond the scope of this document to cover everything you need to
know to diagnose and eliminate network faults. The information provided
here is only an overview of network troubleshooting. For more information,
see the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation and the IP Technology
Reference companion to the Advanced Installation and Maintenance
Course.

Check List
ˆ Do you have a Network topology diagram? If not, it is essential to
obtain one or create one for your records.
- Is your network Managed or Unmanaged? Managed Layer 2
switches allow you to set up VLANs which are recommended,
especially if you are experiencing problems with voice quality.
- What is your Layer 2 port setup: untagged, tagged, default VLAN,
other VLAN setups?
- How is the router configured: route from one VLAN to another?
- Which Layer 2 switches are the routers, servers, and SX-200 ICP
attached to?
- Is the network configured in a tree structure? Are there any
roadblocks?
- Are your IP Phones distributed on all of the Layer 2 switches or one
Layer 2 switch?
- Is the 2nd Port on the IP Phones enabled for PC connection? What
type of IP Phones are being used?

278
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

ˆ Do the PCs perform adequately on the network—i.e., is this only a

problem affecting IP Phones?
- Is the problem an IP configuration issue on the IP devices—i.e.,
DHCP on PCs, DHCP on IP Phones or VLAN issue?
- Does it work by programming static IP addresses to the IP Phone?
To PCs?
- Can you route to the internet?
- Can you ping from PCs to all shared network devices (servers,
routers, printers, etc.)?
- Are PC file transfers extremely slow?
ˆ Where does the problem lie? Within the LAN infrastructure, WAN
infrastructure, routing between subnets (VLAN's), certain Layer 2
switches, certain ports on the Layer 2 switch, connection to the
SX-200 ICP, etc.?
ˆ Isolate (if possible and after hours). If the problem is reproducible, then
disconnect voice from the LAN (if it’s a data problem) or the LAN from
voice (if it’s a voice problem) and retry scenario.
ˆ Do you have a Network Analyzer (including an Ethernet Tap) that will
capture information such as broadcasts being received, runts,
collisions, network utilization, etc.?
- Is the problem experienced on one part of the network or
throughout? Don't assume only the person complaining has the
problem (try different areas of the network.
- Make connections or calls to the problem area with the Network
Analyzer attached and capturing information (one capture from
source, one capture from destination).

279
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Troubleshooting IP Phone Connectivity

Using a network analyzer to debug

If a network analyzer is required to debug an IP Phone it will be necessary
to use an Ethernet tap to ensure that the port settings are not compromised
or changed. For example: using a shared hub to allow the analyzer to “see”
packets being delivered to a Layer 2 port will change connectivity to the
port to 10 MB half-duplex.
If the analyzer indicates there are excessive collisions:
• check for duplex mismatch problems at the Ethernet port on
SX-200 ICP. The Layer 2 port attached to SX-200 ICP should be set
to 100 Full and not auto.
• check that for dual-port phones the NIC card of the attached PC to the
IP set is not 10 MB half-duplex. The NIC card should be 100 MB
full-duplex.
• for CRC errors: check if there is a faulty NIC card or flow-control.
• if there are excessive runt frames, check for bad cables, duplex
mismatches or bad PC NIC.

Connectivity problems
For IP Phone network connectivity problems, identify the path between two
end devices (example: IP Phone and SX-200 ICP) by doing the following:
• Execute a ping test from an IP Phone. Do this when the phone is
unable to register with its DHCP server (either the one in SX-200 ICP
or an external one if that is how the network is set up).
Note: This step is not to be confused with the section on Troubleshooting IP
Phone Registration.

- Disconnect power from the phone.

- Reconnect power WHILE pressing the Superkey button.
- Press the “v” (volume down key) until INPUT IP Address.
- Enter an IP address on the same subnet as the device you will be
pinging (avoid conflicting addresses).
- If a mistake is made, press the “^” (volume up key) and start over.

Note: All digits must be entered for the IP Address; example 192.168.001.011

280
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

- Press “v” repeatedly until the INPUT MASK prompt appears.

- Enter the same mask as set for your network— example,
255.255.255.000
- Press “v” repeatedly until the INPUT GATEWAY appears.
- Enter the IP address of your Gateway—example, 192.168.1.1
- Press “v” repeatedly until PERFORM PING TEST prompt appears.
- Press “#” to indicate Yes.
- At “INPUT DEST IP ADDRESS” enter the IP Address of the device
that you are proving a connection for (see following step). Example,
SX-200 ICP: 192.168.001.002.
- The phone will show: Pinging 1 to 5, and then show the results—
e.g., 5 Pings Successful; 0 Pings failed.
- The phone will have to be powered on and off in order to execute
another ping or boot up normally.
- PING the following devices (in order):
SX-200 ICP
3rd party DHCP if any
Local gateway.
Remote gateway
Remote IP.

Troubleshooting IP Phone Registration

To troubleshoot IP Phone Registration:
1. Record the error message on the IP Phone display, then go through
IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting.
Note: To rule out DHCP problems, and isolate network-related issues, we
recommend that you program the IP Phone with a static IP Address in Form
47 or from the phone itself; see page 287 for instructions.

2. If you cannot solve the problem using the IP Phone Registration

Troubleshooting Table, go through the General Troubleshooting Steps
on page 240.

281
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

3. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical Support.
IMPORTANT: Make sure you have the following information
on hand before calling:
• Is the problem with the local or remote subnet?
• DHCP server(s) settings
• Layer 2 switch configuration and settings
• Router configuration and settings
• Network Diagram
• IP addressing scheme
• VLAN configuration and settings

Table 58: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting

Error Message on
Probable Cause Corrective Action
Display

Invalid VLAN ID DHCP Option not set 1. Identify the location of DHCP server and
correctly. which DHCP server is assigned IP
address for the corresponding subnet.
2. For an external Microsoft DHCP server
(NT server, etc.), make sure that the
option type is set to LONG.
3. For a Cisco Router DHCP server, make
sure that the option type is set to hex,
and padded with 0s (for example,
0x00000002 for VLAN 2).
4. For the controller internal DHCP server,
set the option type to numeric.

Duplicated IP Existing data device 1. Check the IP address on the phone

owns the IP address. display.
2. Disconnect the IP Phone.
3. From a PC on the same subnet, ping
the suspected IP Phone. If there is a
response, identify the data device, and
resolve the conflict.

Corrupted DHCP On the suspected DHCP server, disable

server. then recreate the scope. If this is a
Microsoft DHCP server, reboot the server.

(Page 1 of 5)

282
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

Table 58: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)

Error Message on
Probable Cause Corrective Action
Display

DHCP discovery DHCP Option 130 Identify the location of DHCP server and
OR (MITEL IP PHONE) is set to Option 130 as String type with value
DHCP OFFER X not programmed. of “MITEL IP PHONE”.
REJ
DHCP server does not Create a larger scope with more IP
have enough IP addresses on the DHCP server.
addresses.

DHCP server is acting For a Microsoft DHCP server, reboot the

up and cannot assign IP server.
addresses for the For the controller internal DHCP server,
corresponding subnet, disable DHCP and rebuilt the scope.
even though there are
enough IP addresses.

L2 switch port is shut Check the L2 switch, and ensure that the
down or not configured port is not shut down. Ensure that this port
properly. can access the DHCP server subnet (that
is, access the port for the same VLAN,
etc.).

DHCP Discovery DHCP Option 130 1. Identify if there is one DHCP server for
OR (MITEL IP PHONE) is both VLANs, or if there is one DHCP
DHCP OFFER X not programmed up on server per VLAN.
REJ the second scope of the 2. For one DHCP server for both VLANs,
(VLAN) (after DHCP server (or on the ensure that option 130 is programmed
releasing the first IP second DHCP server). in the scope of Voice LAN as String
from the native OR type with value of “MITEL IP PHONE”.
DHCP server) VLAN ID is not
3. For one DHCP server per VLAN, ensure
assigned properly.
that option 130 is defined in both DHCP
servers properly.
4. Verify that option 132 is set to assign to
the proper VLAN ID.

One DHCP server for On the router interface (in which DHCP is
two VLANs network not residing), enter the IP helper address
configuration: IP helper and specify the IP address of the DHCP
(sometimes called server on the other side of the subnet (that
DHCP Relay) address is, always set up IP helper address on the
on the router interface DHCP client side).
is not set up correctly. Ensure the second scope is created for the
corresponding VLAN.

(Page 2 of 5)

283
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 58: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)

Error Message on
Probable Cause Corrective Action
Display

DHCP Discovery The DHCP server is For a Microsoft DHCP server, reboot the
OR acting up and cannot server.
DHCP OFFER X assign IP addresses for For the controller internal DHCP server,
REJ the corresponding disable DHCP and rebuild the scope.
(VLAN) (after subnet even though
releasing the first IP there are enough IP
from the native addresses.
DHCP server)
The L2 switch port for Check the L2 switch and ensure that the
the phone interface is port is not shut down.
shut down or not For a Cisco L2 switch, ensure that this is a
configured properly. trunk port with Dot1q encapsulation, and
that this trunk port allows both native and
Voice LAN to pass through.
For an HP L2 switch, ensure that Native
Lan is untagged, and that Voice LAN is
tagged

The L2 switch port for Identify if there are two physical interfaces
the router interface is to the router (one per VLAN), or a router on
shut down or not a stick configuration (one physical with
configured properly. virtual sub- interfaces).
Ensure that the port(s) on both sides (L2
switch and router) are not shut down.
If there is a physical interface on the router
for each VLAN, make sure that the L2
switch is set to access port for the
corresponding VLAN/ subnet correctly. OR
If there is one physical interface on the
router for multiple VLANs, ensure that this
is a trunk port on the L2 switch, and ensure
that this trunk port allows both native and
voice LAN to pass through.
On the router subinterface, ensure that the
proper VLAN is associated to the remote
subinterface.

The DHCP server does Create a larger scope with more IP

not have enough IP addresses on the DHCP server.
addresses.

(Page 3 of 5)

284
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

Table 58: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)

Error Message on
Probable Cause Corrective Action
Display

TFTP load failure Option 128 is not set up Check the DHCP server, and confirm that
to point to the right option 128 is pointing to the right TFTP
TFTP server server (usually the SX-200 ICP system IP
(Controller). address).

No network connectivity Confirm that the controller is connected to

between the controller the network.
and the phone. For a Cisco L2 switch: verify that the L2
switch is access port (Voice LAN).
For an HP L2 switch: verify that the L2
switch is untagged (Voice LAN).
If the router is involved, make sure that
router’s MTU is set to 600 or more.

Firmware on controller Verify that the firmware is in the sysro/tftp

is missing or corrupted. directory (particularly if the user has
manually copied the firmware).
Confirm if TFTP on the controller is
corrupted (this can be verified by
connecting the IP Phone directly on the
controller, or by observing the behavior of
other IP Phones).
Tips: If you have Option 132/133
programmed on the controller’s internal
DHCP server, disable them before trying
Step 2.

Waiting for link Option 129 is not Check Option 129 on DHCP to confirm that
programmed correctly. the IP address of the SX-200 ICP
controller is correctly programmed.

The Layer 2 switch port Turn port fast on or disable Spanning tree
may be running (whichever is possible).
spanning tree.

The application server Turn off multicasting.

is broadcasting or
multicasting on IP
Phone port or on PC
behind the IP Phone.

The PC behind the IP Depending on the NIC, you may need to

Phone is changing hardcode to 100 MB instead of auto
speed 100/10. negotiation.

(Page 4 of 5)

285
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 58: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)

Error Message on
Probable Cause Corrective Action
Display

Waiting for link IP phone fails to receive Verify if the network or the controller is
OR Keepalive message in down.
Lost link to Server 30 seconds.

There is electrical Verify the power source, and change the

interference. location of the power source.
TFTP Fail The Layer 2 switch port Check the Layer 2 switch and ensure that
(Remote IP phone for the phone interface the port is not shut down.
(statically is shut down or not For a Cisco Layer 2 switch: verify that this
programmed IP configured properly. is a trunk port with Dot1q encapsulation,
address) cannot and ensure this trunk port allows both
access the SX-200 native and voice LAN to pass through.
ICP across the For an HP Layer 2 switch: verify that
WAN). Native Lan is untagged and Voice Lan is
tagged.

The Layer 2 switch port Verify which configuration you have

for router interface is Ensure the port(s) on both sides (Layer 2
shut down or not switch and router) are not shut down.
configured properly. If there is physical interface on the router
for each VLAN, make sure that the Layer 2
switch is set to access port for the
corresponding VLAN/subnet correctly; OR
If this is a router on a switch, verify that this
is a trunk port on L2 switch, and ensure
this trunk port allows both native and voice
LAN to pass through.
On the router’s subinterface, verify that the
proper VLAN is associated to the
subinterface.

Typo in IP address, Delete and reprogram the static IP

VLAN ID, gateway. address. If there is no VLAN or priority,
don’t put 0 and leave them as blank.
Verify that the gateway IP address is
correct.

(Page 5 of 5)

286
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

Assigning Static IP Addresses to IP Phones

To navigate through the set prompts:
• Use the Volume Down key to move to the next field.
• Use the Volume Up key to go back to the previous field.
• Use the * key to move backwards within a field (to correct an error).
• Use the # key to insert a decimal character and move to the next IP
address field.
To set static IP address on the IP telephones:
1. Ensure that the set you want to program is not connected to the
network and there is no power supplied to the set.
2. Hold down the Volume Up key for 3 seconds and at the same time,
plug the set Ethernet cable and power into the set to display the
STATIC IP SETUP MODE.
The SET STATIC IP PARAM? prompt appears.
3. To begin entering static IP address information, press #.
Wait a few seconds for the USE PRESENT SETTINGS prompt to
appear.
4. Press # to enter IP data. To revert back to DHCP from static
parameters, press *.
The INPUT VLAN ID prompt appears.
5. If you are using VLANS, enter the VLAN ID that will be inserted into
packets sent by the phone. Then press the Volume Down key to move
to the next field. If you are not using VLANS, enter nothing and press
the Volume Down key.
The INPUT PRIORITY prompt appears.
6. Enter 6 if you are using priorities, or leave the field blank. Press the
Volume Down key to move to the next field.
The INPUT IP ADDRESS prompt appears.
7. Enter the customer-supplied static IP address (for example:
10.30.27.191).
Note: Enter two-digit portions of IP addresses as three-digit numbers with
leading zeros. For example, enter '10.12.67.30' as '010.012.067.030.

Note: If you see the INVALID IP ADDRESS message, press the Volume Up
key to return to the field with the incorrect entry. Edit the entry.

The INPUT PDA ADDRESS prompt appears.

287
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

8. Enter the customer-supplied static IP PDA address. Press the Volume

Down key to move to the next field.
The INPUT SUBNET MASK prompt appears.
9. Enter the subnet mask and press the Volume Down key to move to the
next field.
The INPUT DEFAULT GATEWAY prompt appears.
10. Enter the IP address of the Router and press the Volume Down key to
move to the next field.
The INPUT RTC ADDRESS prompt appears.
11. Enter the IP address of the RTC and press the Volume Down key to
move to the next field.
The INPUT TFTP ADDRESS prompt appears.
12. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server that is used to download the
main-load and boot-load images. Press the Volume Down key to move
to the next field.
The INPUT DNS ADDRESS appears.
13. Enter the IP address of the server that will be used during Web
browsing to resolve host names into IP addresses. Press the Volume
Down key to move to the next field.
The INPUT WINS ADDRESS prompt appears.
14. Enter the Windows Internet Name Services (WINS) server IP address.
For more information about this address, consult your Microsoft
Windows documentation. Press the Volume Down key to move to the
next field.
The INPUT PROXY ADDRESS prompt appears.
15. Enter the IP address of the proxy server. Press the Volume Down key
to move to the next field.
The INPUT PROXY PORT prompt appears.
16. Enter the Proxy Port number and press the Volume Down key to move
to the next field.
The TECHNICIAN IP ADDR? prompt appears.

288
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

17. To enter the IP address of the debugging utility, press #, enter the
address and then press the Volume Down key to move to the next
field. If you do not want to enter this information, press *.
The STORE IN NVRAM? prompt appears.
18. To store parameters in non-volatile RAM, press #
This ensures that your static settings will be used when the set is
powered-up and when the FLASH software is upgraded. If you do not
want to store the static settings in NVRAM, press *.
The set reboots and applies the new static IP data.

Removing Static IP Addresses on the IP Sets

To return to using DHCP when static parameters were previously enabled:
1. Plug the set cable and power into the set while holding down the Volume
Up key for 3 seconds to display the STATIC IP SETUP MODE.
2. At the USE PRESENT SETTINGS screen, select * = DISABLE to
revert back to DHCP from static parameters.

IP Phone Analyzer
The Mitel IP Phone Analyzer is a software tool for troubleshooting IP
phones. It installs on a PC from the SX-200 ICP software CD. The PC
needs Windows 98, NT, 2000 or XP and a connection on the same
network as the SX-200 ICP.

Installing the IP Phone Analyzer

1. In Form 47 (DHCP Parameters) add Option 131: IP Phone Debug
Window IP to the list of Common Options.
For the IP address, enter the one belonging to the PC that has the
Analyzer installed on it.
2. Insert the SX-200 ICP software CD-ROM in the PC’s CD drive.
3. Open the Tools folder, and then the IP Phone Analyzer folder.
4. Double-click Setup.exe. Follow the prompts to complete the
installation.

289
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Launching the IP Phone Analyzer

1. Click Start on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Programs.
3. Click Mitel IP Phone Analyzer.
For detailed information on using the IP Phone Analyzer, refer to its Online
Help.

Enabling Tool Analysis

From the IP Phone Analyzer Tool:
1. Select Commands, and then Register Set.
2. Enter the IP address of the IP phone.
From the IP phone:
• Reboot the phone (by removing and restoring power) to add the IP
address of the PC to the phone.
The IP address will appear in the IP Phone Analyzer Status View
window.
The phone will be out of service while it resets.

Disabling Tool Analysis

From the PC hosting the Analyzer Tool:
• Access the Status View window, left-click on the IP address,
right-click, and then select Delete.
From the CDE/Maintenance Terminal:
• In Form 47 (DHCP Parameters), delete Option 131 to disable IP
messaging to the Analyzer Tool.
There will be a service outage while the phones reset.
From the IP phone:
• Restart the set to clear PC’s IP address from the phone.

290
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

Troubleshooting Phone Audio Quality

To Troubleshoot Phone Audio Quality:
1. Go to the table below.
2. If you cannot solve the problem using the table, go through the steps
on page 240.
3. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical Support.

IMPORTANT: Make sure you have the following information

on hand before calling:
• Setup scenario
• Is there a common denominator (router, only one side of
subnet, etc.)?
• Other call scenarios (IP to IP, IP to TDM, etc.)
• Layer 2 switch configuration and settings
• Router configuration and settings
• Network diagram
• IP addressing scheme
• VLAN configuration and settings
• Layer 2 switch port statistics for FCS, collision and duplex
mismatch.

291
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 59: Audio Quality Problems Troubleshooting

Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Action

Excessive noise Faulty cabling Check for cabling problems.

One way audio No gateway IP address Make sure that the gateway IP
between Remote IP to programmed in the address is programmed properly.
TDM (VM) controller.

Distorted audio only Voice encoding is not 1. For T1, enable invert for Voice
on NSU inverted. encoding in link descriptor.
2. For CEPT or API, enable ADI
invert for voice encoding. (This
does not apply to Embedded PRI.)

Echo Echo between LS trunks Measure the loss level and

and IP phones. impedance for LS trunks connected
to onboard ASUs (See “Diagnostic
Function Commands” on page 231).
If necessary, update the Options
subform of Form 13 with matching
settings.

Handsfree mode is used. Check if far end is using handsfree.

Switch to Handset mode to see if this
corrects it, or lower the handsfree’s
volume.

Echo Canceller is 1. Identify the path between the two

beyond specifications. end points, and verify if Trunk is
always involved.
2. Check with Telco to see if the trunk
is within specs. On a typical T1,
the input signal should be -15 dB.
If it is too high (-5 dB for example),
echo may result.
3. If this is the case, keep an echo log
to isolate the problem.
Network jitter issue. If the problem only occurs between
IP devices, check network jitter issue
below.

(Page 1 of 2)

292
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

Table 59: Audio Quality Problems Troubleshooting (continued)

Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Action

Broken Audio, Handsfree on the far Ensure that neither device is using
intermittent (IP trunks end. Handsfree. Some handsfree phones
only) only operate at half duplex.

Packet loss, jitter via 1. Identify the speech path between

network. the two end points, including
router, switch WAN in the audio
stream.
2. The network administrator needs
to apply QOS/TOS to minimize
jitter over slow speed interface
(T1, Frame Relay, etc.), and give
voice traffic priority over data.

Limited bandwidth and 1. Limit the number of calls to remote

too many calls across subnets.
router, or combination 2. The network administrator needs
data and voice. to apply QOS/TOS to give voice
traffic priority over data.

Physical port error 1. Identify the speech path between

(CRC, faulty cable, the two end points, including
duplex mismatch, HUB). router, switch WAN in the audio
stream.
2. Verify that there is no duplex
mismatch in each port settings
and/or faulty cable, or faulty port.
3. Make sure that the IP Phone is not
plugged into a HUB.

Compression enabled Compression will save bandwidth,

but may cause noticeable clipping. If
not sure, disable compression to see
if it makes a difference.

Router’s CPU is Router may be running excessive

exhausted or congested. filtering. The network administrator
may need to monitor the
performance of the router.

Echo between IP Layer 2 switch setting 1. Check the L2 switch for duplex
Phones problem. mismatch and spanning tree.
2. Turn off if possible.

(Page 2 of 2)

293
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Troubleshooting IP Trunks
The tools and techniques used to troubleshoot connectivity problems with
IP Phones also apply to IP trunks. Other problems with IP trunks, such as
poor voice quality and traffic congestion, are often the result of incorrect
CDE programming or insufficient bandwidth.
The following sections summarize the programming requirements and
provide guidance on addressing problems with connectivity and other
quality of service concerns. For more detailed information, see the
SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation, especially the section entitled
“Maintaining Voice Quality of Service.”

CDE Check List

ˆ Form 01, System Configuration
Ensure that the IP trunk card is programmed in Bay 1 Slot 6.
ˆ Form 03, Class of Service
Ensure that the following options are enabled in
COS 7:
- 801 Incoming Trunk Call Rotary
- 802 Limited Wait for Dial Tone
- 811 ANIS/DNIS/Class Trunk
- 702 SMDR Overwrite Buffer
ˆ Form 04, System Options/System Timers
Ensure that IP trunk-related options are programmed as follows
- Option 86, PRI Card: QSIG: Enabled.
- Option 115, Maximum IP Trunks: 1-30 depending on traffic.
- Option 120, Compression Resources: Compression is
recommended with IP trunks to conserve bandwidth.
- Option 132, DSP Configuration Option: Business 1, Business 2,
Hotel, Analog 1, Analog 2, or Analog 3.
Does the DSP Configuration match the hardware installed and
Compression Resources purchased? It may be necessary to
purchase an additional DSP card(s) to satisfy DSP Configuration
and Compression requirements. For more information, see “DSP
Configuration Options” on page 12.

294
 Advanced Troubleshooting and Repair

ˆ Form 13 Trunk Circuit Descriptor

- There should be a descriptor number with Trunk Type T1 E&M for
the IP Trunks. All IP trunks enabled should be programmed here
and have a Comment identifying them as IP trunks for future
reference.
ˆ Form 15 Dial In Trunk
- Ensure that COS 7 is programmed for the IP Trunks along with the
correct Circuit Descriptor (CDN) that was created in Form 13.
Verify other settings (COR, Ten, N, M, X) and add a Comment
identifying the trunks as IP trunks for future reference.
- Enable QSIG Supplementary Services.
ˆ Form 16 Trunk Groups
- Ensure there is a trunk group for the IP Trunks.
ˆ Form 23 ARS - Route Definition
- Ensure that there is a route for every remote node networked using
IP trunks. For example, if there is a 3300 ICP and another
SX-200 ICP in the network, then there should be two routes.
Note: When the cursor is on a route for an IP Trunk, a softkey labelled SHOW
IP will appear. Press the softkey to list all routes programmed for IP Trunks.
Ensure that Concurrent Call, Compression, Remote Profile and IP Node are
all programmed. If the far end is a 3300, Remote Profile must be set to 1.

ˆ Form 26 ARS - Digit Strings

- Make sure there is a digit string programmed which will route calls
(see Form 23 for the correct Route number) to the remote ICP
systems.
ˆ Form 48 - Voice Networking
- Make sure that the correct IP Node is entered. Each IP-PBX (node)
has a unique IP Node number that all the other IP-PBXs must have
in their programming. The form lists the local site as Bay 1 with no
IP address; the other sites have no Bay association. Comments
should be entered with information such as the location and
IP-PBX type. Knowing the amount of traffic expected to each
remote node will determine what the Max Calls field should be set
at to avoid congestion.
Note: MAX CALLS must be greater than zero (the default); otherwise, no
calls are allowed to the node.

295
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Considerations:
a. Is one IP Trunk route the primary route used, and if the far end
node is down, will it use the other IP Trunking Route (assumes a
three node network)? If so, then Max calls could be set to 24 on
both routes since you will only use one route at any given time.
b. If both routes will be used and traffic is assumed to be higher
(e.g., eight calls per route at any given time), then the Max
calls would more likely be set to 12 or lower.

IP Check List
Refer to “Maintaining Voice Quality of Service” in SX-200 ICP
Documentation for more information on the subject matter discussed in
this section.
ˆ Communicate with the engineer responsible for remote node(s) and
gather information about the IP Trunk requirements.
ˆ Gather information about the “pipe” between your location and the far
location.
- Is it ADSL? ADSL has fast download speeds but slow upload speeds,
plus it usually relies on DHCP to provide local addressing, which
affects the programming in CDE (SX-200 ICP must have a fixed IP
Address that won't change at the far end IP Trunk connections).
- What is the bandwidth? How much of the bandwidth will be used for
data? Are there any times of the day when the bandwidth is utilized
more than other times? Is the pipe ever removed for general
maintenance or is it susceptible to weather or environmental impacts
(anything that will affect your ability to provide proper service). Do I
need Compression Options based on my findings (refer to the CDE
Checklist at beginning of the section)?
ˆ Gather the IP Addresses for the far end. Ping from both ends to ensure
there is a connection.
ˆ Using ARS, get the far end to call you and you call them.
- Refer to SMDR to get information on what you are dialing and what
is being dialed from the other end.

296
 Appendix A
Default Database Values
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

298
 Default Database Values

Default Database
Table 60: CDE Forms
FORM NUMBER FORM NAME
01 System Configuration
02 Feature Access Codes
03 COS Define
04 System Options/System Timers
05 Tenant Interconnection Table
06 Tenant Night Switching Control
07 Console Assignments
08 Attendant LDN Assignments
09 Desktop Device Assignments
10 Pickup Groups
11 Data Circuit Descriptor
12 Data Assignment
13 Trunk Circuit Descriptors
14 Non-Dial-In Trunks
15 Dial-In Trunks
16 Trunk Groups
17 Hunt Groups
18 Miscellaneous System Ports
19 Call Rerouting Table
20 ARS: COR Group Definition
21 ARS: Day Zone Definition
22 ARS: Modified Digit Table
23 ARS: Route Definition
24 ARS: Route Lists
25 ARS: Route Plans
26 ARS: Digit Strings
27 ARS: Maximum Dialed Digits
28 Form Access Restriction Def'n.
29 DTE Profile
30 Device Interconnection Table
31 System Abbreviated Dial Entry
(Page 1 of 2)

299
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 60: CDE Forms (continued)

FORM NUMBER FORM NAME
32 CDE Data Print
33 Account Code Entry
34 Directed IO
35 Global Find Access Code
36 Modem Assignment
37 Guest Rm SUPERSET Keys Template
38 ACD Keys Template
39 ACD Agent Groups
40 ACD Supervisors
41 ACD Paths
42 T1 Link Descriptors
43 T1 Link Assignment
44 Network Synchronization
45 Not Used
46 Key System Toll Control
47 DHCP Parameters
48 Voice Networking
49 Voice mail
50 Mailboxes
51 Voice mail Distribution Lists
52 Email
53 Bay Location Assignment
54 Calling Pary Number
55 Digit Translation Table

(Page 2 of 2)

300
 Default Database Values

Default Database Values

This section lists the values in the default CDE database. Only forms with
data in them are listed.
Note: The controller is identified as the “IP Bay” in some CDE forms. The
default bay number of the IP bay is bay 1. However, when an SX-200 EL/ML
database is installed to migrate the system to an SX-200 ICP, the IP bay
becomes bay number 8.

Form 01 - System Configuration

BAY SLT CCT PROGRAMMED COMMENTS
01 01 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD
01 02 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD
01 03 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD
01 04 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD
01 05 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD
01 06 IP TRUNK CARD IP TRUNK CARD
01 07 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD
01 08 --- ---
01 09 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD
01 10 IP LINE CARD IP LINE CARD
01 11 VOICE MAIL CARD VOICE MAIL CARD
01 12 VOICE MAIL CARD VOICE MAIL CARD
01 13 ONBOARD ASU ONBOARD ASU

Form 02 - Feature Access Codes

ACCESS
FEATURE FEATURE NAME
CODE
01 Account Code Access *01
02 Auto-Answer Activation
03 Call Forwarding - All Calls *03
04 Call Forwarding - Internal Only *04
05 Call Forwarding - External Only *05
06 Call Forwarding - I'm Here *06
07 Call Forwarding - Cancel I'm Here *07
08 Dial Call Pickup *08
09 Directed Call Pickup *09
10 Do Not Disturb *10
11 Extension General Attendant Access 0
(Page 1 of 3)

301
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

ACCESS
FEATURE FEATURE NAME
CODE
12 Paging Access To Default Zone(s) *12
13 Paging Access To Specific Zones *13
14 TAFAS - Any *14
15 TAFAS - Local Tenant *15
16 Hold Pickup Access (Attendant Hold Slots) *16
17 Console Lockout Access Code
18 Maintenance Functions (Test Line)
19 Direct Inward System Access
20 Callback Busy <<single digit>>
21 Call Hold *21
22 Call Hold Retrieve (Local) *22
23 Call Hold Retrieve (Remote) *23
24 Abbreviated Dial Access *24
25 Clear All Features *25
26 SUPERSET Telephone Loopback Test
27 Tone Demonstration
28 ADL Call Setup
29 ADL Disconnect
30 Last Number Redial *30
31 Executive Busy Override <<single digit>>
32 Automatic Wake-up
33 Call Park *33
34 Node ID
35 Maid In Room
36 SUPERSET Room Status Display
37 Direct To ARS
38 UCD Agent Login/Logout
39 Analogue Network Accept Callers Extension
40 SUPERSET Maid In Room Status Display
41 Send Message *41
42 Call Message Sender of Oldest Message *42
43 Callback - No Answer
44 ACD Login/Logout
45 Silent Monitoring
46 Flash over Trunk
47 Program Feature Key
48 Key System - Direct Paging *48
(Page 2 of 3)

302
 Default Database Values

ACCESS
FEATURE FEATURE NAME
CODE
49 Key System - Group Page - Meet Me Answer *49
50 Key System - Direct CO Line Select
51 Key System - Store Personal Speed Call *51
52 Key System - Retrieve Personal Speed Call *52
53 Double Flash over Trunk
54 Analog Network Accept Call Forward Data
55 Analog Network Accept Call Forward Reason
56 Headset Mode On/Off
57 Call Park Orbit Retrieve *57
58 IP Set Registration PIN ***
59 IP Set Replacement PIN ###
60 IP Set Language Selection
61 Disable Twin Phone
62 Call Park Remote *62
63 Call Park and Page - Telephone *63
64 Call Park and Page - PA *64
65 Phonebook *65
66 Open Door *66
67 Digit Translation Table Access
68 Secure Hot swap/unswap
(Page 3 of 3)

Form 03 - Class of Service

COS6 - VOICE MAIL
COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
OPTION NUMBER

COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS1 - IP SET

COS
COS2 - ONS

OPTION / NAME

100 Attendant Bell Off X

101 Attendant O/G Restriction/Room Status Setup X
102 Attendant Display of System Alarms X
103 Attendant DISA Code Setup X
104 Attendant Flexible Night Service Setup X
105 Attendant Guest Room Key X
106 Attendant New Call Tone X X
(Page 1 of 9)

303
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

COS6 - VOICE MAIL

COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
OPTION NUMBER

COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS1 - IP SET
COS

COS2 - ONS
OPTION / NAME

107 Attendant Automatic Call Forward - No Answer X

108 Attendant Audible Alarm X
109 Attendant Serial Call X
110 Attendant Abbr. Dial Confidential Number Display X
111 Attendant Abbreviated Dial Programming X X
112 Attendant Station Busy-Out X
113 Attendant Call Block Key X
114 Attendant Trunk Busy-Out X
115 Attendant-Timed Recall (No Ans) 5 -240 s; 0=Disable 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
116 Attendant-Timed Recall (Hold) 5 - 240 s; 0=Disable 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
117 Attendant-Timed Recall (Camp-On) 5 - 240 s; 0=Disable 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
118 Attendant Call Forward - No Answer Timer 10 - 240 s. 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
119 Attendant Tone Signaling X X
120 Attendant Conference Disable X
121 Attendant Station Do Not Disturb X
122 Setup Time/Date
123 Attendant Call Forward Setup and Cancel X X
124 Attendant Hold Position Security
125 Attendant Multi-New Call Tone X X
126 Apply Key Line Conference Warning Tone X X X X X X X
150 Sub-Attendant Station Setup Advisory Messages X
151 RESERVED
152 RESERVED
153 RESERVED
200 Account Code, Forced Entry - External Calls
201 Account Code, Forced Entry - Long Distance Calls
202 Alarm Call
203 Broker’s Call
204 Call Block Applies (Room To Room)
205 Flash For Waiting Call
(Page 2 of 9)

304
 Default Database Values

COS6 - VOICE MAIL

COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
OPTION NUMBER

COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS1 - IP SET
COS

COS2 - ONS
OPTION / NAME

206 Call Forwarding - Busy X X X X

207 Call Forwarding - No Answer X X X X
208 Call Forwarding - External X X X X
209 Call Forwarding – Always X X X X
210 Call Forwarding Inhibit on Dial-In Trunks
211 Call Hold and Retrieve Access X X X X
212 Can Flash If Talking to an Incoming Trunk X X X X X
213 Can Flash If Talking to an Outgoing Trunk X X X X
214 Cannot Dial a Trunk after Flashing
215 Cannot Dial a Trunk if Holding or in Conference with One
216 Data Security X
217 Direct To ARS
218 Directed Call Pickup X X X X
219 Discriminating Dial Tone X X X X
220 Do Not Disturb X X X X
221 Clear All Features X
222 Call Forward Inhibit on Hold Timeout X X X
223 Flash Disable
224 Flash for Attendant
225 Hold Pickup (Attendant Paged Access) X X
226 Inward Restriction (DID)
227 Lockout Alarm Applies
228 Manual Line (Dial 0 Hotline)
229 Voice Mail Port X X
230 Message Register Overflow Alarm
231 Message Waiting Setup - Bell
232 Message Waiting Setup - Lamp X
233 Never a Consultee
234 Never a Forwardee
235 Originate Only
(Page 3 of 9)

305
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

COS6 - VOICE MAIL

COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
OPTION NUMBER

COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS1 - IP SET
COS

COS2 - ONS
OPTION / NAME

236 Outgoing Trunk Callback

237 Outgoing Trunk Camp-On
238 Override Security X
239 Priority Dial 0 X
240 Line Privacy X X X X X X X
241 Receive Only
242 Repeated Camp-On Beep
243 Non-Busy Extension
244 Room Status Applies
245 Abbreviated Dialing Access X X X X X X
246 SMDR - Extended Record
247 SMDR - Record Meter Pulses
248 TAFAS Any Access X X
249 TAFAS Access Tenant X X
250 TAFAS Access During Day Service X X
251 Transfer Dial Tone X X X X X
252 Broker’s Call with Transfer
253 Call Forward - Don’t Answer Timer (2 - 6 Rings) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
254 Call Hold Recall Timer (PBX Telephones) 0 - 10 Minutes 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
255 Repeated Camp-On Beeps Timer (5 - 15 Seconds) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
256 UCD Music On Hold Timer (0 - 50 Minutes) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
257 Flash Over Trunk
258 Display Prime as Forwarder X X X X X X X
259 Message Sending X X X X X
260 Internal / External Split Call Forwarding
261 ONS Voice Mail Port
262 Ignore Forward Busy with Free Appearance X X
263 Delay Ring Timer (2 - 6 Rings) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
264 Half Fwd NA timer for DID call with VM msg on
265 Voice Mail System Speed Dial Index (0-255)
(Page 4 of 9)

306
 Default Database Values

COS6 - VOICE MAIL

COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
OPTION NUMBER

COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS1 - IP SET
COS

COS2 - ONS
OPTION / NAME

266 Camp-on before Forward on Busy

267 Softkey Support for Voice Mail X X
268 Record a Call in Voice Mail
269 Record a Call: Start Recording Automatically
270 Record a Call: Start Recording on Hangup
271 Privacy Released at Start of Call
272 Guest Suite Extension
273 Display Held Caller ID to ONS/CLASS
274 ONS Ring Group Member
275 Single Button Transfer to Voice mail X X
276 Twin Phone
277 Automatic Mailbox Creation X X X
278 Intercom Mode
279 Display Account codes on Phone X X X
280 PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone X
300 Automatic Callback
301 Camp-On X X X X X
302 Flash-in Conference X X X X
303 Paging Zone 1 Access X X X X
304 Paging Zone 2 Access
305 Paging Zone 3 Access
306 Paging Zone 4 Access
307 Paging Zone 5 Access
308 Paging Zone 6 Access
309 Paging Zone 7 Access
310 Paging Zone 8 Access
311 Paging Zone 9 Access
312 Paging Default (0 - 9) (0 Gives All Enabled Zones) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
313 CO Trunk to CO Trunk Connect X X
314 CO Trunk to TIE Trunk Connect X X
(Page 5 of 9)

307
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

COS6 - VOICE MAIL

COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
OPTION NUMBER

COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS1 - IP SET
COS

COS2 - ONS
OPTION / NAME

315 CO Trunk to DID Trunk Connect X X

316 TIE Trunk to TIE Trunk Connect X X
317 TIE Trunk to DID Trunk Connect X X
318 DID Trunk to DID Trunk Connect X X
319 Extension Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect X X
320 Transparent Multi-Console Operation
321 Ignore Call Forward After Transfer
322 Confirm Wakeup by Off-hook
323 RESERVED
324 RESERVED
325 RESERVED
326 Account Code, Forced Entry - Data Internal Calls
327 Account Code, Forced Entry - Data External Calls
328 Account Code, Forced Entry - Data Long Distance Calls
329 RESERVED
330 RESERVED
331 RESERVED
400 Contact Monitor
401 Call Park X X X X
402 Long Loop (Off-Premise Extensions Only)
403 Trunk Recall Partial Inhibit
404 Recording Failure to Hangup Timer (1 - 255 Seconds) 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
405 Can Initiate Call Monitor
406 Allow To Be Monitored (0=dis, 1=no beep, 2=beeps) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
407 RESERVED
500 Override X
501 Override Announce
502 Display ANI/DNIS/CLASS Information X X X X
503 Display CLASS Name X X X
504 SUPERSET 420 Optional Class Display
(Page 6 of 9)

308
 Default Database Values

COS6 - VOICE MAIL

COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
OPTION NUMBER

COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS1 - IP SET
COS

COS2 - ONS
OPTION / NAME

505 ONS Stations Support CLASS X

506 ONS Positive Disconnect 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
507 Station/Set: Allow My Number to be Displayed X X X X X X X
508 Station/Set: Show Internal Numbers on My Phone X
509 Display Caller ID for Non-Prime Lines X X
510 ONS Stations Support CLASS Visual Call Waiting X
511 COV Voice Mail Displays Calling
600 Telephone - Auto-Answer
601 Telephone - Auto-Hold Disable
602 Telephone - Background Music X
603 Telephone - Disconnect Alarm
604 Telephone - Automatic Outgoing Line
605 Telephone - Message Program
606 Telephone - Enhanced Answering Position
607 Telephone - Associated Modem Line
608 Telephone - Room Status Display
609 Telephone - Night Service Switching X X X
610 Telephone - Guest Room Template (0 - 3) (DN) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
611 Telephone - Limited New Call Ring X X
612 Telephone - Headset Operation
613 Display ANI Information Only X X X X
614 Telephone - Handset Volume Saved X X
615 Telephone - Offhook Voice Announce X X
616 Alarm Monitor Point
617 Immediate Off Hook Alarm
Ringer

Ringer

Ringer

Ringer

Ringer

Ringer

Ringer

618 Alarm Audio Level for Sets

619 Direct Speak@Ease Access

620 SUPERSET Telephone - Max Call Logs Allowed <0-20> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
621 Call Logging - Multiple CO/DTS
(Page 7 of 9)

309
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

COS6 - VOICE MAIL

COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
OPTION NUMBER

COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS1 - IP SET
COS

COS2 - ONS
OPTION / NAME

650 ACD - Agent Template (0 - 3; 0 = Disable) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

651 ACD - Supervisor Template (0 - 3; 0 = Disable) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
652 ACD - Senior Supervisor Template (0 - 3; 0 = Disable) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
653 ACD - Agent Always Auto-Answer
654 ACD - Display Path Always
655 Allow Continuous Monitor
680 Key System - Direct CO Access
681 Key Set/Sub Att. - Call Hold Notify Timer (0 -600 s)
Key System - Auto Answer - Internal Calls (For SUPERSET
682
3DN and 4DN only)
683 Key System - Direct Paging Handsfree Answerback X X X
684 Can Make All Set Page X X X
685 Can Receive All Set Page X X X
686 Group Page Includes Overhead Paging
687 All Set Page Includes Overhead Paging
688 IP Set Requires Compression
689 DTS/CO Line Transfer Call Handling
690 Hold And Page
691 Telephone - Day/Night1 Switching
692 Secure Hot Swapping
700 SMDR - Does Not Apply
701 No Dial Tone X
702 SMDR - Overwrite Buffer X X X X X X X
703 Message Register Applies
704 Incoming / Internal Modem Pooling Access
705 Automatic Overflow From Attendant
706 RESERVED
707 RESERVED
708 RESERVED
709 Follow External Call Forward
(Page 8 of 9)

310
 Default Database Values

COS6 - VOICE MAIL

COS5 - LS TRUNK
COS4 - CONSOLE
OPTION NUMBER

COS7 - IP TRUNK
COS3- SUB-ATT.
COS1 - IP SET
COS

COS2 - ONS
OPTION / NAME

710 RESERVED
800 ANI Applies
801 Incoming Trunk Call Rotary X
802 Limited Wait for Dial Tone X X
803 SMDR - Drop Calls < n Digits (0... 11, 0 = disable) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
804 SMDR - Drop Incomplete Outgoing Calls
805 Trunk No Dial Tone Alarm
806 SMDR - Record Incoming Calls
807 SMDR - Display Private Speedcall
808 Special DISA
809 Standard Ring Applies
810 DISA During Night Service Only
811 ANI/DNIS Trunk X X
812 Loop Start Trunk to ACD Path Connect
813 Delay ONS Ring - Wait for Network Name (0-6 s) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
814 SMDR - Record ANI/DNIS/CLASS X
815 DTS/CO LINE KEY Honors Forwarding
816 CENTREX Flash over Trunk
900 Data Station Queuing
901 DTRX Herald
902 DTRX Message Code
903 DTRX Message Code Text
904 DTRX Complete Message Text
905 DTRX Herald Text Select (1- 4) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
906 DATA SMDR - Does Not Apply
907 DATA SMDR - Extended Record
908 DATA SMDR - Overwrite Buffer
(Page 9 of 9)

311
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Form 04 - System Options

OPTION
SYSTEM OPTIONS STATUS
NUMBER
01 Clock Format (example 16:00, 4:00, 4:00a) 12HR AM
02 Message Lamp Test Enable DISABLED
03 Single Paging Amplifier DISABLED
04 Message Waiting & Message Register Clear Print DISABLED
05 Verified Account Codes DISABLED
06 Analogue Networking SMDR DISABLED
07 Cancel 24-hour Message Waiting DISABLED
08 Five Digit SMDR DISABLED
09 Attendant Call Block DISABLED
10 Attendant Conference Beep DISABLED
11 Automatic Wake-up DISABLED
12 Automatic Wake-up Alarm DISABLED
13 Automatic Wake-up Print DISABLED
14 Automatic Wake-up Music DISABLED
15 Data Demultiplexer DISABLED
16 IP Set Voice Encryption ENABLED
17 Discriminating Ringing ENABLED
18 Discriminating Ringing Always DISABLED
20 Holiday Messages DISABLED
21 Incoming to Outgoing Call Forward DISABLED
22 Last Party Clear - Dial Tone DISABLED
23 Message Reg. Count Additional Supervisions DISABLED
24 Message Register Audit DISABLED
25 Message Register Zero After Audit DISABLED
26 No Overlap Outpulsing ENABLED
27 Room Status Audit DISABLED
28 SMDR Indicate Long Calls DISABLED
29 Telephone Last Number Redial ENABLED
31 Satellite PBX DISABLED
32 Outgoing Call Restriction DISABLED
33 Room Status DISABLED
34 Auto Room Status Conversion/Auto Wake-up Print DISABLED
35 DSS/BLF Call Pickup DISABLED
36 End of Dial Character ( # ) DISABLED
37 Calibrated Flash DISABLED
38 Switch-Hook Flash ENABLED
39 DATA SMDR Indicate Long Calls DISABLED
40 Message Register Follows Talker DISABLED
42 Silent Monitoring DISABLED
43 ACD Silent Monitoring Beeps DISABLED
44 ACD Reports DISABLED
(Page 1 of 3)

312
 Default Database Values

OPTION
SYSTEM OPTIONS STATUS
NUMBER
45 Disable PMS Logs ENABLED
46 Rotary Dial Digit Translation Plan 0-3 0
47 ARS Unknown Digit Length Time-out 2-60 seconds 5
48 Limited Wait For Dial Tone 1-15 seconds 5
49 Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer 10-60 seconds 20
50 Dialing Conflict Timer 2-10 seconds 5
51 Final Ring Time-out 1-30 minutes 1
52 Minimum Flash Timer 20-50 ms ( 10 ms inc ) 20
53 Maximum Flash Timer 20-150 ms ( 10 ms inc ) 100
54 DISA Answer Timer 1-8 seconds 8
55 Account Code Length Variable or 2-12 digits 6
56 Auto Room Stat Conver/Wakeup Print timer(HH:MM) 00:00
57 Vacant/Reserved Room Default Call Restriction INTERNAL
58 Occupied Room Default Call Restriction INTERNAL
59 Receivers Reserved For Non-Auto-Attendant Use UNKNOWN
60 Tone Plan NA
61 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #1 (0..5) 3
62 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #2 (0..5) 3
63 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #3 (0..5) 3
64 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #4 (0..5) 3
65 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #5 (0..5) 3
66 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #6 (0..5) 3
67 Class Receivers in Spine Bay #7 (0..5) 3
69 DTMF ON Timer 5-15 ( in 10 ms inc ) 9
70 DTMF OFF Timer 5-15 ( in 10 ms inc ) 9
71 Slot 10 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays) 2
72 Slot 11 FIM Capacity (2 or 3 Bays) 2
73 Advance to Daylight Savings Time ( mm:dd:hh ) 00:01:00
76 Go Back to Standard Time ( mm:dd:hh ) 00:01:00
79 Daylight - Standard Time difference (30-240min) 60
80 MyAdministrator Access DISABLED
81 Enter offset from GMT (+/-hh:mm) -05:00
82 Use DSP Echo Canceller DISABLED
84 Multiple Guest Suite Phones DISABLED
85 Speak@Ease Integration DISABLED
86 PRI Card: Q.sig DISABLED
87 Record a Call DISABLED
88 TAPI Desktop (0..50 in increments of 5) 0
89 Class Functionality for ONS Sets DISABLED
90 ACD Real Time Events DISABLED
91 PRI Card: NFAS DISABLED
92 PRI Card: D Channel Backup DISABLED
93 PRI Card: Remote LAN Access DISABLED
(Page 2 of 3)

313
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

OPTION
SYSTEM OPTIONS STATUS
NUMBER
94 PRI Card: Min/Max DISABLED
95 PRI Card: Auto Min/Max DISABLED
96 Number of Links (0-8) 0
97 Support Softkey Access to Voicemail DISABLED
98 Support 3DN, 4DN and 400 series Set Types DISABLED
99 Fax Tone Detection DISABLED
100 Mitel Options Password 18642413
101 System Identity Code 17591
102 Feature Level (0..99) 0
103 Maximum Devices 32
104 Maximum ACD Agents 0
105 Mitel Application Interface DISABLED
106 Automated Attendant ENABLED
107 Lodging DISABLED
108 Property Management System DISABLED
109 Remote Software Download ENABLED
110 Maximum BNIC Cards (0..40) 0
111 Maximum BONS Cards (0..40) 0
112 SS4000 Series Sets ENABLED
113 Centralized Attendant/VoiceMail DISABLED
114 Maximum IP Sets 20
115 Maximum IP Trunks 0
120 Number of Compression Resources (0-24) 0
121 Voicemail License for Bilingual Prompts DISABLED
122 Voicemail License for Personal Contact Numbers DISABLED
123 Voicemail License for DID Server DISABLED
124 Voicemail Property Management System DISABLED
125 Licensed Embedded Voicemail Boxes (0-748) 20
126 Email Messaging DISABLED
127 Autoselect Park Orbits ENABLED
128 Phonebook DISABLED
129 Attendant Park and Page Key DISABLED
130 Paging Tone ENABLED
131 PC (2nd) Port on IP Phone DISABLED
132 DSP Configuration Option BUSINESS1
133 TDM Bays (0-2) 0
134 Voicemail Recorded Announcement Device DISABLED
135 Voicemail Control of MWI by DTMF Tones DISABLED
136 Dual Function Key Timer (1-5) 2
137 Mark SMTP Forwarded Voicemails as Read ENABLED
138 Country Variant For Disconnect Tone Control DISABLED
(Page 3 of 3)

314
 Default Database Values

Form 05 - Tenant Interconnection Table

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
01 O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
02 * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
03 * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
04 * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
05 * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
06 * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
07 * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
08 * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
09 * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
10 * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
11 * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
12 * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * * *
13 * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * * *
14 * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * * *
15 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * * *
16 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * * *
17 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * * *
18 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * * *
19 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * * *
20 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * * *
21 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * * *
22 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * * *
23 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O * *
24 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O *
25 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * O

315
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Form 06 - Tenant Night Switching Table

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
01 O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02 . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
03 . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
04 . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
05 . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
06 . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
07 . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
08 . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
09 . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . . .
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . . .
18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . . .
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . . .
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . . .
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . . .
22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . . .
23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O . .
24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O .
25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O

Form 07 - Console Assignments

BAY SLT CCT EXT NUM COS COR TENANT COMMENTS CESID
1 13 02 198 04 01 01

316
 Default Database Values

Form 09 - Desktop Devices Definition

COMMENTS
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE PAGE NAME ASSOC
/CESID/MAC
1/01/01 1 100 1 1 5220 01
1/01/02 1 101 1 1 5220 01
1/01/03 1 102 1 1 5220 01
1/01/04 1 103 1 1 5220 01
1/01/05 1 104 1 1 5220 01
1/01/06 1 105 1 1 5220 01
1/01/07 1 106 1 1 5220 01
1/01/08 1 107 1 1 5220 01
1/01/09 1 108 1 1 5220 01
1/01/10 1 109 1 1 5220 01
1/01/11 1 110 1 1 5220 01
1/01/12 1 111 1 1 5220 01
1/01/13 1 112 1 1 5220 01
1/01/14 1 113 1 1 5220 01
1/01/15 1 114 1 1 5220 01
1/01/16 1 115 1 1 5220 01
1/01/17 1 116 1 1 5220 01
1/01/18 1 117 1 1 5220 01
1/01/19 1 118 1 1 5220 01
1/01/20 1 119 1 1 5220 01
1/01/21 5020
1/01/22 5020
1/01/23 5020
1/01/24 5020
1/02/01 5020
1/02/02 5020
1/02/03 5020
1/02/04 5020
1/02/05 5020
1/02/06 5020
1/02/07 5020
1/02/08 5020
1/02/09 5020
1/02/10 5020
1/02/11 5020
1/02/12 5020
1/02/13 5020
(Page 1 of 6)

317
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

COMMENTS
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE PAGE NAME ASSOC
/CESID/MAC
1/02/14 5020
1/02/15 5020
1/02/16 5020
1/02/17 5020
1/02/18 5020
1/02/19 5020
1/02/20 5020
1/02/21 5020
1/02/22 5020
1/02/23 5020
1/02/24 5020
1/03/01 5020
1/03/02 5020
1/03/03 5020
1/03/04 5020
1/03/05 5020
1/03/06 5020
1/03/07 5020
1/03/08 5020
1/03/09 5020
1/03/10 5020
1/03/11 5020
1/03/12 5020
1/03/13 5020
1/03/14 5020
1/03/15 5020
1/03/16 5020
1/03/17 5020
1/03/18 5020
1/03/19 5020
1/03/20 5020
1/03/21 5020
1/03/22 5020
1/03/23 5020
1/03/24 5020
1/04/01 5020
1/04/02 5020
1/04/03 5020
1/04/04 5020
(Page 2 of 6)

318
 Default Database Values

COMMENTS
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE PAGE NAME ASSOC
/CESID/MAC
1/04/05 5020
1/04/06 5020
1/04/07 5020
1/04/08 5020
1/04/09 5020
1/04/10 5020
1/04/11 5020
1/04/12 5020
1/04/13 5020
1/04/14 5020
1/04/15 5020
1/04/16 5020
1/04/17 5020
1/04/18 5020
1/04/19 5020
1/04/20 5020
1/04/21 5020
1/04/22 5020
1/04/23 5020
1/04/24 5020
1/05/01 5020
1/05/02 5020
1/05/03 5020
1/05/04 5020
1/05/05 5020
1/05/06 5020
1/05/07 5020
1/05/08 5020
1/05/09 5020
1/05/10 5020
1/05/11 5020
1/05/12 5020
1/05/13 5020
1/05/14 5020
1/05/15 5020
1/05/16 5020
1/05/17 5020
1/05/18 5020
1/05/19 5020
(Page 3 of 6)

319
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

COMMENTS
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE PAGE NAME ASSOC
/CESID/MAC
1/05/20 5020
1/05/21 5020
1/05/22 5020
1/05/23 5020
1/05/24 5020
1/07/01 5020
1/07/02 5020
1/07/03 5020
1/07/04 5020
1/07/05 5020
1/07/06 5020
1/07/07 5020
1/07/08 5020
1/07/09 5020
1/07/10 5020
1/07/11 5020
1/07/12 5020
1/07/13 5020
1/07/14 5020
1/07/15 5020
1/07/16 5020
1/07/17 5020
1/07/18 5020
1/07/19 5020
1/07/20 5020
1/07/21 5020
1/07/22 5020
1/07/23 5020
1/07/24 5020
1/09/01 5020
1/09/02 5020
1/09/03 5020
1/09/04 5020
1/09/05 5020
1/09/06 5020
1/09/07 5020
1/09/08 5020
1/09/09 5020
1/09/10 5020
(Page 4 of 6)

320
 Default Database Values

COMMENTS
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE PAGE NAME ASSOC
/CESID/MAC
1/09/11 5020
1/09/12 5020
1/09/13 5020
1/09/14 5020
1/09/15 5020
1/09/16 5020
1/09/17 5020
1/09/18 5020
1/09/19 5020
1/09/20 5020
1/09/21 5020
1/09/22 5020
1/09/23 5020
1/09/24 5020
1/10/01 5020
1/10/02 5020
1/10/03 5020
1/10/04 5020
1/10/05 5020
1/10/06 5020
1/10/07 5020
1/10/08 5020
1/10/09 5020
1/10/10 5020
1/10/11 5020
1/10/12 5020
1/10/13 5020
1/10/14 5020
1/10/15 5020
1/10/16 5020
1/10/17 5020
1/10/18 5020
1/10/19 5020
1/10/20 5020
1/10/21 5020
1/10/22 5020
1/10/23 5020
1/10/24 5020
1/11/01 1 301 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 1
(Page 5 of 6)

321
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

COMMENTS
B/S/CCT TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE PAGE NAME ASSOC
/CESID/MAC
1/11/02 1 302 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 2
1/11/03 1 303 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 3
1/11/04 1 304 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 4
1/11/05 1 305 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 5
1/11/06 1 306 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 6
1/11/07 1 307 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 7
1/11/08 1 308 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 8
1/11/09 1 309 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 9
1/11/10 1 310 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 10
1/11/11 1 311 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 11
1/11/12 1 312 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 12
1/12/01 1 313 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 13
1/12/02 1 314 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 14
1/12/03 1 315 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 15
1/12/04 1 316 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 16
1/12/05 1 317 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 17
1/12/06 1 318 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 18
1/12/07 1 319 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 19
1/12/08 1 320 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 20
1/12/09 1 321 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 21
1/12/10 1 322 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 22
1/12/11 1 323 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 23
1/12/12 1 324 6 1 VMAIL VMAIL 24
1/13/01 1 199 3 1 Sub 01
1/13/03 1 200 2 1 Stn
1/13/04 1 201 2 1 Stn
1/13/05 Stn
1/13/06 Stn
(Page 6 of 6)

322
 Default Database Values

Form 09 - Desktop Line Appearance Definition

EXT TRK
KEY TYPE DIR RING SEC DSS LABEL R#
NUM NUM
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 100
02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 101

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 102

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 103

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 104

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9
(Page 1 of 4)

323
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

EXT TRK
KEY TYPE DIR RING SEC DSS LABEL R#
NUM NUM
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 105
02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 106

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 107

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 108

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 109

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9
(Page 2 of 4)

324
 Default Database Values

EXT TRK
KEY TYPE DIR RING SEC DSS LABEL R#
NUM NUM
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 110
02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 111

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 112

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 113

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 114

02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9
(Page 3 of 4)

325
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

EXT TRK
KEY TYPE DIR RING SEC DSS LABEL R#
NUM NUM
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 115
02 CO Line In/Out Immed No 1 9
04 CO Line In/Out Immed No 2 9
06 CO Line In/Out Immed No 3 9
08 CO Line In/Out Immed No 4 9
10 CO Line In/Out Immed No 5 9
12 CO Line In/Out Immed No 6 9

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 116

*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 117
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 118
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 119
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 301
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 302
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 303
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 304
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 305
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 306
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 307
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 308
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 309
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 310
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 311
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 312
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 313
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 314
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 315
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 316
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 317
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 318
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 319
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 320
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 321
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 322
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 323
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 324
*01 Prime In/Out Immed No 199
02 Recall Immed RECALL
04 Hold Pos
06 Hold Pos
08 Hold Pos
(Page 4 of 4)

326
 Default Database Values

Form 09 - Paging Groups

[PAGING GROUP: 01] [ ] EXTN BAY SLT CCT COMMENTS
100 01 01 01
101 01 01 02
102 01 01 03
103 01 01 04
104 01 01 05
105 01 01 06
106 01 01 07
107 01 01 08
108 01 01 09
109 01 01 10

Form 10 - Pickup Groups

****** CDE DATA PRINT OPTION 10 FORM IS EMPTY ******

Form 11 - Data Circuit Descriptor

[DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1] PARAMETER VALUE
Session Inactivity Disconnect Timer 0 - 255 minutes 0
Guard Timer 0 - 99 seconds 2
Minimum Baud Rate 110
Default Baud Rate 9600
Maximum Baud Rate 19200
Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called NO
DTR Off Disconnect Timer 0 - 99 seconds 5
DTR To CTS Delay Timer 0 - 9900 msec ( 100 msec inc ) 100
DTR Forced High NO
RTS Forced High NO
DSR Is Held High When Device Is Idle YES
CTS Is Held High When Device Is Idle YES
Originate A DTRX Call With A Low->High Transition of DTR NO
Action Taken If The Idle DTE Has DTR Low ( Auto Answer ) REFUSE
Pooled Modem Communication Established Indicator DCD
First Modem Tone ( 2025 Hz, 2100 Hz, 2225 Hz ) 2025Hz
Second Modem Tone ( 2025 Hz, 2100 Hz, 2225 Hz ) 2225Hz
ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed ( Auto Baud ) YES
ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud NO
(Page 1 of 2)

327
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

[DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1] PARAMETER VALUE

ASYNC: Flow Control XON/OFF
ASYNC: XON Character ( 0 - 127, decimal value of ASCII code ) 17
ASYNC: XOFF Character ( 0 - 127, decimal value of ASCII code ) 19
ASYNC: Break Key Function SYSATT
ASYNC: PBX Attention Character ( 0 - 127 ) 4
ASYNC: Parity ODD
ASYNC: Character Length ( 7 - 8 ; 8 bits implies no parity ) 7
ASYNC: Number of Stop Bits ( 1 - 2 ) 1
ASYNC: Autobaud To Host Character 1 ( 0 - 127 ) 13
ASYNC: Autobaud To Host Character 2 ( 0 - 127 ) 0
ASYNC: Delay Between Autobaud Characters 0-1270 msec (10msec inc) 100
DS2100: Operating Mode ( ASYNC, SYNC ) ASYNC.
SYNC: Rate Adaptation Scheme ( MiNET, X.31 ) MiNET
SYNC: Clock Source ( INTERNAL, SYSTEM, TX EXT, TX & RX EXT ) INTERNAL
(Page 2 of 2)

Form 11 - Data Circuit Descriptor Review

****** CDE DATA PRINT OPTION 11* FORM IS EMPTY ******

Form 12 - Data Assignment Table

NUM

COR
COS

CDN

TYPE HOTLINE COMMENTS

CCT
BAY

TEN

DTE
EXT

AVL
SLT

1 13 01
1 13 02
1 13 19
1 13 20
1 13 21
1 13 22
1 13 23
1 13 24
1 13 25
1 13 26
1 13 27
1 13 28

328
 Default Database Values

Form 13 - Trunk Circuit Descriptor

[ AMB TRUNK: 1 ] OPTION NAME [SUPERVISION PARAMETER] STATUS
Reverse to Idle NO
Far-end gives answer supervision NO
Inhibit automatic supervision NO
No seize alarm NO
No release alarm NO
Line length LONG
Save Busy-Out Status YES
Impedance COMPLEX
Calling party disconnect timer 1 - 12 minutes 5
Ignore remote disconnect NO
Disconnect timer 100 - 9900 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 500
Supervision direction: incoming trunk calls also NO
Guard timer 0 - 3000 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 800
Class trunk YES
Ring cycle timer 6 - 10 seconds 6
Ignore line reversal during seizure YES
Ringing expected YES
Ringing debounce timer 5 - 12 seconds 6
Seize timer 10 - 60 s ( 10 s inc ) 60
Flash timer 200 - 700 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 300
Flash over trunk NO
Direct access on CO Line Keys: bypass Key System Toll Control NO

[ T1 E&M TRUNK: 7 ] OPTION NAME STATUS

Reverse to Idle NO
Far-end gives answer supervision NO
Inhibit automatic supervision NO
No seize alarm NO
No release alarm NO
Line Length LONG
DTMF NO
Save Busy-Out Status YES
Disconnect timer 1 - 12 minutes 5
Release acknowledge timer 2 - 240 s ( 2 s inc ) 40
Guard timer 200 - 1000 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 800
Incoming start type WINK
Debounce timer 20 - 150 ms ( 10 ms inc ) 100
(Page 1 of 2)

329
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

[ T1 E&M TRUNK: 7 ] OPTION NAME STATUS

Wink timer 150 - 300 ms ( 50 ms inc ) 200
Outgoing start type WINK
Digit outpulsing ratio 60/40
Outpulse delay timer 100 - 2000 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 800
Flash timer 200 - 700 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 300
Flash type LOOP FSH
Flash over trunk NO
Interdigit timer 300 - 800 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 800
Wait for delay timer 300 - 5000 ms ( 100 ms inc ) 5000
Remote end is a satellite NO
Remote end is a satellite with OPS lines NO
Direct access on CO Line Keys: bypass Key System Toll Control NO
Release Link Trunk NO
QSIG Supplementary Services YES
Present Node ID over IP Trunking NO
(Page 2 of 2)

Form 13 - Audio Configuration Table

TRK BAY SLT CCT LENGTH IMPEDANCE TEL NO MWT COMMENTS
1 AUTO AUTO
2 AUTO AUTO
3 AUTO AUTO
4 AUTO AUTO
5 AUTO AUTO
6 AUTO AUTO

Form 13 - Trunk Circuit Descriptor Review

[ AMB TRUNK: 1] TRK NUM BAY SLT CCT COMMENTS
1 1 13 7
2 1 13 8
3 1 13 9
4 1 13 10
5 1 13 11
6 1 13 12

330
 Default Database Values

Form 14 - Non Dial-In Trunks

BAY SLT CCT COS TEN DAY N1 N2 CDN TK NUM TK NAME COMMENTS
1 06 01
1 06 02
1 06 03
1 06 04
1 06 05
1 06 06
1 06 07
1 06 08
1 06 09
1 06 10
1 06 11
1 06 12
1 06 13
1 06 14
1 06 15
1 06 16
1 06 17
1 06 18
1 06 19
1 06 20
1 06 21
1 06 22
1 06 23
1 06 24
1 06 25
1 06 26
1 06 27
1 06 28
1 06 29
1 06 30
1 13 07 5 1 1 1 LINE 1
1 13 08 5 1 1 2 LINE 2
1 13 09 5 1 1 3 LINE 3
1 13 10 5 1 1 4 LINE 4
1 13 11 5 1 1 5 LINE 5
1 13 12 5 1 1 6 LINE 6
1 13 13
1 13 14
1 13 15
1 13 16
1 13 17
1 13 18

331
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Form 15 - Dial-In Trunks

TK TK
BAY SLT CCT COS COR TEN N M X CDN COMMENTS
NUM NAME
1 06 01
1 06 02
1 06 03
1 06 04
1 06 05
1 06 06
1 06 07
1 06 08
1 06 09
1 06 10
1 06 11
1 06 12
1 06 13
1 06 14
1 06 15
1 06 16
1 06 17
1 06 18
1 06 19
1 06 20
1 06 21
1 06 22
1 06 23
1 06 24
1 06 25
1 06 26
1 06 27
1 06 28
1 06 29
1 06 30
1 13 13
1 13 14
1 13 15
1 13 16
1 13 17
1 13 18

332
 Default Database Values

Form 16 - Trunk Groups

TK
[GRP:01-LOCAL ] [SMDR ][TERM] BAY SLT CCT COMMENTS
NUM
6 01 13 12
5 01 13 11
4 01 13 10
3 01 13 09
2 01 13 08
1 01 13 07

Form 17 - Hunt Groups

EXT
[GRP 01:300 ] [TERM ]STN/SET ] BAY SLT CCT COMMENTS
NUM
301 01 11 01
302 01 11 02
303 01 11 03
304 01 11 04

Form 17 - Hunt Group Options

[GRP 01:300 ] [TERM ] STN/SET ] OPTIONS
Name VMail
Overflow
Record-a-Call: Maximum Port Usage (1-20) 0
System Greeting (1-8) 1

333
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Form 18 - Miscellaneous System Ports

ENTRY DESCRIPTION BAY SLT CCT SCT DIR PAGER EXT #
01 Music On Hold 01 13 29 01
02 Pager 1 01 13 30 02 1
03 Pager 2
04 Pager 3
05 Pager 4
06 Pager 5
07 Pager 6
08 Pager 7
09 Pager 8
10 Pager 9
11 Minor Alarm
12 Major Alarm
13 Critical Alarm
14 Night Bell 01 01 13 29 01 340
15 Night Bell 02
16 Night Bell 03
17 Night Bell 04
18 Night Bell 05
19 Night Bell 06
20 Night Bell 07
21 Night Bell 08
22 Night Bell 09
23 Night Bell 10
24 Night Bell 11
25 Night Bell 12
26 Night Bell 13
27 Night Bell 14
28 Night Bell 15
29 Night Bell 16
30 Night Bell 17
31 Night Bell 18
32 Night Bell 19
33 Night Bell 20
34 Night Bell 21
35 Night Bell 22
36 Night Bell 23
37 Night Bell 24
38 Night Bell 25
39 Door Relay 1
40 Door Relay 2
41 Door Relay 3
42 Door Relay 4

334
 Default Database Values

Form 19 - Call Rerouting Table

[TENANT : 01] TYPE OF CALL DAY N1 N2
Station Dial 0 Routing 100 100 100
Priority Dial 0 Routing 100 100 100
DID Recall Points On Busy
DID Recall Points On No Answer
DID Routing For Calls Into This Tenant
DID Illegal # Intercept For This Tenant
DID Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant
DID Attendant Access Night Points -----
Non-Dial-In Trunks Alternate Recall Points
Dial-In Tie Recall Points On Busy
Dial-In Tie Recall Points On No Answer
Dial-In Tie Routing For Calls Into This Tenant
Dial-In Tie Illegal # Intercept For This Tenant
Dial-In Tie Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant
Dial-In Tie Attendant Access Night Point -----
DND Intercept Routing For This Tenant
Automatic Wake-up Routing For This Tenant
Personal Wake-up Routing For This Tenant
UCD/Attendant Recording For This Tenant
UCD On Hold Time-Out For This Tenant
DISA Day Service Routing For This Tenant ----- -----
Station Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant
CO Line Routing Points On No Answer 300 300 300
Music Sources For This Tenant
Record a Call Voicemail Destination For This Tenant
Station Illegal Number Routing For This Tenant
Speak@Ease Number For This Tenant
Call Forward Busy Number For This Tenant 300 300 300
Call Forward No Answer Number For This Tenant 300 300 300
Voicemail Number For This Tenant
ONS Notification Number For 911 Calls and Lockouts
Phonebook Number for This Tenant
Message Key Routing For This Tenant

335
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Form 20 - ARS COR Group Definition

COR GROUP COR GROUP MEMBERS (SEPARATE WITH SPACES) COMMENTS
01 1

Form 21 - ARS Day Zone Definition

DAY ZONE SUN. MON. TUE. WED. THU. FRI. SAT.
01 * * * * * * *
02
03

Form 27- ARS Maximum Number of Dialed Digits

COR MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIALED DIGITS
1 Unlimited
2 Unlimited
3 Unlimited
4 Unlimited
5 Unlimited
6 Unlimited
7 Unlimited
8 Unlimited
9 Unlimited
10 Unlimited
11 Unlimited
12 Unlimited
13 Unlimited
14 Unlimited
15 Unlimited
16 Unlimited
17 Unlimited
18 Unlimited
19 Unlimited
20 Unlimited
21 Unlimited
22 Unlimited
23 Unlimited
24 Unlimited
25 Unlimited

336
 Default Database Values

Form 28- Form Access Restriction

FORM NAME INST MAINT1 MAINT2 SUPER ATT
01 = SYSTEM CONFIGURATION R/W R/W none none none
02 = FEATURE ACCESS CODES R/W R/W none none none
03 = COS DEFINE R/W R/W none none none
04 = SYS OPTIONS/SYS TIMERS R/W R/W none none none
05 = TENANT INTERCONNECTION R/W R/W none none none
06 = TENANT NIGHT SWITCHING R/W R/W none none none
07 = CONSOLE ASSIGNMENTS R/W R/W none none none
08 = ATTENDANT LDN ASGN R/W R/W none none none
09 = DESKTOP DEVICE ASSIGNMENTS R/W R/W none none none
10 = PICKUP GROUPS R/W R/W none none none
11 = DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR R/W R/W none none none
12 = DATA ASSIGNMENT R/W R/W none none none
13 = TRUNK CIRCUIT DESC R/W R/W none none none
14 = NON-DIAL-IN TRUNKS R/W R/W none none none
15 = DIAL-IN TRUNKS R/W R/W none none none
16 = TRUNK GROUPS R/W R/W none none none
17 = HUNT GROUPS R/W R/W none none none
18 = MISC SYSTEM PORTS R/W R/W none none none
19 = CALL REROUTING TABLE R/W R/W none none none
20 = ARS: COR GRP DEFINITION R/W R/W none none none
21 = ARS: DAY ZONE DEFINITION R/W R/W none none none
22 = ARS: MODIFIED DGT TABLE R/W R/W none none none
23 = ARS: ROUTE DEFINITION R/W R/W none none none
24 = ARS: ROUTE LISTS R/W R/W none none none
25 = ARS: ROUTE PLANS R/W R/W none none none
26 = ARS: DIGIT STRINGS R/W R/W none none none
27 = ARS: MAXIMUM DIALED DIGITS R/W R/W none none none
28 = FORM ACCESS RESTRICTION R/W R/W none none none
29 = DTE PROFILE R/W R/W none none none
30 = DEVICE INTERCON TABLE R/W R/W none none none
31 = SYSTEM ABBREV DIAL ENTRY R/W R/W none none none
32 = CDE DATA PRINT R/W R/W none none none
33 = ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY R/W R/W none none none
34 = DIRECTED IO R/W R/W none none none
35 = GLOBAL FIND ACCESS CODE R/W R/W none none none
36 = MODEM ASSIGNMENT R/W R/W none none none
37 = GUEST RM SUPERSET KEYS TEM R/W R/W none none none
(Page 1 of 2)

337
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

FORM NAME INST MAINT1 MAINT2 SUPER ATT

38 = ACD KEYS TEMPLATE R/W R/W none none none
39 = ACD AGENT GROUPS R/W R/W none none none
40 = ACD SUPERVISORS R/W R/W none none none
41 = ACD PATHS R/W R/W none none none
42 = T1 LINK DESCRIPTORS R/W R/W none none none
43 = T1 LINK ASSIGNMENT R/W R/W none none none
44 = NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION R/W R/W none none none
45 = BRI TRUNK ASSIGNMENTS R/W R/W none none none
46 = KEY SYSTEM TOLL CONTROL R/W R/W none none none
47 = IP and DHCP PARAMETERS R/W R/W none none none
48 = VOICE NETWORKING R/W R/W none none none
49 = VOICEMAIL OPTIONS R/W R/W none none none
50 = MAILBOXES R/W R/W none none none
51 = VOICEMAIL DISTRIBUTION LIS R/W R/W none none none
52 = EMAIL R/W R/W none none none
53 = BAY LOCATION ASSIGNMENT R/W R/W none none none
(Page 2 of 2)

Form 29 - DTE Profile Table

[ PROFILE NUMBER : 1 ] DTE OPTION VALUE
Terminal type VIDEO TERM
Language ENGLISH
DTRX Echoplex DISABLED
Editing DISABLED
Editing character delete (0 - 127, Decimal value of ASCII code) 0
Editing line display (0 - 127, Decimal value of ASCII code) 0
Inject <LF> after <CR> ALWAYS
Number of pads after <CR> (0 - 7) 0
Number of pads after <LF> (0 - 7) 0
DTRX Inactivity Timer 1 - 60 seconds 10

338
 Default Database Values

Form 30 - Device Interconnection Table

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
01 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
02 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
03 * * . . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
04 * * . . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
05 * * . . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
06 * * . . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
07 * * . . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
08 * * . . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
09 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
10 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
11 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
12 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
13 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
14 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
15 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
16 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
17 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
18 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
19 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
20 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
21 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
22 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
23 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
24 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
25 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

339
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Form 30 - Device Interconnection Translation Table

ENTRY NUM DEVICE TYPE DESCRIPTION INTERCONNECT NUM
01 Station/Set 1
02 Console 2
03 Loop Start Trunk 3
04 Ground Start Trunk 4
05 DID/Tie Trunk 5
06 E&M Trunk ( 2-Wire or 4-Wire ) 6
07 RESERVED 7
08 RESERVED 8
09 RESERVED 9
10 RESERVED 10
11 RESERVED 11
12 RESERVED 12
13 RESERVED 13
14 RESERVED 14
15 RESERVED 15
16 RESERVED 16
17 RESERVED 17
18 RESERVED 18
19 RESERVED 19
20 RESERVED 20
21 RESERVED 21
22 RESERVED 22
23 RESERVED 23
24 RESERVED 24
25 RESERVED 25

Form 34 - Directed IO Table

EXT NUM PRINTOUT PRINTOUT TYPE GUARANTEED
Printer Port SMDR Autoprint NO
Printer Port CDE Data Print Directed NO

340
 Default Database Values

Form 35 - Global Find Access Code Table

ACCESS
DEFINED BAY SLT CCT SCT MULTIPLE APP.
CODE
0 Feature Access Code N/A
100 SUPERSET 1 01 01 1 N/A
101 SUPERSET 1 01 02 1 N/A
102 SUPERSET 1 01 03 1 N/A
103 SUPERSET 1 01 04 1 N/A
104 SUPERSET 1 01 05 1 N/A
105 SUPERSET 1 01 06 1 N/A
106 SUPERSET 1 01 07 1 N/A
107 SUPERSET 1 01 08 1 N/A
108 SUPERSET 1 01 09 1 N/A
109 SUPERSET 1 01 10 1 N/A
110 SUPERSET 1 01 11 1 N/A
111 SUPERSET 1 01 12 1 N/A
112 SUPERSET 1 02 01 1 N/A
113 SUPERSET 1 02 02 1 N/A
114 SUPERSET 1 02 03 1 N/A
115 SUPERSET 1 02 04 1 N/A
116 SUPERSET 1 02 05 1 N/A
117 SUPERSET 1 02 06 1 N/A
118 SUPERSET 1 02 07 1 N/A
119 SUPERSET 1 02 08 1 N/A
198 Console 1 13 02 1 N/A
199 SUPERSET 1 13 01 1 N/A
200 Station 1 13 03 N/A
201 Station 1 13 04 N/A
300 Hunt Group # 1 N/A
301 SUPERSET 1 11 01 1 N/A
302 SUPERSET 1 11 02 1 N/A
303 SUPERSET 1 11 03 1 N/A
304 SUPERSET 1 11 04 1 N/A
305 SUPERSET 1 11 05 1 N/A
306 SUPERSET 1 11 06 1 N/A
307 SUPERSET 1 11 07 1 N/A
308 SUPERSET 1 11 08 1 N/A
309 SUPERSET 1 11 09 1 N/A
310 SUPERSET 1 11 10 1 N/A
(Page 1 of 3)

341
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

ACCESS
DEFINED BAY SLT CCT SCT MULTIPLE APP.
CODE
311 SUPERSET 1 11 11 1 N/A
312 SUPERSET 1 11 12 1 N/A
313 SUPERSET 1 12 01 1 N/A
314 SUPERSET 1 12 02 1 N/A
315 SUPERSET 1 12 03 1 N/A
316 SUPERSET 1 12 04 1 N/A
317 SUPERSET 1 12 05 1 N/A
318 SUPERSET 1 12 06 1 N/A
319 SUPERSET 1 12 07 1 N/A
320 SUPERSET 1 12 08 1 N/A
321 SUPERSET 1 12 09 1 N/A
322 SUPERSET 1 12 10 1 N/A
323 SUPERSET 1 12 11 1 N/A
324 SUPERSET 1 12 12 1 N/A
340 Night Bell 1 13 29 1 N/A
*01 Feature Access Code N/A
*03 Feature Access Code N/A
*04 Feature Access Code N/A
*05 Feature Access Code N/A
*06 Feature Access Code N/A
*07 Feature Access Code N/A
*08 Feature Access Code N/A
*09 Feature Access Code N/A
*10 Feature Access Code N/A
*12 Feature Access Code N/A
*13 Feature Access Code N/A
*14 Feature Access Code N/A
*15 Feature Access Code N/A
*16 Feature Access Code N/A
*21 Feature Access Code N/A
*22 Feature Access Code N/A
*23 Feature Access Code N/A
*24 Feature Access Code N/A
*25 Feature Access Code N/A
*30 Feature Access Code N/A
*33 Feature Access Code N/A
*41 Feature Access Code N/A
*42 Feature Access Code N/A
(Page 2 of 3)

342
 Default Database Values

ACCESS
DEFINED BAY SLT CCT SCT MULTIPLE APP.
CODE
*48 Feature Access Code N/A
*49 Feature Access Code N/A
*51 Feature Access Code N/A
*52 Feature Access Code N/A
*57 Feature Access Code N/A
*62 Feature Access Code N/A
*63 Feature Access Code N/A
*64 Feature Access Code N/A
*65 Feature Access Code N/A
*66 Feature Access Code N/A
*** Feature Access Code N/A
### Feature Access Code N/A
000 ARS Leading Digit N/A
(Page 3 of 3)

Form 36 - Modem Assignment Table

BAY SLT CCT CDN BAY SLT CCT EXTN TEN DTE COS COR MODE DIAL COMMENTS
1 13 05
1 13 06

Form 42 - T1 Link Descriptors

[LINK DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1] IN / OUT GOING VALUE
Alarm debounce timer ( 300 - 3200 ms ) 2500
Line Coding ( AMI, AMI&ZCS, B8ZS) AMI&ZCS
Line Build Out ( 0, -7.5, -15, -22.5 DB) 0 DB
Line Length ( max 132, 265, 398, 533 or 655) 266-398
Framing ( D4 or ESF ) D4
Slip rate - maintenance limit ( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs 255
Slip rate - service limit ( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs 7000
Slip rate - network sync limit ( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs 7
BER - maintenance limit ( 10**-n , n = ( 3,4,5,6 )) / hour 4
BER - service limit ( 10**-n , n = ( 3,4,5,6 )) / hour 3
Framing losses - maintenance limit ( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs 255
Framing losses - service limit ( 0 - 9000 ) /24 hrs 9000
RTS timer - service limit exceeded ( 1 - 255 min ) 30
RTS timer - net slip limit exceeded ( 1 - 255 min ) 30
RTS timer - after alarm ( 0 - 300 sec ) 10
(Page 1 of 2)

343
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

[LINK DESCRIPTOR NUMBER : 1] IN / OUT GOING VALUE

Termination mode ( LT or NT ) NT
Protocol (DMS250, NI2, 4ESS, DMS100) DMS100
Protocol Variant (NI2-Bellcore, NI2-5Ess, and NI2-GTD5, None) None
Network/User (Network, User) User
Unknown Numbering Plan (Enabled, Disabled) Disabled
Bearer Capability Voice (Per-Call, 3.1 kHz, Speech) Speech
CLIR Voice (Per-Call, Restrict, Allow) Allow
Invert D Channel (Yes, No) No
(Page 2 of 2)

Form 44 - Network Synchronization

DESCRIPTION BAY SLOT CCT COMMENTS
First clock source
Second clock source
Third clock source
Fourth clock source
Fifth clock source
Sixth clock source
Seventh clock source
Eighth clock source

Form 46 - Key System Toll Control

DIGITS TO BE QTY TO DESIGNA TERM TYPE AND COR
ANALYZED FOLLOW T NUM GROUP
011 Unknown LOCAL GROUP 1 1
1 Unknown LOCAL GROUP 1 1
976 4 LOCAL GROUP 1 1

Form 47 Subform 01 - System IP

SYSTEM IP VALUE
System IP Address 192.168.1.2
System Netmask 255.255.255.000
System Gateway IP 192.168.1.1
L2 Switch IP Address 192.168.1.1
Hostname sx200icp.xyz.com
FTP Server 192.168.1.9
FTP Username ftp
FTP Password @
44 (upgrades)
DiffServ Code Point
46 (new installations)

344
 Default Database Values

Form 47 Subform 02 - DHCP Server

SUBNET NAME [BAY 1-DHCP SERVER ENABLED] SUBNET IP BIT MASK
192_168_1_subnet 192.168.001.000 255.255.255.000

Form 47 Subform 02 - Expand DHCP Subnet

NAME [BAY 1] IP RANGE [192_168_1_subnet] LEASE TIME
192_168_1_range 192.168.001.010 - 192.168.001.250 08 HOURS

Form 47 Subform 02 - DHCP Options

OPTIONS [COMMON] FORMAT VALUE [BAY 1]
3-Router IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.1
128-IP Phone TFTP Server IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.2
129-ICP Ip Address IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.2
130-DHCP Server Identifier ASCII MITEL IP PHONE
134-DiffServ Code Point NUMERIC 44

Form 47 Subform 02 - DHCP Ranges

RANGE IP [192_168_1_subnet] VALUE [BAY 1]
Name 192_168_1_range
Range Start 192.168.001.010
Range End 192.168.001.250
Protocol DHCP
Clients class ID must match name NO
Lease Time (minimum 5 minutes) 08 HOURS

Form 49 - Voice Mail Options

VOICEMAIL OPTION VALUE
Default Language ENGLISH
Alternate Language ENGLISH
Bilingual Option DISABLED
Language Change Number 8
FAX Destination Number
Send Notification Calls DISABLED
Digital Pager Callback Number
Auto Att Xfer to any Extn ENABLED
Auto Att Xfer Restrictions
Directory Voice Prompt LAST NAME
Automatic Route Select Code RESERVED
Generate Account Codes in SMDR DISABLED
Personal Contact Numbers DISABLED
(Page 1 of 2)

345
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

VOICEMAIL OPTION VALUE

DID Server RESERVED
Automatic DID Number Assignment RESERVED
Synchronization of Greetings SYSTEM DAY/NIGHT
Open Time (HH:MM)(Sun..Sat) 00:00 09:00 09:00 09:00 09:00 09:00 00:00
Close Time (HH:MM)(Sun..Sat) 00:00 18:00 18:00 18:00 18:00 18:00 00:00
Length of Mailbox Numbers (2-5) 3
Length of Passwords (3-6) 4
PMS Protocol HYATT ENCORE
SMTP Server
IMAP Server
(Page 2 of 2)

Form 50 - Mailboxes
MBOX# TYPE EXTENSION OPERATOR LANG ENV MAX DEL NEW OLD
0 EXTEN 0 SYST Y 10 15
100 EXTEN 100 SYST Y 10 15
101 EXTEN 101 SYST Y 10 15
102 EXTEN 102 SYST Y 10 15
103 EXTEN 103 SYST Y 10 15
104 EXTEN 104 SYST Y 10 15
105 EXTEN 105 SYST Y 10 15
106 EXTEN 106 SYST Y 10 15
107 EXTEN 107 SYST Y 10 15
108 EXTEN 108 SYST Y 10 15
109 EXTEN 109 SYST Y 10 15
110 EXTEN 110 SYST Y 10 15
111 EXTEN 111 SYST Y 10 15
112 EXTEN 112 SYST Y 10 15
113 EXTEN 113 SYST Y 10 15
114 EXTEN 114 SYST Y 10 15
115 EXTEN 115 SYST Y 10 15
116 EXTEN 116 SYST Y 10 15
117 EXTEN 117 SYST Y 10 15
118 EXTEN 118 SYST Y 10 15
119 EXTEN 119 SYST Y 10 15
999 ADMIN

346
 Default Database Values

Form 50 Subform - Notification

NOTIF
MBOX# NOTIFICATION # N SCHED U ACC RESERVED
TYP
0 EXTENSION OFF N
100 EXTENSION OFF N
101 EXTENSION OFF N
102 EXTENSION OFF N
103 EXTENSION OFF N
104 EXTENSION OFF N
105 EXTENSION OFF N
106 EXTENSION OFF N
107 EXTENSION OFF N
108 EXTENSION OFF N
109 EXTENSION OFF N
110 EXTENSION OFF N
111 EXTENSION OFF N
112 EXTENSION OFF N
113 EXTENSION OFF N
114 EXTENSION OFF N
115 EXTENSION OFF N
116 EXTENSION OFF N
117 EXTENSION OFF N
118 EXTENSION OFF N
119 EXTENSION OFF N
999

Form 50 Subform - EMAIL

MBOX# FWD EMAIL ADDRESS FOR SMTP FORWARD OF VOICEMAIL
0 NO
100 NO
101 NO
102 NO
103 NO
104 NO
105 NO
106 NO
107 NO
108 NO
109 NO
110 NO
111 NO
112 NO
(Page 1 of 2)

347
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

MBOX# FWD EMAIL ADDRESS FOR SMTP FORWARD OF VOICEMAIL

113 NO
114 NO
115 NO
116 NO
117 NO
118 NO
119 NO
(Page 2 of 2)

Form 52 - EMAIL
OWNER EMAIL ADDRESS [SMTP SERVER: 000.000.000.000]
E911
E911
E911
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Logs

Form 53 - Bay Location Assignment

BAY IP BAY CIM 1 CIM 2 MMC 1 (xxx) MMC 2 (xxx) PHANTOM
01 *
02 *
03 *
04 1
05 2
06 1
07 2
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

348
 Default Database Values

Form 54 Calling Party Number

EXT NUMBER DEFINED CALLING PARTY NUMBER
100 SUPERSET
101 SUPERSET
102 SUPERSET
103 SUPERSET
104 SUPERSET
105 SUPERSET
106 SUPERSET
107 SUPERSET
108 SUPERSET
109 SUPERSET
110 SUPERSET
111 SUPERSET
112 SUPERSET
113 SUPERSET
114 SUPERSET
115 SUPERSET
200 Station
201 Station
202 Station
203 Station
301 SUPERSET
302 SUPERSET
303 SUPERSET
304 SUPERSET
305 SUPERSET
306 SUPERSET
307 SUPERSET
308 SUPERSET
309 SUPERSET
310 SUPERSET
311 SUPERSET
312 SUPERSET
313 SUPERSET
314 SUPERSET
315 SUPERSET
316 SUPERSET
317 SUPERSET
(Page 1 of 2)

349
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

EXT NUMBER DEFINED CALLING PARTY NUMBER

318 SUPERSET
319 SUPERSET
320 SUPERSET
321 SUPERSET
322 SUPERSET
323 SUPERSET
324 SUPERSET
(Page 2 of 2)

Form 55 Incoming Digits

INCOMING DIGITS DAY N1 N2

350
 Appendix B
Part Numbers
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

352
 Part Numbers

Table 61: Hardware (Options, Spares and FRUs)

Part Number Description Notes
50004357 SX-200 ICP MX Controller With internal
hard drive
50003724 Analog Main Card
50003725 Analog Option Card
50003726 Stratum 3 Clock Module
50003727 CompactFlash Memory Interface MMC
50003728 Dual DSP MMC
50004154 CompactFlash - 256M
50003884 Fan
50003885 Power Supply
50003900 SX-200 NSU
50001267 SX-200 ASU
50004151 Hard Drive 40 GB Unformatted
50001248 Dual FIM MMC - 1 km (820 nm, multi-mode)
50003695 Dual FIM MMC - 5 km (1300 nm, multi-mode)
50003696 Dual FIM MMC - 14 km (1300 nm,
single-mode)
50004451 Quad CIM MMC
50003560 Dual T1/E1 Framer MMC
50004402 T1/E1 Combo MMC
50002979 Quad DSP MMC
50004150 SX-200 ICP Rack Mount Brackets MX Only
50000690 24VAC Power Adapter for 5010 IP, 5020 IP,
5215 IP and 5220 IP Phones
50002070 -48V Power Brick for 5200 series IP Phones
PD-6024/AC PowerDsine 24PT In-line Power Unit for 5200
series IP Phones

353
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 62: Software

Part Number Description Notes
50005112 Rel. 2 CD-ROM

Table 63: Software Options

Part Number Description Notes
9109-531-015-NA ACD Agents (11-15)
9109-531-005-NA ACD Agents (1-5)
9109-531-025-NA ACD Agents (16-25)
9109-531-050-NA ACD Agents (26-50)
9109-531-075-NA ACD Agents (51-75)
9109-531-010-NA ACD Agents (6-10)
9109-531-100-NA ACD Agents (76-100)
9109-532-013-NA ACD Real Time Events
9109-532-001-NA Auto-Attendant
54000925 Compression Resources (2)
54000890 Compression Resources (8)
54000924 Digital Bay (1)
54000131 Guest Suites
54000661 IP Network Channel
54000660 IP Set (1)
54000923 IP Set (4)
54000310 MyAdministrator
54000929 PC (2nd) Port on IP Sets
54000928 Phonebook
54000927 Recorded Announcement Device
54000050 Speak@Ease
54001353 Standard Unified Messaging
54000921 Voice Mail Box (1)
(Page 1 of 3)

354
 Part Numbers

Table 63: Software Options (continued)

Part Number Description Notes
54000922 Voice Mail Boxes (4)
54000930 Voice Mail PMS
9109-532-006-NA Centralized Voice Mail & Attendant S/W
9109-532-022-NA CLASS Sets
54000931 Email (SMTP) Client
9109-532-010-NA Fax Tone Detect
540001230 Feature Level 6
54001134 Hospitality
54001152 IP Network Channel (12)
54001151 IP Network Channel (2)
9109-533-002-NA Max Digital Line Cards
9109-533-101-NA Max ONS Line Cards
9109-532-002-NA MiTAI
9109-532-016-NA PRI Card Auto Min/Max
9109-532-018-NA PRI Card D Channel Backup
9109-532-015-NA PRI Card Min/Max
9109-532-017-NA PRI Card NFAS
9109-532-020-NA PRI Card Q.SIG
9109-532-019-NA PRI Card Remote LAN Access
9109-532-021-NA Record a Call
9109-532-005-NA Remote S/W Download
9109-532-007-NA SS4000 Sets
9109-532-012-NA Support 3DN, 4DN and 400 series Set Types
9109-532-011-NA Support Softkey Access to Voicemail
54000950 Voice Mail Bilingual Prompts
54000951 Voice Mail Personal Contacts
54001761 Your Assistant Starter Kit Software and
single user
license
(Page 2 of 3)

355
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 63: Software Options (continued)

Part Number Description Notes
54002200 Your Assistant Upgrade Kit Single user
54002202 Your Assistant Lite Single user
54002201 Your Assistant Softphone Single user
(Page 3 of 3)

Table 64: Packages

Part Number Description

50003723 SX-200 ICP MX Basic System

50003883 MX Controller
50003724 Analogue Main Card
50003728 Dual DSP MMC
50003727 CompactFlash Memory Interface MMC
50004154 256M CompactFlash Memory card
52001320 SX-200 ICP MX Basic System (6x20x8) Package
50003723 - See Note
50003812 SX-200 ICP MX Basic System
50002818 5207 IP Phone dark grey (Qty - 7)
50002821 5220 IP Phone dark grey (Qty. - 1)
50004002 PKM 12
54000920 SX-200 ICP Rel. 1 SW Kit
54000923 Feature Level 5
54000922 IP Set Licenses
54000310 Voice Mail Box Licenses
9109-532-001-NA MyAdministrator SW Option
9109-532-005-NA Auto-Attendant Software
9109-532-007-NA Remote Download Software
9109-532-010-NA SUPERSET 4000 Telephones Support Option
9109-532-011-NA FAX Tone Detection Option
9109-533-201-NA Voicemail Softkeys Option
54000970 1st Digital Link Option
TDM Device Licenses

Note: SX-200 ICP Basic & Advanced I & M Certification required.

356
 Part Numbers

Table 64: Packages (continued)

Part Number Description

52001430 SX-200 ICP Premier System (6X8X4) Package

50002818 - See Note
50002821 5220 IP Phone Dark Grey (Qty 4)
50003723 IP PKM 12 Kit Dark Grey
54000923 SX-200 ICP Basic System
54000922 IP Phone Licenses
54000970 Voicemail Box Licenses
54000661 TDM Device Licenses
540001230 IP Channel Licenses
54000310 Feature Level 6
54000920 MyAdministrator SW Option
54000929 Feature Level 5
9109-531-005-NA PC (2nd) Port on IP Sets
9109-532-001-NA 5 ACD Agents Option
9109-532-004-NA Auto-Attendant Software
9109-532-005-NA PMS Option
9109-532-007-NA Remote Download Software
9109-532-010-NA SUPERSET 4000 Telephones Support Option
9109-532-002-NA FAX Tone Detection Option
9109-532-011-NA Mitel Application Interface
9109-532-021-NA Voicemail Softkeys Option
9109-533-201-NA Record a Call
1st Digital Link Option

Note: SX-200 ICP Basic & Advanced I & M Certification required.

357
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 65: SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets, Interface Cards, and Modules

Common Name Part Number Comments

ONS/CLASS Line Card 9109-110-001-NA For Rotary and DTMF

Telephones (12 circuits per
card)
ONS/CLASS Line Card 9109-110-002-NA For Rotary and DTMF
(Blue Faceplate) Telephones (12 circuits per
card)
OPS Line Card 9109-040-000-SA 6 OPS Circuits per card
Digital Line Card 9109-012-002-NA 12 DNIC Circuits per card
(Blue Faceplate)
Digital Line Card 9109-012-001-NA 12 DNIC Circuits per card
LS/CLASS Trunk Card 50001730 8 CO Trunk Interfaces (Loop
Start only)
LS/GS Trunk Card - CSA 9109-011-001-SA 6 CO Trunk Interfaces
DID Trunk 9109-031-000-SA 6 DID Circuits per card
Universal Card 9109-005-000-SA supports:
• E&M Trunk Module
• Music-on-Hold/Pager
Module
• Receiver/Relay Module
E&M Trunk Module 9109-013-000-SA 1 E&M Trunk Circuit per
Module
Music-on-Hold/Pager 9109-018-000-SA Music Input, Paging Preamp
Module Output, and Relay to control
external amplifier
Receiver/Relay Module 9109-016-000-SA 4 DTMF Receivers and 2
General Purpose Relays
(Page 1 of 2)

358
 Part Numbers

Table 65: SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets, Interface Cards, and Modules

(continued)

Common Name Part Number Comments

Mitel Express Messenger 9109-080-001-NA All models use the same card
Card (2-port) and the number of ports
enabled is determined by the
software. For example, you can
upgrade a 2-port card to a
4-port card by enabling the
software with a passcode.
Refer to the Mitel Express
Messenger System
Administration Manual (PN
9109-080-005-NA) for
instructions.
Mitel Express Messenger 9109-080-002-NA
Card (4-port)
Mitel Express Messenger 9109-080-009-NA
Card (6-port)
Mitel Express Messenger 9109-080-008-NA
Card (8-port)
SX-200 Per Bay Cabinet 50004041
- Drk Gry
SX-200 Per Node BCCII 52001550
- Drk Gry,110V
SX-200 Per Node BCCIII 52001551
- Drk Gry,110V
SX-200 Per Node BCCIII 52001552
- Drk Gry, 220V
SX-200 Drk Gry Rack 50002891
Mount Bracket FRU
(Page 2 of 2)

359
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 66: Digital Control and Digital Services Cards Modules, and
Spares for SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets
Marketing Name Part Number Comments

Bay Control Card II 9109-017-001-SA

Bay Control Card III 9109-117-001-NA
DSP Module (single) 9180-510-006-NA
Bay Power Supply 9109-008-000-SA
120 V ac
Bay Power Supply 9109-008-002-NA
230 V ac
System ID Module 50002212
Peripheral FIM Carrier II 9109-612-001-NA
Peripheral Interface 9109-616-001-NA Installs in any SX-200
Module Carrier Card rack-mount cabinet
FIM Module 820NM 9180-510-001-NA
Multi-mode
FIM Module 1300NM 9180-510-002-NA
Multi-mode
FIM Module 1300NM 9180-510-003-NA
Single-mode
CIM 9180-510-010-NA Copper Interface Module
CIM Cable 9125-100-106-NA Peripheral Interconnect Cable
(15 ft.)
T1 Trunk Card 9109-021-001-NA
T1 Trunk Card 9109-021-000-SA Includes T1 Trunk Adapter
T1 Trunk Adapter 9400-100-302-NA
Dual T1 Trunk Adapter 9400-100-304-NA for 2 links
T1/E1 Module 9180-510-004-NA Dual link, for PRI card or the
BCC III
(Page 1 of 2)

360
 Part Numbers

Table 66: Digital Control and Digital Services Cards Modules, and
Spares for SX-200 Peripheral Cabinets (continued)
Marketing Name Part Number Comments

PRI Card Package 50002285 Includes:

• PRI card
• Dual link T1 PRI Module
• software
PRI Card 9109-615-001-NA The carrier card for the PRI
PRI Card Software 9125-070-001-NA
Fan Assembly - SX-200 9109-631-001-NA
RM Cabinet
(Page 2 of 2)

Table 67: Peripherals

Part Number Description Notes
50002815 5201 IP Phone Dark Gray FRU
50003812 5207 IP Phone Dark Gray
50004890 5212 IP Phon Dual Port Dark Gray
50002817 5215 IP Phone Dual Port Dark Gray
50002818 5220 IP Phone Dual Port Dark Gray
50002819 5220 IP Phone Dual Port Red
50004894 5224 IP Phone Dual Port Dark Gray
50004895 5224 IP Phone Dual Port Red
50002821 5412 PKM PKM Kit (12 Key) Dark
Gray
50002822 5412 PKM PKM FRU (12 Key) Dark
Gray
50002823 5448 PKM PKM Kit (48 Key) Dark
Gray
(Page 1 of 3)

361
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 67: Peripherals (continued)

Part Number Description Notes
50002824 5448 PKM PKM FRU (48 Key) Dark
Gray
50002825 5422 PKM Interface
Module
50001900 Mitel 5303 Conference Black
Phone
50001903 Mitel 5303 Conference Silver
Phone
50002828 5310 IP Boardroom Silver
Conference Unit (includes 5220 IP Phone)
50002829 5310 IP Boardroom Black
Conference Unit (includes 5220 IP Phone)
50002830 5310 IP Boardroom Silver with Dark Gray
Conference Unit (includes 5220 IP Phone)
50002831 5310 IP Boardroom Black with Dark Gray
Conference Unit (includes 5220 IP Phone)
9189-000-300-NA SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Light Gray
attendant console
9189-000-301-NA SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Dark gray with a tilted,
attendant console back-lit LCD display,
English and French text
available
9189-888-001-NA Console Handset Provides volume control
Amplifier for the SUPERCONSOLE
1000 handset.
50001754 5485 IP Paging Unit
(Page 2 of 3)

362
 Part Numbers

Table 67: Peripherals (continued)

Part Number Description Notes
Plantronics Headsets For use with Mitel 4000
and 5000 series
9132-800-500-NA (single) Monaural over the head telephones, except the
50000602 (12 pack) 5207 (see Note).
Binaural over the head
50000607 (single) with voice tube
50000601 (12 pack)
Monaural over the ear
9132-800-501-NA (single)
50000603 (12 pack)
Binaural over the head
50000606 (single) with the noise canceling
50000604 (12 pack) mike
(Page 3 of 3)

Note: Mitel 5207 IP Phones DO NOT support the direct connection of a

headset. Use of a headset with this phone requires a Plantronics M12 Vista
Universal Amplifier. The amplifier plugs into the handset port on the underside
of the phone. Plantronics models P51, P81, P101N and Supra NC headsets
are the ONLY headsets approved by Mitel for use with the 5207 IP Phone
through the Plantronics M12 Vista.

Table 68: Documentation

Part Number Description
50004003 Rev. D SX-200 ICP Technician's Handbook Release 2 .0

363
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

364
 Appendix C
System Cabling
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

366
 System Cabling

Table 69: SX-200 ICP, Onboard Analog/DNIC

Tip & Ring Assignments (Back Panel Amphenol Connector)
Bay/Slot/
Pins Pairs Circuit type Comments
Circuit
1/26 W-BL / BL-W ONS/CLASS 1/13/3 Default Extension #: 200
2/27 W-O / O-W ONS/CLASS 1/13/4 Default Extension #: 201
3/28 W-G / G-W ONS/CLASS 1/13/5 Available as upgrade option
4/29 W-BR / BR-W ONS/CLASS 1/13/6 Available as upgrade option
5/30 NOT USED
6/31 R-BL / BL-R DNIC 1/13/1 Subattendant
Default Extension #: 199
7/32 R-O / O-R DNIC 1/13/2 SUPERCONSOLE 1000
Default Extension #: 198
8/33 - 10/35 NOT USED
11/36 - 16/41 BK-BL / BL-BK LS/CLASS 1/13/7 - Trunks circuits 1/13/7 and
1/13/12 1/13/8 are System Fail
Transfer trunks. They
connect to ONS circuits
1/13/3 and 4 respectively.
17/42 - 22/47 Y-O / O-Y LS/CLASS 1/13/13 - Available as upgrade option
1/13/18
48/23 - 50/25 NOT USED

Table 70: Maintenance RS-232 Cable

D-Sub Connector Pin Signals DIN Connector Pin
2 RXD 5
3 TXD 3
4 DTR 7
5 GND 4*
6 DSR 6
7 RTS 1
8 CTS 2
8*

Notes:
1. The pins with * are connected together.
2. Pin 1 and 9 of the D-Sub connector are not used.

367
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 71: Relay Connector Pinouts (Front Panel DB-9)

Pin Bay/Slot/Circuit Function

1 1/13/30/1 Generic Relay Contact (normally open)
2 (See Note) Generic Relay Contact Return
3 Not Used
4 Generic Relay Contact (normally open)
1/13/29/2
5 Generic Relay Contact Return
6 Not Used
7 Generic Relay Contact (normally open); see Note
1/13/29/1
8 Generic Relay Contact Return
9 Not Used

Note: Programmed for Auxiliary Ringer (Night Bell) use in the default
database.

Table 72: Paging Pinouts (Rear Panel RJ45)

Pin Function
1 Paging Relay Contact A (normally closed)
2 Paging Relay Common
3 Paging Relay Contact B (normally open)
4 Paging Wire1 (pager audio)
5 Paging Wire2 (pager audio)
6 Factory test control (not for customer use)
7 Unused
8 Unused

368
 System Cabling

Table 73: CIM Port Pinouts

Pin Signals Pin Signal
1 RX + 5
2 RX - 6 TX -
3 TX + 7
4 8

Note: The CIM ports are the same whether the card has a control end
connection or a peripheral end connection. Connections from the control
cabinet to the peripheral cabinet require Category 5 UTP (unshielded twisted
pair) cable, with TX and RX pairs reversed.

Table 74: T1/E1 Framer - Tip and Ring Pinouts

NT/LT Settings
Pin Signal
NT (Default) LT
1 Rx Ring Tx Ring
2 Rx Tip Tx Tip
3 N/C
4 Tx Ring Rx Ring
5 Tx Tip Rx Tip
6 N/C
7 N/C
8 N/C

Table 75: Ethernet Port Pinouts

Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 TX + 5
2 TX - 6 RX -
3 RX + 7
4 8

369
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 76: NSU PRI - Pinouts for T1Line/Network Termination

Line Network
Pin
Termination Mode Termination Mode
1 Tx Ring Rx Ring
2 Tx Tip Rx Tip
3 Unused Unused
4 Rx Ring Tx Ring
5 Rx Tip Tx Tip
6 Unused Unused
7 Unused Unused
8 Unused Unused

370
 System Cabling

Table 77: ASU Tip/Ring Assignments

Pin Pair Signal
1/26 W-BL / BL-W ONS Tip 1 / Ring 1
2/27 W-O / O-W ONS Tip 2/ Ring 2
3/28 W-G / G-W ONS Tip 3 / Ring 3
4/29 W-BR / BR-W ONS Tip 4 / Ring 4
5/30 S-W / W-S ONS Tip 5 / Ring 5
6/31 R-BL / BL-R ONS Tip 6 / Ring 6
7/32 R-O / O-R ONS Tip 7 / Ring 7
8/33 G-R / R-G ONS Tip 8 / Ring 8
9/34 BR-R / R-BR ONS Tip 9 / Ring 9
10/35 S-R / R-S ONS Tip 10 / Ring 10
11/36 BK-BL / BL-BK ONS Tip 11 / Ring 11
12/37 O-BK / BK-O ONS Tip 12 / Ring 12
13/38 G-BK / BK-G ONS Tip 13 / Ring 13
14/39 BR-BK / BK-BR ONS Tip 14 / Ring 14
15/40 S-BK / BK-S ONS Tip 15 / Ring 15
16/41 BL-Y / Y-BL ONS Tip 16 / Ring 16
17/42 O-Y / Y-O ONS Tip 17 / LS Ring 17
18/43 G-Y / Y-G ONS Tip 18 / LS Ring 18
19/44 BR-Y / Y-BR ONS Tip 19 / LS Ring 19
20/45 S-Y / Y-S ONS Tip 20 / LS Ring 20
21/46 BL-V / V-BL ONS Tip 21 / LS Ring 21
22/47 O-V / V-O ONS Tip 22 / LS Ring 22
23/48 G-V / V-G ONS Tip 23 / LS Ring 23
24/49 BR-V / V-BR ONS Tip 24 / LS Ring 24
25/50 V-S N/C

371
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 78: SX-200 EL or SX-200 ML (RM)

Tip and Ring Assignments
J1, J2, J3, and J4 Lead Designation
ONS
Slot / LS/ OPS or
Pin Pair Cct or Cct LS/GS Cct Cct COV Cct
Plug CLASS DID
DLC
26 W-BL 1 T1 1 T1 1 T1 1 T1 1 T1
1 BL-W R1 R1 R1 R1 R1
27 W-O 2 T2 MM1 2 T2 2 T2
2-J1 2 O-W R2 M1 R2 R2
or 28 W-G 3 T3 2 T2 3 T3 3 T3 2 T2
4-J2 3 G-W R3 R2 R3 R3 R2
or 29 W-BR 4 T4 MM2 4 T4 4 T4
6-J3 4 BR-W R4 M2 R4 R4
or 30 W-S 5 T5 3 T3 5 T5 3 T3
8-J4 5 S-W R5 R3 R5 R3
31 R-BL 6 T6 MM3 6 T6
6 BL-R R6 M3 R6
32 R-O 7 T7 4 T4 5 T5 4 T4
7 O-R R7 R4 R5 R4
33 R-G 8 T8 MM4 6 T6
8 G-R R8 M4 R6
34 R-BR 9 T9 5 T5 7 T7 5 T5
9 BR-R R9 R5 R7 R5
35 R-S 10 T10 MM5 8 T8
10 S-R R10 M5 R8
36 BK-BL 11 T11 6 T6 6 T6
11 BL-BK R11 R6 R6
37 BK-O 12 T12 MM6
12 O-BK R12 M6
38 BK-G SPARE
(Page 1 of 2)

372
 System Cabling

Table 78: SX-200 EL or SX-200 ML (RM)

Tip and Ring Assignments (continued)
J1, J2, J3, and J4 Lead Designation
ONS
Slot / LS/ OPS or
Pin Pair Cct or Cct LS/GS Cct Cct COV Cct
Plug CLASS DID
DLC
13 G-BK SPARE
39 BK-BR 1 T1 1 T1 1 T1 1 T1 1 T1
14 BR-BK R1 R1 R1 R1 R1
40 BK-S 2 T2 MM1 2 T2 2 T2
1-J1 15 S-BK R2 M1 R2 R2
or 41 Y-BL 3 T3 2 T2 3 T3 3 T3 2 T2
3-J2 16 BL-Y R3 R2 R3 R3 R2
or 42 Y-O 4 T4 MM2 4 T4 4 T4
5-J3 17 O-Y R4 M2 R4 R4
or 43 Y-G 5 T5 3 T3 5 T5 3 T3
7-J4 18 G-Y R5 R3 R5 R3
44 Y-BR 6 T6 MM3 6 T6
19 BR-Y R6 M3 R6
45 Y-S 7 T7 4 T4 5 T5 4 T4
20 S-Y R7 R4 R5 R4
46 V-BL 8 T8 MM4 6 T6
21 BL-V R8 M4 R6
47 V-O 9 T9 5 T5 7 T7 5 T5
22 O-V R9 R5 R7 R5
48 V-G 10 T10 MM5 8 T8
23 G-V R10 M5 R8
49 V-BR 11 T11 6 T6 6 T6
24 BR-V R11 R6 R6
50 V-S 12 T12 MM6
25 S-V R12 M6
(Page 2 of 2)

373
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 79: SX-200 EL or SX-200 ML (RM) Universal Card

Tip and Ring Assignments
J1, J2, J3, and J4 Lead Designation

Slot / MOH/ DTMF E&M

Pin Pair Cct Cct Cct
Plug Pager Relay Trunk
26 W-BL 1 MIA1 1 1 T1
1 BL-W MIB1 R1
27 W-O POA1 K5A1 TR1
2-J1 2 O-W POB1 K5B1 RR1
or 28 W-G PKA1 K6A1 E1
4-J2 3 G-W PKB1 K6B1 M1
or 29 W-BR 2 MIA2 2 2 T2
6-J3 4 BR-W MIB2 R2
or 30 W-S POA2 K5A2 TR2
8-J4 5 S-W POB2 K5B2 RR2
31 R-BL PKA2 K6A2 E2
6 BL-R PKB2 K6B2 M2
32 R-O 3 MIA3 3 3 T3
7 O-R MIB3 R3
33 R-G POA3 K5A3 TR3
8 G-R POB3 K5B3 RR3
34 R-BR PKA3 K6A3 E3
9 BR-R PKB3 K6B3 M3
35 R-S 4 MIA4 4 4 T4
10 S-R MIB4 R4
36 BK-BL POA4 K5A4 TR4
11 BL-BK POB4 K5B4 RR4
37 BK-O PKA4 K6A4 E4
12 O-BK PKB4 K6B4 M4
38 BK-G SPARE
(Page 1 of 2)

374
 System Cabling

Table 79: SX-200 EL or SX-200 ML (RM) Universal Card

Tip and Ring Assignments (continued)
J1, J2, J3, and J4 Lead Designation

Slot / MOH/ DTMF E&M

Pin Pair Cct Cct Cct
Plug Pager Relay Trunk
13 G-BK SPARE
39 BK-BR 1 MIA1 1 1 T1
14 BR-BK MIB1 R1
40 BK-S POA1 K5A1 TR1
1-J1 15 S-BK POB1 K5B1 RR1
or 41 Y-BL PKA1 K6A1 E1
3-J2 16 BL-Y PKB1 K6B1 M1
or 42 Y-O 2 MIA2 2 2 T2
5-J3 17 O-Y MIB2 R2
or 43 Y-G POA2 K5A2 TR2
7-J4 18 G-Y POB2 K5B2 RR2
44 Y-BR PKA2 K6A2 E2
19 BR-Y PKB2 K6B2 M2
45 Y-S 3 MIA3 3 3 T3
20 S-Y MIB3 R3
46 V-BL POA3 K5A3 TR3
21 BL-V POB3 K5B3 RR3
47 V-O PKA3 K6A3 E3
22 O-V PKB3 K6B3 M3
48 V-G 4 MIA4 4 4 T4
23 G-V MIB4 R4
49 V-BR POA4 K5A4 TR4
24 BR-V POB4 K5B4 RR4
50 V-S PKA4 K6A4 E4
25 S-V PKB4 K6B4 M4
(Page 2 of 2)

375
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 80: Music-on-Hold/Pager Unit Pinouts (Peripheral Cabinets)

Wire Signal Color Description
32 MOH- R-O Music-on-Hold Inputs
7 MOH+ O-R
34 PAGE- R-BR Paging Input/Output
9 PAGE+ BR-R
36 PAGEREL(NC) BK-BL Page Relay, Normally Closed contact
11 PAGEREL(C) BL-BK Page Relay Common
37 PAGEREL(NO) BK-O Page Relay, Normally Open contact
12 PAGEREL(C) O-BK Page Relay Common
39 NIGHTBELL1- BK-BR Night Bell 1 relay contacts
14 NIGHTBELL1+ BR-BK
41 NIGHTBELL2- Y-BL Night Bell 2 relay contacts
16 NIGHTBELL2+ BL-Y
45 ALARM- Y-S Alarm relay contacts
20 ALARM+ S-Y
50 RING V-S Connection to DNIC Line
25 TIP S-V Connection to DNIC Line

376
 Appendix D
Phones and Features
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

378
 Phones and Features

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Abbreviated Dial

Account Codes -
Do Not Display

Account Codes
Add Held

Auto-Answer

Auto-Hold
Auto Latch N/A on
Microphone Symbol/
Spectralink

ACD - Sets: 430/4150

Supervisor

ACD - Sets: Agent 430/4150

Background Music N/A on

Symbol/
Spectralink

Broker’s Call See See See Swap-

(Swap) Swap- Swap- Trade
Trade Trade

Broker’s Call With See See See Swap- See

Transfer (Transfer Swap- Swap- Trade Swap-
With Privacy) Trade Trade Trade

Busy Lamp Field N/A on

Symbol/
Spectralink

Calculator

Call Forwarding -
Busy

Call Forwarding -
Busy/No Answer

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 1 of 13)

379
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Call Forwarding -
Display Prime as
Forwarded

Call Forwarding -
No Answer

Call Forwarding -
External

Call Forwarding -
Always

Call Forwarding -
Forced Call
Forward

Call Forwarding -
Forward Calls

Call Forwarding -
I’m Here

Call Forwarding -
Internal / External
Split

Call Forwarding - N/A on

Toggle Keys Symbol

Call Logging N/A on

Symbol

Call Monitor
Call Park from
Single-line Sets

Call Park from

Multi-line Sets

Call Park -
Destination Phone

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 2 of 13)

380
 Phones and Features

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Call Park - Specific N/A on

Orbit Symbol

Call Park System N/A on

Orbit Symbol

Callback
Callback - Busy

Callback - No
Answer

Calling Party
Number (CPN)
Substitution

Campon

Campon Priority
Over Call Forward
Busy

Campon Warning
Tone

CENTREX™
Compatibility
(Double Flash
Over Trunk)

CENTREX
Compatibility
(Single Flash Over
Trunk)

CLASS (station ONS

side) for Analog class
Telephones

CLASS for Digital

Sets

Clear All Features

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 3 of 13)

381
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

CO Line Group
Key

CO Line Key

CO Line - Select
Direct

CO Line Type -
Direct Access -
Bypass Key
System Toll
Control

Conference

Date and Time

Setup

Direct Inward
Dialing (DID)
Translation

Direct Station N/A on

Page/Busy Lamp Symbol/
Field Spectralink

Direct Station N/A on

Select (DSS) Key Symbol/
Spectralink

Direct Station N/A on

Select / Busy Symbol/
Lamp Field Spectralink
(DSS/BLF) Call
Pickup

Direct Trunk Select N/A on

Symbol

Disconnect Alarm

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 4 of 13)

382
 Phones and Features

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Display Caller ID N/A on

on Non-Prime Symbol
Lines

Display Keys N/A on

Symbol

Distinctive Ring
Tones

Do Not Disturb

DTS/CO LIne
Transfer Call
Handling

Emergency Call
Handling

Emergency Calls ONS

(911) Reporting class only
and Detection to
Display Sets

Expensive Route
Warning

Feature Keys

Flash - Calibrated

Flash Control

Flash Disable

Flash For Dial 0

(Attendant)

Flash For Waiting

Call

Forward Campon N/A on

Symbol

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 5 of 13)

383
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Group Listening 4150 only N/A on N/A on

4015/ Symbol/
5010 Spectralink

Handset Mute 4150 only N/A on 420 or

Symbol

Handset Receiver
Volume Control

Handsfree 4150 only N/A on 420,

Announce Symbol or
Spectralink

Handsfree 5215 only N/A on

Answerback to a Symbol/
Directed Page Spectralink

Handsfree 5215 only N/A on

Answerback to an Symbol/
Intercom Call Spectralink

Handsfree (Full (Half N/A on (Half

Operation duplex) duplex) Symbol/ duplex)
Spectralink

Headset Mode N/A on N/A on

Feature Key 401+/4001/ Symbol/
5201 Spectralink

Headset Mode - 4150 only N/A on

Automatic Symbol

Headset Operation N/A on N/A on Requires

4001/5201 Symbol external
amplifier

Headset With 4150 only N/A on N/A on

In-line Switch 4001/5201 Symbol/
Operation Spectralink

Hold

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 6 of 13)

384
 Phones and Features

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Hold and Page N/A on

Symbol/
Spectralink

Hold Reminder

Holiday Messages

Hot Line

I Hold You Hold N/A on 5020 & 5220

4015

Inhibit Trunk
Ring-Me-Back
During Dialing

Intercom Calls 4001 only N/A on

Symbol/
Spectralink

Language Change N/A on

Symbol

Last Number
Redial

Last Party N/A on

Receives Dial Symbol/
Tone Spectralink

Line Lockout
Line Preference

Line Privacy

Line Selection
Line Types and
Appearances

Logical Lines

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 7 of 13)

385
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Mailbox Key N/A on

Symbol/
Spectralink

Manual Line (Dial

0 Hotline)

Messaging -
Advisory

Messaging - Call
Me Back

MILINK™ Data 430 only 420 only

Module

Names CDE only CDE only CDE only

Never a Consultee

Never a
Forwardee

New Call Ring

Night/Day
Switching

Non-Busy
Extension

Off-Hook Alarm to
Display Sets

Off-Hook Voice 4150 only N/A on 420,

Announce Symbol or
Spectralink

Off-Premises
Extension

ONS Ring Groups Master Master Master Master or

Master only
only only only member

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 8 of 13)

386
 Phones and Features

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Originate Only
Extensions

Override (Intrude)

Override Security
Paged Party Ring 401 & N/A on
Tone 4001 only Symbol/
Spectralink

Paging - PA

Paging -
Telephones

Paging - PA and
‘
Telephones

Paging - All Set

Page

Park and Page N/A on

Symbol

Personal Speed
Call

Phonebook

Phone Twinning
Pickup - Local and
Directed

Priority Dial 0

Privacy Enable /
Privacy Release

Programmable N/A on
Key Module (PKM) Symbol/
Spectralink

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 9 of 13)

387
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Receive Only
Extensions

Record a Call 4150 only N/A on 420 or

Symbol

Reminder

Reminders -
Multiple

Ringer Control

Ringing -
Discriminating

Secretarial Line N/A on

Symbol/
Spectralink

Secure Hot Swap

Single Button
Transfer to Voice
mail

Speak@Ease N/A on
Support 4DN

Speaker Volume
Control

Speed Call Key N/A on

Symbol

Split
Subattendant - N/A on
Basic Function Symbol/
Spectralink

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
Enhanced 5224 only
Functions

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 10 of 13)

388
 Phones and Features

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
Abbreviated Dial 5224 only
Programming

Subattendant -
Advisory Message
Setup

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
Automatic Call 5224 only
Wakeup

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
Call Blocking 5224 only

Subattendant -
Call Forward
Setup and Cancel

Subattendant -
Call Logging

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
Calls Waiting 5224 only
Indication

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
Centralized 5224 only
Answering Position
(RLT)

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
Date and Time 5224 only
Setup

Subattendant -
Hold Positions

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
LDN Keys 5224 only

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
New Call Ring 5224 only

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 11 of 13)

389
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Subattendant -
Paged Hold
Access

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
Recall 5224 only

Subattendant - 5020/5220/
Station DND Setup 5224 only

SUPERET 3DN
and SUPERSET
4DN Auto-Answer
For Directed Page
Calls

SUPERSET 3DN
and SUPERSET
4DN Option

SUPERSET LCD
Display

Swap (Trade
Calls)

Swap Campon

System Fail
Transfer (SFT)

TAPI Support Over 4150 only 4125 only

DNIC

Tone
Demonstration

Transfer
Transfer Dial Tone

Transfer Security
(Recall)

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 12 of 13)

390
 Phones and Features

Table 81: Mitel Phones and Features (continued)

SS420
SS4025
SS4015 SS4125
SS401
SS430 5010 IP 5020 IP
Feature SS4001 5207 IP ONS
SS4150 5212 IP* 5220 IP*
5201 IP 5224 IP*
5215 IP*
Symbol
Spectralink

Trunk Answer
From Any Station
(TAFAS)

Trunk Operation -
Direct Inward
System Access
(DISA)

Uniform Call
Distribution

Voice mail
Prompts - Display

Whisper Announce
- From

Whisper Announce N/A on

- To Symbol/
Spectralink

* Includes Dual Mode versions (Page 13 of 13)

391
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

392
 Appendix E
Handling Fiber
Optic Cables
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

394
 Handling Fiber Optic Cables

Guidelines for Handling Fiber Optic Cable

• Never touch the tip of a fiber connector. Cleanliness of the connector

ferrule (tip) is important for error-free transmission.

• Always place the dust caps onto the connectors immediately after
disconnecting.

• You can clean the ferrule tips on the connectors with ethyl alcohol.

• Fiber optic cables are often more easily installed and pulled than
copper because of their light weight and flexibility. However, take care
not to exceed the minimum bend radius or maximum tensile strength.

• Procedures for the repairing, splicing, or assembling of fiber optic

cables are available from fiber component manufacturers (many offer
training courses).

WARNING:FIBER OPTIC SOURCES EMIT INFRARED LIGHT

THAT IS INVISIBLE TO THE HUMAN EYE. NEVER LOOK
DIRECTLY INTO A SOURCE OR INTO THE END OF A FIBER
ENERGIZED BY A SOURCE BECAUSE IT CAN DAMAGE THE
RETINA. WHEN WORKING WITH RAW FIBER OPTIC CABLE,
BE CAREFUL OF THE FIBER ENDS OR SLIVERS THAT CAN
PUNCTURE THE SKIN OR CAUSE IRRITATION.

Specifications
At each end of a fiber optic cable is a Fiber Interface Module (FIM). At the
transmitting end, the FIM converts electrical signals into pulses of light to
be transmitted over the cable. At the receiving end, the FIM converts the
pulses of light back into electrical signals usable by the node.
The FIM connects the controller to a peripheral cabinet, or NSU. Each FIM
variant may be identified by its optical wavelength and fiber type (indicated
on the FIM faceplate). The same FIM variant must be used at each end of
a fiber optic cable. However, a node may be equipped with different FIM
variants to suit the length of each cable run.
See the SX-200 ICP Technical Documentation for Fiber Interface Module
specifications.

395
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Operation
The FIM has three functional sections: a transmitter, a receiver, and a
control section.
The transmitter section accepts data from the node in which it is installed.
The data is converted to byte-interleaved format, and a checksum is
calculated. The checksum byte is combined with the data and the frame
synchronization information. The frame is encoded as serial data and
transmitted on the fiber.
The receiver section converts the incoming data to parallel format, extracts
the frame synchronization information, and decodes the data. Control and
status information is extracted and further decoded. The checksum is
verified and an error counter updated. The status information and data are
combined, frame-aligned, and re-formatted for output.
The control section generates control signals and the transmit clocks. This
section also regenerates the telephony clocks for the peripheral nodes,
and provides status information for the Main Controller.
Two LEDs indicate the detection of local and remote clocks.

396
 Appendix F
Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

398
 Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips

About Folio Views

The documentation CD-ROM contains all of the technical information in an
electronic file called an “infobase”. Folio Views, the infobase viewer, has
powerful search capabilities that let you find information quickly and easily.
Once you've found the information that you need, you can read it online,
print sections, or export segments to word processing files.

How do I print a procedure from the infobase?

1. In the Table of Contents, select the check box of the section that you
want to print.
2. On the File menu, click Print.
3. Click the Print Document tab.
4. Click Section.
CAUTION:Do not click all or you will print the entire infobase.
5. Click OK.

399
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

How do I export a section of the infobase to a word

processing file?
1. In the Table of Contents, select the check box of the section that you
want to export.
2. On the File menu, click Export.
3. In the Save In list, select the save location.
4. In the File name box, type a name.
5. In the Save as type list, select a file type.
6. In the Export Range list, select Checked Branches.
7. Click Export.

How do I search the entire infobase?

1. Click Advanced Query .
2. In the Query For box, type your search criteria.

3. Click OK.
To view the next hit, click Next Hit .
To view the previous hit, click Previous Hit .

400
 Folio Views (E-Docs) Tips

How do I search a section of the infobase?

1. In the Table of Contents, select the check box of the section that you
want to search.

2. Click Advanced Query .

3. In the Query For box, type your search criteria.
4. Ensure that the Checked branches check box is selected.
5. Click OK.
To view the next hit, click Next Hit .
to view the previous hit, click Previous Hit .

401
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

402
 Index

Numerics B
2nd port on IP Phones, backing up to FTP 233
enabling 171 Backups 203
6000 Managed Application CDE database 203
Server 151 creating directories 203
6010 Teleworker Solution DHCP server data 203
programming 151 performing 203
requirements 151 voice mail 203
Teleworker Network when to back up 203
Analyzer 152 Basic controller 26
testing connectivity 152 Basic maintenance commands 223
Basic troubleshooting 237
A Blank database 205
About advanced Browser requirements 28
troubleshooting 277
About the SX-200 ICP 8 C
ACD, programming datasets 143 Cabinet Configuration Rules 13, 14
Administrator passcode 99 Cabinet configuration rules 13
Administrator’s mailbox See System Cables, required 28
Administrator’s mailbox Call Forward, programming
Advanced installation overview 169 External 159
Air Access Points 141 Call logging
Alarm devices, connecting 74 printer 30
Alarms, programming e-mail Card configuration, displaying 223
notification 187 CDE forms
Analog Main Board, replacing 200 checklist 294
Analog Option Board 26 database backup 203
Analog Option Board, installing 39 default database
Analog trunks configuration 16
general signaling and supervision default database values 301
concepts 251 list of 299
programming 131 Channel associated signaling 264
troubleshooting 251 Checking
ANI/DNIS, programming on incoming LEDs 241
trunks 135 maintenance logs 230
antistatic wrist strap 37, 195 system 194
ASU, installing 64 system LEDs 237, 277
Attendant console Checklist
connecting PKM 71 CDE forms 294
deleting 109 installation 27
programming 104 IP 296
User Guides 4 system health 193
Audio quality, troubleshooting 291 CIM
Auto program sets 107 Peripheral Cabinet 57

403
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Quad CIM Module 26 Dual/Quad DSP MMC 26

CIM, port pinout 369 Ethernet cable 22
Circuit descriptor, programming for front panel 24
Hotel/Motel 143 hard drive 27, 46, 199
CLASS trunks, programming 139 hardware 24
Clock Module 26 installing 31
installing 48 IP address 178
replacing 202 LEDs 241
Command sequences, entering 221 maintenance port 221
Commands, maintenance optional hardware 26, 37
report 227 powering down 196
system 223 powering up 196
traffic measurement 229 Quad CIM Module 44
Common channel signaling 264 rack mounting 53
CompactFlash card rear panel 24
loading software on 35 relay pinouts 368
Computer remote upgrade 209
configuring for connection 66 removing top cover 38
configuring Windows 2000 DHCP system identity 223
server 178 system reset 197
connecting to Maintenance Telnet connection 83
port 82 wall mounting 49
requirements 28, 82 Web Interface connection 84
Connecting phones and lines 66 Copper Interface Module See CIM
Connectivity, IP phones COS options
troubleshooting 280 Hotel/Motel 149
Connectors NSU 113, 126
controller 24 Record a Call 98
required 28 Cover, removing 38
Console See Attendant console Customer data, programming 82
Contacting Mitel 6
Controller D
Analog Main Board 200 D4 DS-1 See T1 trunk
Analog Option Board 26, 39 Database
basic configuration 26 default configuration 16
CIM pinout 369 default values 301
Clock Module 26, 48, 202 installing an alternate
components 25 database 205
connecting to computer 82 programming 82
DHCP settings 178 Dataset printer, programming
displaying card configuration 223 port 105
DSP Module 41, 202 Debug option, phone 240
Dual FIM Module 43, 202 Default database
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module 45 values 299

404
 Index

Default database values 301 installing 43

Deleting devices 109 replacing 202
DHCP Dual T1/E1 Framer 130
backing up server 203 Dual T1/E1 Framer Module
configuring Windows 2000 installing 45
server 178 programming 130
controller settings 178
one DHCP server for multiple E
VLANS 177 E&M trunk
one server for two VLANs 175 troubleshooting 259
one server per VLAN 172 type I 259
router on a stick 177 type V 261
Diagnostic Function E911, programming e-mail
Commands 231 notification 187
Dial-in trunks, programming 133 Ear and mouth trunk See E&M trunk
DID/loop trunk, troubleshooting 257 E-mail
Direct inward dialing See DID/loop alarms notification 187
trunk E911 calls notification 187
Directories, for backups 203 forward voice mail to e-mail 186
Directory voice prompt 103 emailing 233
DISA trunks, programming 134 Embedded PRI
Distortion, measuring on LS programming 125
lines 218 Embedded voice mail See Voice mail
DNIC enabling PC port 171
phones and lines 66 Ethernet cable 22
pinouts 66 Ethernet switch, installing 32
programming DNIC circuits 104 Exporting Folio Views sections 400
DNIS 135 Extension number, four-digits 205
Documentation set 4, 5 External Call Forward,
documents on CD-ROM 4 programming 159
Folio Views 400
helpful websites 6 F
printed documents 4 FAC See Feature Access Codes
Release Notes 5 Feature Access Codes
Technical Bulletins 5 Phonebook 103
technical training material 4 Send Message 98
Door opener 72 Features
Door sense, port pinout 368 Phonebook 103
DSP Configuration Options 12 phones feature list 379
DSP MMC 26 programming phone features 88
DSP Module Record a Call 97
installing 41 Fiber Interface Module See FIM
replacing 202 Fiber optic cables
Dual FIM Module 26 FIM 395

405
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

guidelines for handling 395 installing 46

FIM replacing 199
about 395 Hardware
Dual FIM Module 26 Analog Option Board 39
operation 396 ASU 64
Peripheral Cabinet 57 cabinet control cards 61
Firmware, upgrading set CIM, Peripheral Cabinet 57
firmware 216 Clock Module 48
Folio Views computer 28
about 400 computer requirements 82
exporting sections 400 controller 24
printing sections 399 controller hard drive 46
searching 400 digital services cards and
Forms modules 61
checklist 294 DSP Module 41
database backup 203 Dual FIM Module 43
default database Dual T1/E1 Framer Module 45
configuration 16 FIM, Peripheral Cabinet 57
default database values 301 hard drive 46
list of 299 interface cards and modules 59
FRUsSee Part Numbers Music on Hold 72
FTP NSU 54
backing up to remote server 203 optional hardware 37
setting up server 75 overview 24
paging/door opener 72
G Peripheral Cabinet 57
General network ports and connectors 24
troubleshooting 278 Quad CIM Module 44
General signalling and supervision rack mounting controller/NSU 53
concepts 251 requirements 27
General troubleshooting steps 240 wall mounting controller 49
Greetings Health, system health checklist 193
assigning RAD greetings to Hotel/Motel
ports 97 COS options 149
recording RAD greetings 96 Front Desk User Guide 4
Ground start trunk, PMS messages 270
troubleshooting 255 programming circuit
Grounding stud 31 descriptor 143
Guidelines troubleshooting 270
handling fiber optic cables 395 Hubs 32
Hunt group
H assigning voice mail ports 97
Handling PCB cards 37, 195 naming 97
Hard drive 27 Phonebook 103

406
 Index

I programming NSU’s 118

I & M Course 3 removing from IP phone 289
IMAT 117 IP checklist 296
Online Help 4 IP networking, configuration
Indicators, description 237, 277 questions 170
initialize system 198 IP Phone Analyzer 289
Installation IP phones See Phones
Advanced installation IP ports, used by controller 85
overview 169 IP trunks, troubleshooting 294
alternate database 205 ISDN Maintenance and
Analog Option Board 39 Administration Tool See IMAT
ASU 64
before you start 21 K
checklist 27 Kermit
Clock Module 48 using for backups 203
controller hard drive 46 using to back up log and trap
DSP Module 41 files 232, 234
Dual FIM Module 43 Knowledge Base 5
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module 45
FTP server 75 L
handling PCB cards 37, 195 LAN
IP Phones 67 guidelines 21
Music on Hold 72 one DHCP server for multiple
NSU 54 VLANS 177
ONS/CLASS phones and one DHCP server for two
lines 66 VLANs 175
overview 30 one DHCP server per VLAN 172
paging/door opener 72 requirements 29
Peripheral Cabinet 57 router on a stick 177
phones and lines 66 setting up a customer LAN 21
PKM 68 virtual LANs (VLANs) 172
Quad CIM Module 44 Layer 2 switch, installing 32
quick installation 22 LEDs
quick installation tool 66 checking 241
requirements 27 controller 241
setting up a customer LAN 21 meaning 237, 277
tools 27 NSU 243
verifying installation 77 Light bulb symbol 7
Installing 205 Lights, controller front panel 237,
IP address 277
programming controller’s 178 LIGHTWARE certification 3
requirements 29 Lines 140, 218
IP address, static connecting 66
assigning to IP phones 287 controller port pinouts 66

407
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

installing 66 system identity 223

loop start 252 Telnet requirements 221
requirements 28 tips 233, 234
List of forms 299 traffic measurement
Loading software on CompactFlash commands 229
card 35 upgrading set firmware 216
Local Area Network See LAN upgrading system software 206
Logging in 222 Manager passcode 99
Logging out 222 Manual Maker, creating user
Logs 233 guides 6
commands 223 measuring loop start 140, 218
emailing 233 measuring LS 140, 218
maintenance logs 230 Message length timer 97
Loop start line/trunk, Mitel
troubleshooting 252 contacting 6
Loss levels, measuring on LS Mitel Knowledge Base 5
lines 218 Mitel Networks
LS Measurement Tool 218 Customer Documentation 6
LS/CLASS Order Desk 6
phones and lines 66 Repair Department 6
pinouts 66 Return of Merchandise
Authorization (RMA) 6
M subscription service 209
Mailboxes, naming 103 Technical Support 7
Maintenance Mitel Online
backups 203 accessing 5
checking the system 194 downloading a document 5
Diagnostic Function Manual Maker 6
commands 231 Mitel Options Password 6
displaying card configuration 223 product and technical
entering commands 221 documentation 5
installing an alternate registered user 5
database 205 viewing a document 5
log commands 230 Mitel Options Password 6
logging in 222 Mode, key system or PBX 77
logging out 222 MOH See Music on Hold
logs commands 223 MOSS options
maintenance port 221 enabling 86
powering down system 196 NSU 114
powering up system 196 Multi-line sets See Phones
replacing IP phones 211, 215 Music on Hold 72
report commands 227 source 29
system commands 223 MyAdministrator
system health checklist 193 Online Help 4

408
 Index

programming 158 programming static IP

requirements 158 address 118
User Guides 4 rack mounting 53
T1 pinouts 55
N troubleshooting 249
Network
checklist 278 O
configuration questions 170 ONS/CLASS
configuring Windows 2000 DHCP installing phones and lines 66
server 178 pinouts 66
connecting computer to ports 66
controller 82 Option modules 31
helpful websites 6 Order Desk 6
hubs 32
installing Layer 2 switch 32 P
line requirements 28 Paging 72
one DHCP server for multiple pinouts 368
VLANS 177 Panel indicators 237, 277
one DHCP server for two Part Numbers
VLANs 175 Part numbers 351
one DHCP server per VLAN 172 Passcode
requirements 29 Administrator’s passcode 99
router on a stick 177 default passcodes 99
setting up FTP server 75 Manager passcode 99
Telnet connection to Password See Passcode
controller 83 PC port
Telnet requirements 221 enabling on IP Phones 171
troubleshooting 278 PC See Computer
virtual LANs (VLANs) 172 PCB cards, handling 37, 195
Web Interface connection to PDF documents, downloading 5
controller 84 Peripheral Cabinet
Network analyzer 280 cabinet control cards 61
Night Bells 74 CIM 57
Non dial-in trunks, configuration rules 62
programming 131 digital services cards and
NSU modules 61
COS options 113, 126 Dual FIM Module 26
DIP switch 55 FIM 57
Dual FIM Module 26 installing 57
installing 54 interface cards and modules 59
LEDs 243 pinout 372
MOSS options 114 powering down 196
powering down 196 powering up 196
powering up 196 programming PRI card 112

409
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Quad CIM Module 26 upgrading set firmware 216

Peripheral Cabinet, SX-200 EL 27 User Guides 4
Peripherals, troubleshooting 246 Pinouts
Phonebook controller CIM port 369
directory voice prompt 103 controller relay 368
Feature Access Code 103 DNIC 66
naming mailboxes 103 LS/CLASS 66
programming 103 NSU T1 55
voice mail hunt group 103 ONS/CLASS 66
Phones 171 paging/door sense 368
assigning static IP Peripheral Cabinet 372
addresses 287 SX-200 EL/ML 372
attendant consoles 104 SX-200 EL/ML universal
audio quality 291 card 374
auto program 107 PKM
connecting 66 connecting to attendant
controller port pinouts 66 console 71
debug option 240 installing 68
default database programmable keys 92
configuration 16 PMS
deleting 109 5-digit extension number 271
features list 379 can’t communicate with PBX 273
four-digits extension number 205 message 270
installing 66 message format 271
network analyzer 280 programming interface 145
PKM 68 testing PBX interface 273
programmable keys 90, 91 troubleshooting 270
programming analog devices to Ports
SIM2 112 CIM 369
programming features 88 connecting computer to
programming multi-line sets 111 controller 82
registration 281 controller 24
removing static IP address 289 DNIC 66
replacing IP phones 211, 215 LS/CLASS 66
restarting 216 maintenance port 221
subattendant sets 104 ONS/CLASS 66
Symbol MiNET Wireless paging/door 368
Phones 141 programming printer ports 105
Symbol Netvision MiNET relay connector 368
Phone 4 serial port converter 145
troubleshooting 246 used by controller 85
troubleshooting IP phone Power
connectivity 280 LED meaning 237, 277
twinning Symbol phone 142 powering down system 196

410
 Index

powering up system 195 non dial-in trunks 131

Power Fail Transfer 66 paging/door opener 72
Premier 22, 31 phone features 88
Premier Business systems 22, 31 Phonebook 103
Premier database 205 PMS Interface 145
PRI card PRI card, Peripheral Cabinet 112
programming in Peripheral printer ports 105
Cabinet 112 RAD 96
Printed Circuit Board See PCB cards Record a Call 97
Printed documents 4 single line voice station 110
Printer, programming ports 105 SMTP server information 185
Printing Folio views sections 399 Spectralink Wireless
Product and technical Telephones 153
documentation 5 static address, IP phones 287
Programmable Key Module See PKM static IP address, NSU 118
Programmable keys, phones 90, 91 Subattendant set 104
Programmable keys, PKMs 92 Telnet connection to
Programming 130 controller 83
6010 Teleworker Solution 151 voice mail 93
ACD dataset 143 Web Interface connection to
analog device to SIM2 112 controller 84
analog trunks 131 Windows 2000 DHCP server 178
ANI/DNIS On Incoming Property Management System See
Trunks 135 PMS
attendant console 104
auto program sets 107 Q
CLASS trunks 139 QSIG
computer requirements 82 programming PRI card 112
customer data 82 Quad CIM Module 26
deleting device 109 installing 44
dial-in trunks 133 Quad DSP MMC 26
DISA trunks 134 Questions, network planning 170
DNIC circuits 104 Quick installation 22
e-mail notification of running tool 66
alarms/E911 187
Embedded PRI 125 R
enabling MOSS options 86 RAC See Record a Call
External Call Forward 159 Rack mounting 31
Forward voice mail to e-mail 186 controller/NSU 53
FTP server 75 ventilation 53
Hotel/Motel circuit descriptor 143 RAD
multi-line set 111 assign greetings to ports 97
Music on Hold 72 enabling 96
MyAdministrator 158 message length timer 97

411
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

naming hunt groups 97 one DHCP server for two

programming 96 VLANs 175
record greetings 96 one DHCP server per VLAN 172
Radio See Music on Hold router on a stick 177
Range programming setting up FTP server 75
deleting 109 Shutdown, system 197
dial-in trunks 134 Signaling
non dial-in trunks 132 channel associated 264
Record a Call common channel 264
assigning voice mail ports 98 Signaling and supervision, general
COS options 98 concepts 251
Feature Access Code 98 SIM2, programming analog
programming 97 device 112
Record RAD greetings 96 Single Line Voice Station,
Recorded Announcement Device programming 110
See RAD SMDR
Registered user 5 printer 30
Registration, troubleshooting IP SMTP, programming server
phone 281 information 185
Relay connector pinout 368 Software
Release Notes 5 computer 28
Repair Department 6 computer requirements 82
Repairs See Troubleshooting enabling MOSS options 86
Replacing loading on CompactFlash
Analog Main Board 200 card 35
Clock Module 202 log commands 230
DSP Module 202 phone features 88
Dual FIM 202 requirements 27
hard drive 199 upgrading system software 206
IP phones 211, 215 voice mail 93
Reset system 197 Software upgrade
Restarting IP Phones 216 before starting 5
Return of Merchandise Authorization Mitel Options Password 6
(RMA) 6 Speak@Ease 103
Specifications, ambient
S temperature 53
S1 Switch Setting 264 Spectralink Wireless Telephones
Safety Instructions 4, 7 programming 153
Searching Folio Views 400 Starting the system 195
Serial port converter 145 States of LEDs 237, 277
Server Static IP address See IP address
one DHCP server for multiple Station Message Detail Recording
VLANS 177 See SMDR
Status LEDs 237, 277

412
 Index

Stop symbol 7 maintenance commands 223,

Stratum Clock See Clock Module 227, 229
Stud, grounding 31 maintenance tips 234
Subattendant set optional components 26
allowable device types 104 phones and lines 66
deleting 109 phones features list 379
programming 104 powering down 196
User Guides 4 powering up 195, 196
Subscription service 209 remote upgrade 209
SUPERCONSOLE 1000 See shutdown 197
Attendant console software requirements 27
Surge protection 29 SX-200 EL Peripheral
SX-200 EL Peripheral Cabinet 27 Cabinet 27
SX-200 EL/ML system identity 223
pinouts 372 system reset 197
universal card pinout 374 upgrading 195
SX-200 EL/ML, migrating to an upgrading software 206
SX-200 ICP MX 211 verifying installation 77
SX-200 ICP See System System Administrator’s mailbox 96,
Symbol phones See Phones 99
Symbols, meaning of 7 accessing 99
System default passcodes 99
about the system 8 menu 100
backups 203 passcodes 99
checking 194 System Fail Transfer 66
checking LEDs 241 System health checklist 193
commands 223 System Printer, programming
configuration 8, 26 port 105
controller 31
default database T
configuration 17 T1 trunk
displaying card configuration 223 A&B bits 266
forms default database A-B signaling states 266
values 301 loopback 265
four-digits extension number 205 NSU pinouts 55
general signaling and supervision signaling types 264
concepts 251 synchronization 263
guidelines for handling fiber optic troubleshooting 263
cables 395 T1/E1
hardware 24 Dual T1/E1 Framer Module 26
hardware requirements 27 T1/E1 Module 26
initialization 198 Tape player See Music on Hold
installation overview 30 TB See Technical Bulletins
list of forms 299 Technical Bulletins 5

413
SX-200 ICP MX Technician’s Handbook

Technical Documentation 4 IP phone connectivity 280

Technical Support 7 IP phone registration 281
before you call 239 IP trunks 294
Technical terms, helpful websites 6 loop start line/trunk 252
Technical training material 4 network 278
Technician, requirements 3 NSU 249
Technician’s Handbook 4 phone audio quality 291
about 3 phone debug option 240
audience 3 phones and peripherals 246
safety instructions 7 PMS 270
symbols used in 7 sniffer 280
Teleworker See 6010 Teleworker T1 trunk 263
Solution Technical Support 7
Telnet testing voice mail operation 102
connecting to controller 83 tools 238
requirements 221 voice mail 268
Temperature in rack mount, Trunks 140, 218
maximum 53 analog trunks 131, 251
Templates for mounting units 31 ANI/DNIS 135
Testing CLASS trunks 139
6010 Teleworker Solution default database
connectivity 152 configuration 17
PBX-PMS interface 273 dial-in trunks 133
voice mail operation 102 DID/loop 257
Tip and ring assignment See Pinouts DISA trunks 134
Tips, maintenance 233 E&M 259
Tools general signaling and supervision
installation 27 concepts 251
running quick installation tool 66 ground start trunk 255
troubleshooting 238 IP trunks 294
Trap files 233 loop start 252
backing up to FTP 233 non dial-in trunks 131
backing up using Kermit 232 signaling 252
Troubleshooting T1 trunk 263
about advanced
troubleshooting 277 U
about basic troubleshooting 237 Upgrading
analog trunks 251 hard drive 46
checking LEDs 241 Release 1.x systems 206
DID/loop trunk 257 remotely 209
E&M trunk 259 set firmware 216
general steps 240 system 195
ground start trunk 255 User Guides, creating using Manual
Hotel/Motel 270 Maker 6

414
 Index

V
Verifying system installation 77
Viewing or downloading a
document 5
Virtual LAN (VLAN) See LAN 172
Virtual Private Network (VPN) See
Networking
Voice mail
Administrator’s mailbox 99
assigning ports to hunt groups 97
assigning RAC ports 98
backups 203
default database
configuration 17
default passcodes 99
passcodes 99
Phonebook hunt group 103
programming 93
programming forward to
e-mail 186
System Administrator’s mailbox
menu 100
testing operation 102
troubleshooting 268
User Guide 4
Voice station, programming 110
Voice-only system 3

W
Wall mounting controller 49
Web Interface
connecting to controller 84
Websites, helpful 6
Wireless phones See Phones
Wireless Telephones See Spectralink
Wireless Telephones

Y
Yield symbol 7

415
®,™ Trademark of Mitel Networks Corporation
© Copyright 2006, Mitel Networks Corporation
All rights reserved